Basic Security Training Manual

Version 10 Revised 14th March 2017

 Paragon Academy Basic Security Training Manual

TABLE OF CONTENTS

Introduction.................................................................................................................................... 5
Instructions .................................................................................................................................. 5
The Academy Environment & Etiquette ................................ Error! Bookmark not defined.
About Paragon ............................................................................................................................ 5
1.0 – Introduction to security ......................................................................................................... 7
1.1 Introduction ....................................................................................................................... 7
The Program Agenda .............................................................................................................. 9
Foreword ............................................................................................................................... 10
Learning Journals .................................................................................................................. 11
1.2 Description of Industry Roles .......................................................................................... 13
1.3 Occupation of the Private Security Guard ....................................................................... 16
Specifications, Activities and Demands of Security Work ....................................................... 19
1.4 Section Summary ............................................................................................................. 27
2.0 - PSISA Act & Regulations .................................................................................................... 28
2.1 Introduction ........................................................................................................................ 28
2.2 Individual Responsibilities................................................................................................. 29
2.3 Duties, Standards & Regulations ....................................................................................... 31
2.4 Code of Conduct ................................................................................................................ 50
Complaints and Investigations .............................................................................................. 52
2.5 Section Summary ............................................................................................................... 53
3.0 Report writing
....................................................................................................................................................... 54
3.1 Introduction ........................................................................................................................ 54
3.3 Types and purposes of reports ........................................................................................... 62
3.4 Legal Implications & Confidentiality ................................................................................ 73
3.5 Writing Basics .................................................................................................................... 74
3.6 Taking Statements .............................................................................................................. 76
3.7 Methods of submitting reports ........................................................................................... 77
3.8 Section Summary ............................................................................................................... 78
4.0 – Sources of legal authority ................................................................................................... 79
4.1 Introduction ........................................................................................................................ 79
4.2 British common law ........................................................................................................... 79
4.3 Napoleonic code................................................................................................................. 79
4.4 The Constitution Act – The Charter of Rights and Freedoms ........................................... 80
4.5 Case Law ............................................................................................................................ 83
4.6 Ontario Statute Law and PIPEDA ..................................................................................... 84
4.6.1 Handling Information & PIPEDA (Personal Information Protection and Electronic
Documents Act) .................................................................................................................... 84
4.6.2 Employment Standards Act, “ESA RSO 2000”.......................................................... 91
4.6.3 Ontario Labour Relations Act (OLRA), RSO 1999 .................................................. 105
4.6.4 Liquor Licence Act, R.S.O. 1990 ............................................................................. 110

Page ii of 346 Basic Training Manual Version 10 – 14 March 2017 Version 9 – 12 January 2016
 Paragon Academy Basic Security Training Manual

4.6.5 Provincial Offences Act ............................................................................................ 118

4.6.6 Residential Tenancies Act, 1996............................................................................... 126
4.6.7 (T.P.A.) Trespass to Property Act Ontario, R.S.O. 1990 .......................................... 135
4.6.8 Highway Traffic Act ................................................................................................. 138
4.6.9 Smoke Free Ontario Act ........................................................................................... 140
4.6.10 Occupier’s Liability Act, R.S.O. 1990 .................................................................... 141
4.7 Municipal By-Laws ......................................................................................................... 142
4.8 Section Summary ............................................................................................................. 143
5.0 – Canadian Legal System .................................................................................................... 144
5.1 Introduction ...................................................................................................................... 144
5.2 Canadian Criminal Court System .................................................................................... 144
5.3 Search and Evidence ........................................................................................................ 153
5.3.1 Ontario Evidence Act ................................................................................................ 153
5.3.2 Canada Evidence Act ................................................................................................ 157
5.3.3 Securing a crime, accident or medical scene ............................................................ 167
5.3.4 Case Law - Searches ................................................................................................. 169
5.4 Criminal Law - Legal Definitions .................................................................................... 171
5.5 Criminal Code Organization and Offences – Overview .................................................. 175
5.6 Criminal Code – Specific Legal Authorities .................................................................... 179
5.7 Use of Force Theory ........................................................................................................ 185
5.8 Tort Law........................................................................................................................... 206
5.9 Section Summary ............................................................................................................. 210
6.0 – Effective Communications ................................................................................................ 211
6.1 Introduction ....................................................................................................................... 211
6.2 Communication skills ...................................................................................................... 211
6.3 Interpersonal Communications ......................................................................................... 212
6.4 Tactical Communications ................................................................................................ 218
Figure 6.4.a ......................................................................................................................... 220
................................................................................................................................. 220
6.5 Conflict Management....................................................................................................... 221
6.6 Section Summary ............................................................................................................. 229
7.0 – Sensitivity & Diversity Awareness .................................................................................... 230
7.1 Introduction ....................................................................................................................... 230
7.2 Assessing Biases ............................................................................................................... 230
7.3 How Differences Impact Situational Dynamics .............................................................. 232
7.4 Section Summary .............................................................................................................. 235
8.0 – Health & Safety and Emergency Response Preparation................................................. 236
8.1 Introduction ....................................................................................................................... 236
8.2 Occupational Health and Safety Act ................................................................................. 236
8.3 WHMIS - Workplace Hazardous Materials Information System ..................................... 237
8.4 Emergency Response Preparation .................................................................................... 242
8.4.1 Legal Duties ............................................................................................................... 242
8.4.2 Fire Emergencies ....................................................................................................... 243
8.4.3 Bomb Threats ............................................................................................................. 255
8.4.4 Suspicious Packages .................................................................................................. 260

Page iii of 346 Basic Training Manual Version 10 – 14 March 2017 Version 9 – 12 January 2016
 Paragon Academy Basic Security Training Manual

8.4.5 Explosive Devices ...................................................................................................... 260

8.4.6 Weapons Emergencies ............................................................................................... 263
8.4.7 Elevator Entrapments & Escalators ........................................................................... 266
8.4.8 Medical Emergencies Overview ................................................................................ 268
8.4.9 Role of Security in Emergencies ................................................................................ 270
8.4.10 Common Hazards..................................................................................................... 270
8.5 Section Summary ............................................................................................................. 272
9.0 – Basic Security Procedures ................................................................................................ 273
9.1 Introduction ....................................................................................................................... 273
9.2 Patrols & Fixed Posts ........................................................................................................ 273
9.3 Surveillance....................................................................................................................... 284
9.3.1 Closed Circuit Television .......................................................................................... 284
9.3.2 Alarm Monitoring and Response ............................................................................... 284
9.4 Lost and Found Property .................................................................................................. 291
9.5 Parcels & Deliveries ......................................................................................................... 294
9.6 Basic Elements of Security ............................................................................................... 295
9.6.1 Access Control ........................................................................................................... 295
9.6.2 Key control ................................................................................................................. 296
9.6.3 Vehicle Control .......................................................................................................... 297
9.6.4 Crowd Control ........................................................................................................... 302
9.7 Drug effects ....................................................................................................................... 307
9.8 Section Summary .............................................................................................................. 313
10.0 – Medical Emergencies ...................................................................................................... 314
10.1 Introduction ..................................................................................................................... 314
10.2 Emergency Scene Management ...................................................................................... 314
10.3 Shock, Unconsciousness, Fainting .................................................................................. 317
10.4 Choking adults ................................................................................................................ 317
10.5 Severe bleeding ............................................................................................................... 317
10.6 One rescuer CPR for adults............................................................................................. 318
10.7 Summary ......................................................................................................................... 318
Practice Quiz Questions ............................................................................................................. 319
Answer Key ............................................................................................................................ 342
Booking Your Examination ....................................................................................................... 343
Acknowledgements ..................................................................................................................... 344
References .................................................................................................................................. 345

Page iv of 346 Basic Training Manual Version 10 – 14 March 2017 Version 9 – 12 January 2016
 Paragon Academy Basic Security Training Manual

Introduction

Instructions

Welcome to PPI’s Basic Security Guard training program. This manual will assist you during
learning.
How this program is set up
This program is delivered over five days with forty (40) hours completed in class. There is an
equivalent amount of study time required for reading various sections of this manual to enhance
your knowledge. Upon successful completion of all aspects, we will send your name to the
Ministry of Community Safety & Correctional Services, Private Security Investigative Services
Branch so that you may book your appointment for testing.

About Paragon

Paragon Protection Limited, operated as Paragon Security is a privately owned Canadian company
that has been in business since 1976. It was founded by Ron France Senior. The company is still
owned by the France family and run by our President, Ron France Junior since 1994.
Paragon adheres to the organizational values and founding principles being an employee centered
and family oriented company. Paragon is a good place to work and succeed. Paragon is unique in
the contract security industry in Canada as it is the largest and most successful privately owned
organization of its type. This aspect along with the positive working environment and culture it
creates motivates our employees to do an excellent job.
Paragon seeks to provide value to our clients and employees while protecting assets, reducing
liability and providing excellent security services such that our clients’ organizations can operate
in the manner for which they were intended.
We provide Security Guard services as well as consulting and investigations. The types of
businesses we provide service to include Retail Shopping Centers, Commercial Office Buildings,
Residential and Condominium buildings, Hospitals, Community Colleges and Industrial or
Logistics businesses as well as others. Understanding the needs of these organizations and
providing excellent service, one shift at a time is the key to success for our employees.

Page 5 of 346 Basic Training Manual Version 10 – 14 March 2017 Paragon Security ©
 Paragon Academy Basic Security Training Manual

Paragon Academy Mission Statement

At Paragon, we appreciate the vast experiences and abilities of each person.
Our goal is to develop the skills of our potential candidates through comprehensive security
knowledge, jobsite best practices, training and situational awareness.
Each candidate is treated with respect, given the tools they need to succeed and supported through
every step of the process.

Page 6 of 346 Basic Training Manual Version 10 – 14 March 2017 Paragon Security ©
 Paragon Academy Basic Security Training Manual

1.0 – Introduction to security

1.1 Introduction

This Basic Security Guard training program was implemented as regulated by government
effective April 15th, 2010. Ontario regulations require 40 hours of training. This course covers the
important information needed for basic training.
This program is designed to assist you learning the information required to successfully pass the
provincial exam and obtain your Security Guard license. This program complies with the course
requirements as set out by the standards published by the Ministry of Community Safety &
Correctional Services, Private Security & Investigative Services Branch.
Standardized training was part of the global changes initiated by the Provincial Government with
passing a revised Act into law, the PSISA, RSO 2005. Prior to 2005, Private Security Guards and
Investigators were governed by the Private Investigators and Security Guards Act, RSO 1990.
Several events led to the changes brought about by this act; the old legislation proved somewhat
antiquated because of the changes in how services were being provided by the Public Police and
Private Security.
The old regulations were behind the times as new situations abounded whereby Private Security
was filling many of the needs previously filled by Public Police, yet new situations were not
captured under the regulations.
There was a recognized need for standardization as implemented in other provinces of Canada and
an inconsistency of governance for different types of security programs, services or coverage. This
included the fact that in-house security providers and Bouncers were not bound by the previous
laws, as they were outside of the scope of the legislation.
The primary catalyst for change was the result of government attention and focus groups engaging
in public discussions after a high profile death and resulting Coroner’s Inquest, known as the Shand
Inquest.

Page 7 of 346 Basic Training Manual Version 10 – 14 March 2017 Paragon Security ©
 Paragon Academy Basic Security Training Manual

Previous to the recommendations made by the Coroner in the Shand Inquest, the old Act governing
Security was put in place in 1966 and had not changed for twenty-four years. The
recommendations included the following changes:
1. Amendments to the Act Governing Private Security
2. The need for urgent change
3. Mandatory training, recertification standards and a specific curriculum for Security
Professionals
4. A license classification system
5. Identification of Security personnel
6. Record keeping & equipment
7. Portability of security licenses
8. Reporting use of force
9. An advisory about Excited Delirium
10. Specific training for Guards assigned to roles where they will use force
Of the recommendations made, the first nine changes in the above list have been fully
implemented. The last recommendation is a work in progress at the time of writing.
The course is written for you, the aspiring Security Guard. This workbook is written in plain
language, and supplements the program that includes lectures and exercises to help you learn the
material.
If there is anything you do not understand, be sure to let your facilitator know. Facilitators have
the experience to provide you with valuable examples from the security industry. When you start
working as a guard, you will gain your own important on-the-job experience.
This manual describes, in general terms, the duties and responsibilities of a Security Guard. It is
expected that students will become familiar enough with the materials that they will not only be
able to write (and pass) an examination, but will also be able to keep the content of these pages in
mind as they are called upon from day to day in the performance of their duties.

Page 8 of 346 Basic Training Manual Version 10 – 14 March 2017 Paragon Security ©
 Paragon Academy Basic Security Training Manual

The Program Agenda

Paragon module Ministry section Number of

hours in
class

DAY ONE - Eight Hours

1. Introduction to the Security Industry Introduction to the Security Industry 2

2. PSISA & Regulations The Private Security and Investigative Services Act 2
3. Report Writing Report Writing 2
4. Health & Safety & WHMIS - 2015 Health & Safety 2

DAY TWO – Eight hours

5. Sources of Legal Authorities Legal Authorities 4

6. Canadian Legal System Canadian Legal System 4

DAY THREE - Eight hours

7. Effective Communications Effective Communications 4

8. Use of Force Theory Use of Force Theory 2
9. Basic Security Procedures Part 1 Basic Security Procedures 2

DAY FOUR - Eight hours

10. Basic Security Procedures Part 2 Basic Security Procedures 1

11. Emergency Response Preparation Emergency Response Preparation 4
12. Sensitivity & Diversity Awareness Part I Sensitivity Training 3

DAY FIVE – Eight hours

13. Emergency First Aid – CPR Level B Emergency First Aid Level Certification 8

Total hours in class 40

Page 9 of 346 Basic Training Manual Version 10 – 14 March 2017 Paragon Security ©
 Paragon Academy Basic Security Training Manual

Foreword

This training program is intended to provide persons with the occupational and behavioural skills
and attitudes necessary to professionally function as a Security Guard as required by provincial
acts, regulations and in accordance with other legislation. Successful completion of this basic
training will provide new Security Guards with the concepts and knowledge so they may function
effectively and efficiently as security staff.
The subjects covered are intended to provide Security Guards with a sound basis on which to deal
with various on-the-job-responsibilities properly. Many tasks performed support enforcement of
rules and regulations. Creating good public relations and your awareness of the limits of legal
powers and the use of force are extremely important. On the successful completion of this training,
Security Guard candidates will be able to properly:
• Deal with the public in a professional and ethical manner
• Arrest people within the limits specified under the Criminal Code of Canada and Trespass
to Property Act
• Be aware of the rights and freedoms of individuals
• Communicate effectively, both verbally and in writing
• Present verbal and material evidence in Court
• Write reports
• Protect evidence and crime/accident scenes
• Conduct themselves appropriately in court
• Direct traffic
• Detect or prevent thefts and vandalism
• Report and deal appropriately with perimeter protection systems, intrusion, fire, and other
types of alarms
• Respond and take appropriate measures in emergency situations
• Respond to bomb threats and suspicious packages
• Respond to weapons emergencies
• Respond to fire emergencies
• Respond to other emergencies
• Perform other duties as required of Security Guards

Page 10 of 346 Basic Training Manual Version 10 – 14 March 2017 Paragon Security ©
 Paragon Academy Basic Security Training Manual

Learning Journals

Journals tend to be one of two styles; either objective and analytical or private and introspective
for personal development. You could use a combination of the two styles, if you prefer. We
promote the objective, analytical approach to assist your critical thinking skills which are the key
to your success in writing the Security Guard Exam and also to assist you solving problems you
will encounter on the job.
Why
• Several well researched studies indicate the process promotes critical thinking
• Learning journals enhance student learning
• Learning journals complement in-class study
• They promote self-awareness
• They help develop personal skills
• They assist you connecting ideas and concepts with real life situations
• The learning journal is a course requirement of the Ministry curriculum

Process
Researchers agree that the journal is not a place to express unfounded opinion rather it is a content
and process approach intended to assist students learn the course material, make learning more
relevant, meaningful, and memorable, and to make connections between theory and practice, and
encourage personal / individual professional growth and development through reflective thinking.
• The student records or annotates a course theme, issue, principle, concept, or lecture or
tutorial, activity or event in factual, objective terms
• Following reflection and introspection, explore the subject in writing
• This process includes subjective and personal interpretation
• What is the relevance, feeling and meaning to the student?

Page 11 of 346 Basic Training Manual Version 10 – 14 March 2017 Paragon Security ©
 Paragon Academy Basic Security Training Manual

Lecture
Briefly summarise the topics covered and your experience of the lecture, highlighting the points
important to you, and any questions you might have. Explain how the material applies or might
apply in your work life.

Readings
Briefly summarise the topics covered, highlighting the points important to you. Show how the
readings relate to lecture or team work. Critique them: what were their strong and weak points,
and why do you think so?

Team Work
Explain your team’s progress or lack thereof; detail what is happening and explore why things are
happening or not happening. Consider your role and contribution to the team’s task and process.
Compare this team to other experiences you have had.

Critical Incident
Here, describe any event or occurrence from the week related to the topics of the week, what it
means to you and why it is important in the context of the course. This section should include any
“light bulb moments.”

Page 12 of 346 Basic Training Manual Version 10 – 14 March 2017 Paragon Security ©
 Paragon Academy Basic Security Training Manual

1.2 Description of Industry Roles

Security Guards protect people, property and information (The Three P’s of Protection). Some
duties and responsibilities of a guard are extremely varied from site to site and there is also the
common theme of protection of the Three P’s. In order to satisfactorily undertake these
responsibilities, a Security Guard must understand the importance of the position and the general
duties of a Security Guard on a day to day basis. Guards must keep informed of changes and
developments within the industry and the expectations and obligations that are owed to the client,
the public, and his or her employer.
The security industry is one of the fastest growing industries in North America, as private security
continues to take on more of the roles traditionally filled by public police. According to a recent
Statistics Canada survey, there are more Security Guards working in Canada today than police
officers:
Private Security personnel outnumbered police officers in both 1991 and 1996. In 1996, there were
59,090 police officers in Canada compared to 82,010 private security personnel: 12,230 private
investigators and 69,780 Security Guards.
Criminal activity is not decreasing in frequency. Police agencies are expected to do more with
fewer resources. The widening gap between police service and demand must be filled with
something, and, based on the experiences of the last few decades in the United States of America
presumably it will be filled by private security.
While it is doubtful that a Security Guard would ever be called on to duplicate the extensive duties
of a police officer, it is possible to imagine private security facing increased responsibilities under
the guidance of the police. For example, Regina Police Service has recognized the advantage of a
direct interface with the private security industry, and undertaken extensive measures to coordinate
with that industry through its Cooperative Policing program.

There are two primary divisions of the security function responsibility in Canada: public (police,
military, coast guard, government intelligence, etc.) and private. Private Security may be deployed
in a variety of settings, each with a common and unique set of responsibilities.

Page 13 of 346 Basic Training Manual Version 10 – 14 March 2017 Paragon Security ©
 Paragon Academy Basic Security Training Manual

Examples of these roles include:

Uniformed security on sites
1. Commercial Office Towers
2. Retail Shopping Centres
3. Condominiums
4. Cooperative Housing or Apartment complexes
5. Publicly funded housing
6. Hotels
7. Hospitals and Public Sector
8. Industrial settings

Mobile patrol & response:

• Driving site to site, patrolling a variety of locations and responding to alarms and
emergency situations
• M.L.E.O. (Municipal Law Enforcement Officer) or C.C.O. (Certified Contract Officer)
enforcing select municipal parking bylaws such as parking offences by issuing city parking
offence notices, enforceable by fines
Uniformed or plain clothes duties (depending on jurisdiction)
• Transit facilities and transportation services, including trains, buses and commercial sea
going vessels
• Logistics, warehousing, shipping and materials storage facilities, including ports
• Door Staffs or Bouncers and Hotel Security (plain clothes/in-house) [also called
“Hospitality Industry” – do not confuse this term with Hospital]

Armed services (uniformed)

• Protecting cash in transit or large amounts of moveable valuables
Hospital industry
• Hospital patrols, control rooms, emergency room reception, patient watches
Plain clothes security
• Community and business leaders’ homes and offices such as Body Guards
• Loss Prevention Personnel – preventing thefts and frauds, making arrests and recovering
stolen property for retailers

Page 14 of 346 Basic Training Manual Version 10 – 14 March 2017 Paragon Security ©
 Paragon Academy Basic Security Training Manual

Private Investigators
(2) A private investigator is a person who performs work, for remuneration, that consists
primarily of conducting investigations in order to provide information.
(3) Examples of the types of information referred to in subsection (2) include information on;
(a) The character or actions of a person
(b) The business or occupation of a person
(c) The whereabouts of persons or property

Security Guards
A Security Guard is a person who performs work, for remuneration, that consists primarily of
guarding or patrolling for the purpose of protecting persons or property.
Examples of the types of work referred to in subsection (4) include:
• Acting as a bouncer;
• Acting as a bodyguard; and
• Performing services to prevent the loss of property through theft or sabotage in an
industrial, commercial, residential or retail environment;
• A reference to performing work for remuneration includes performing work pursuant
to an agreement that provides that the remuneration paid is contingent, in whole or in
part, on the completion.

Private Investigator
A private investigator provides information such as; the character, actions, business or
occupation of a person or business or the whereabouts of people or property for fees.

Peace officer
Peace officer means a person or a member of a class of persons set out in the definition of
“peace officer” in section 2 of the Criminal Code (Canada) 2005.

Page 15 of 346 Basic Training Manual Version 10 – 14 March 2017 Paragon Security ©
 Paragon Academy Basic Security Training Manual

Public security
Public security agencies are those groups that perform a security function but are funded
exclusively by governments in the interest of public service. These agencies include municipal,
provincial and federal police forces as well as the other services noted above. Legislation in
each jurisdiction initiates and empowers these agencies, mandates specific training, and creates
an objective complaint review process. Police forces are granted wide-sweeping powers that
are generally recognized by the public, including:
• Preserving the peace
• Preventing crimes and other offences
• Assisting victims of crime
• Arresting or detaining criminals or those suspected of criminal involvement
• Drafting, and laying criminal charges
• Investigating crimes
• Seizing evidence
• Testifying in court
• Executing search and arrest warrants
• Rescue operations on land and sea

1.3 Occupation of the Private Security Guard

Private security is similar to public security yet different than policing in several significant ways.
Contract private security is provided to clients for a fee, and except in special circumstances, has
authority limited to the property owned by the client. Rather than service provided in the interests
of the public, security is provided to protect the interests of the client.

Traditionally, legislation in Canada has recognized these differences and has not extended the
same powers of detention, arrest, search and seizure to security service providers as have been
extended to police.
Compare, for example, powers of arrest and powers of search and seizure are quite different for
security as compared to police, as you will see later in this manual.
Private security includes measures taken by people, partnerships and corporations designed to
protect people (staffs working on a site and the general public entering the site), property and
proprietary information (confidential data) and minimize the client’s liability.

Page 16 of 346 Basic Training Manual Version 10 – 14 March 2017 Paragon Security ©
 Paragon Academy Basic Security Training Manual

Companies that need private security without the costs associated with their own, in-house security
unit often contract the services of a security provider. By contracting the services of these agencies,
a company avoids incurring the costs associated with managing and administering the function.
For example, the costs of managing Guard performance, training, providing a benefit package,
vacation, etc., are avoided. When contract security providers are hired administrative and other
costs are carried by the security provider, decreasing the costs to all of the end users of the services.
Private security providers also operate independent of the politics of the client company. This
professional separation is more likely to project a fair and nonbiased approach when dealing with
rules and regulations on the property.
Contract security companies are often able to draw upon a wider range of expertise by the security
professionals they employ which is broader than experience associated with in-house security. It
may be more beneficial to hire experts rather than use in-house personnel.

Duties of Security Guards

It is the duty of a Security Guard to protect people, property and proprietary information. They
are responsible to a variety of people:

1. People: Security is normally assigned the duty of protecting people (clients and the
public) from loss or injury. This includes: A responsibility to interact and cooperate
with law enforcement officials and the Justice system, where necessary, such as
apprehending and detaining someone who has committed a serious criminal or trespass
offence. Security professionals supplement the efforts of police, performing initial
investigations or securing crime scenes until the police can arrive. Security personnel
may also provide important information to the police and provide first aid or assist fire
authorities.

• In times of need and emergencies, people seek assistance from authority figures. A
Security Guard is sought out because they are visible in a uniform and often the first
available person in charge at an occurrence.
• Security Guards also have specific information that assists authorities during an
emergency. One example is when there is a fire alarm, Security Guards at the site help
expedite (make quicker) the response by directing firefighters directly to the
emergency scene. Security may also be able to warn emergency crews about dangers
on the site.

• When criminal charges have been laid as the result of information developed by a
Security Guard and proper procedures were followed in making an arrest, they will be

Page 17 of 346 Basic Training Manual Version 10 – 14 March 2017 Paragon Security ©
 Paragon Academy Basic Security Training Manual

expected to give evidence in court in a professional manner.

• Security Guards have a “Duty of Care” defined as a legal obligation to protect and
prevent from harm or loss people and the property, including personal property that
people bring to the site by providing a reasonably safe environment (Occupier’s
Liability Act).

2. Property: A Security Guard has a responsibility to the employer and client for the security
and protection of the property. This includes:
• The responsibility to ensure premises and property are properly protected against
natural and man-made threats, accidents and loss
• Deterring, preventing, detecting and responding appropriately to criminal offences,
certain provincial and other regulatory violations and preventing situations that can
cause harm on the property of the client or to the property anyone at the site
• Security has an obligation to perform these duties in a way that provides confidence
the Client will not lose business or have to pay a substantial civil claim because of the
actions of Security staffs.
3. Proprietary Information:
• Security professionals ensure that confidential data is protected, including a client’s
public image by treating information they have access to as strictly need to know. In
other words, if the information is considered sensitive or could cause harm or a loss of
reputation if released to unauthorized persons, security practitioners need to be very
discreet and ensure that this is protected from those without a legal entitlement to it.
• Security Guards also have certain legal obligations as set out in laws such as
P.I.P.E.D.A. (Private Information and Protection of Electronic Documents Act) that
will be discussed in further detail, later in this program.
• Some client sites have exceptionally sensitive information and may have a clean desk
policy that the Guards ensure is being adhered to. This means that when client
employees go home for the day, they secure sensitive documents and do not leave them
out on a desk, etc.
• Other institutions where private security companies provide service are subject to other
legal responsibilities, as well. Sites such as a Courthouse and Hospital are two good
examples

A Security Guard should be aware that first and foremost they represent their self, preferably at

Page 18 of 346 Basic Training Manual Version 10 – 14 March 2017 Paragon Security ©
 Paragon Academy Basic Security Training Manual

their best, as well as the contract company, the client and all other persons associated with these
businesses. As you are always under scrutiny you must maintain your professional image and
demeanour at all times.
Often security is responsible for protecting people who may be vulnerable to crimes as well as
hundreds of thousands or even millions of dollars of property and equipment. You must maintain
a formal, fair and affable approach to your work and meet the obligations of these responsibilities
while on duty. Security Guards are also expected and have a regulated responsibility to behave
and deport themselves in an exemplary fashion off the job, similar to official authorities.

Specifications, Activities and Demands of Security Work

Although a Security Guard’s role may vary, one thing will never change. A Security Guard’s
primary responsibility is to provide protection, to people, property and information. It is also
important to note that the days of a Security Guard intimidating persons or as a “goon”, enforcing
the peace are past.
While there can be no doubt that some situations will involve physical intervention, the majority
of tasks assigned require a Security Guard to observe, deter, record and report or gain
compliance from others through persuasion. Police officers may rely on the status of their position,
their uniform, extensive specialized training, and weapons to control situations in which there is
some risk of being assaulted. Security Guards often do not have these tools available and may
better serve resolving issues by calling for police and acting as an excellent witness to events,
depending on who is at risk, the seriousness of the situation and the urgency to act.

That said, it is not always practical to just call for police and wait as life and safety may be seriously
at risk or the Security Professional may find they are on the scene of a serious occurrence and
engaged before the gravity of the situation becomes apparent.
In these situations, Guards must act and make sound decisions, quickly, based on the entire
circumstances. To assist you in this endeavour we provide you with some resources, training,
policies, work instructions and equipment to accomplish the job in the safest way possible.
Sometimes you may find yourself in harm’s way which is a risk of the job and you will be provided
with some best practices to use as a guideline when things go wrong.

Page 19 of 346 Basic Training Manual Version 10 – 14 March 2017 Paragon Security ©
 Paragon Academy Basic Security Training Manual

Deterrence and detection of unwanted activities

A strong and visible Security presence will deter some criminals from committing a crime on your
site. If a crime occurs, respond according to the work instructions and policies of the Client and
your Security Company. Not all situations require the Police or a formal criminal charge to correct
or remedy them. Response in most circumstances is determined by the work instructions made
available to you in the Post Orders.
If you are required to call the police, ensure you know what information is important. This may
help identify criminals or stop the crime while it is happening. You should carefully make notes,
at the time of the occurrence or as soon as possible after, so that you remember as many details of
the crime as possible.
You must work with the police and it helps to establish a relationship built on trust in advance.
Together with your local police force and other interested stakeholders such as people working on
the site and the general public you can form a strong security team.
It is most important that you know how to create the safest possible situation under various
circumstances for you, the general public and even offenders on the property. You must also know
exactly what your authorities and limitations are under the law. During the course of your career
as a Security Guard, you will be responsible for a variety of duties including the primary duty to
observe, deter, detect, record and report.
Security of people
Many situations that Security Guards encounter will require them to deal with situations involving
people. When disturbances occur it becomes the responsibility of the police and in some cases that
of a Security Guard to restore order. Some disturbances get out of hand despite the best efforts by
authorities to prevent a disturbance.

These circumstances become a great responsibility in protecting life. Efforts to keep or restore the
peace and control a situation should be done with these cautions:
• Who is at risk, including yourself?
• How serious is the occurrence?
• Your work instructions (Post Orders)
• Urgency of the matter
• What could happen if you must leave your post to restore order?
• What other resources are available to you?
• Do you have a pre-existing plan for the circumstance?

Page 20 of 346 Basic Training Manual Version 10 – 14 March 2017 Paragon Security ©
 Paragon Academy Basic Security Training Manual

Security of information
Public Relations concerns the Contract Company and client’s image and reputation. Security
Guards often have access to trade secrets and proper measures must be taken to prevent
unauthorized release of this data. Confidential matters pertaining to persons such as staffs and
employees of the client’s tenants or residents may be accessible to security professionals.
Information of a legally binding confidential matter is exceptionally sensitive and it is your duty
to protect it. Information that could embarrass a person related to the property is another area of
concern.
Confidential information regarding site procedures, duties, schedules, alarm systems and other
layers of security must be protected and only released to authorized persons.
Security must also exercise restraint and discretion while maintaining positive relations when
dealing with the media. This manual will cover some of these topics in greater detail in the
following sections.

Demands of security work

The types of businesses that hire contract security tend to be most vulnerable when there is the
least normal use of the property and increased risk of criminal activity or undetected safety hazards
or accidents involving the physical plant of the site, people working on or entering the property
for legitimate or illegitimate purposes and any related property, information or equipment.
In other words the most risk is after normal business hours during nights and weekends. As a result
most of the work related to the business of protecting clients is conducted during these “quiet”
times and quite often involves shifts during which most people would be resting and that may be
of long duration. This can create fatigue and other negative conditions.
Most providers of contract security services tend to hire employees and promote from within, once
they have identified staffs that fit best with certain functions, teams and sites. These facts combine
to create a situation where most new employees entering the business will receive less opportunity
to normalize their activities with the majority of others in society, possibly even their own families.
As a result, the more sought after positions of day work during weekdays are few and far between
so these tend to go to the most senior personnel and those who have proven their worth, on the job.
It usually takes a long time and a lot of hard work to obtain promotions to the more senior roles in
the industry.
Entry level positions are often viewed as low skill roles, even by the clients hiring the service, so
wages are often in the minimum wage standard range set out by government when most new
employees enter the business.

Page 21 of 346 Basic Training Manual Version 10 – 14 March 2017 Paragon Security ©
 Paragon Academy Basic Security Training Manual

As Security Professionals must enforce rules and regulations, they often contact less savoury
members of society, including anti-authoritarians, criminals, psychopaths, substance abusers,
persons with communicable diseases and even everyday people who become hostile due to their
dislike of authority and feeling subjected unnecessarily to control, not to mention the lack of public
understanding regarding the authorities of Security Guards.

Benefits of the security profession

Like all of economics and the simple concepts of supply and demand, there is a high demand for
higher skilled professionals and less of these workers to go around. This means the wages and
benefits are more rewarding at the higher echelons of the profession, however it may take a long
time for security specialists to get there.
Some employees prefer schedules that are flexible or presenting opportunities to work off hours
due to other personal family commitments or while supporting their self and going to school at the
same time. Some contract security companies are very supportive of their employees and offer
assistance not normally found in private industry elsewhere.
Unlike some blue collar trades or skilled labour jobs, that can be dirty and/or dangerous due to
working with machinery, Security work for the most part is a clean occupation. It is also
honourable work in that Security Guards wear a sharp uniform and enjoy opportunities to assist
people and make a significant difference in others’ lives. This is rewarding in and of itself.
As the industry grows and expands, there are numerous opportunities opening up both within the
industry or utilizing the skills learned to further personal career goals. Many Security Professionals
make the change to Public Policing and vice versa.

Page 22 of 346 Basic Training Manual Version 10 – 14 March 2017 Paragon Security ©
 Paragon Academy Basic Security Training Manual

Job Description & introductory materials

Security Guard job summary
The primary function of a Security Guard is the protection of people, property and information as
they relate to the client site. Under general supervision of and reporting to the Security
Supervisor, the Security Guard is a key position responsible for receiving and carrying out client
directives, contract security company directives and abiding by all policies. The Security Guard
carries out all duties as assigned by the Security Supervisor and/or his/her superior.
Duties and responsibilities

1. Protection of Life.
2. Protection of Client and Company Property.
3. Minimize liability
4. Protection of Client and Company Information.
5. Public relations on behalf of the Client.
6. Enforcement of Client rules, regulations and policies.
7. Enforcement of Federal, Provincial, Municipal Acts and Regulations as they relate to the
Client’s property.
8. Strict adherence to all standards of performance as detailed by the client and contract
security company in accordance with the Post Orders.
9. Performs other duties as required and assigned by the Client, Security Supervisor and/or
his superior.
Education and experience

Minimum Requirements: The Security Professional (Those at the higher levels) must have a
literacy and academic functioning ability at the grade 12 level or equivalent experience and
abilities.

Page 23 of 346 Basic Training Manual Version 10 – 14 March 2017 Paragon Security ©
 Paragon Academy Basic Security Training Manual

Knowledge & abilities

• Ability to communicate effectively both verbally and in writing.
• Ability to deal with others effectively.
• Ability to work as a member of a team and independently.
• Ability to organize work and multi-task in a fast paced environment.
• Ability to perform the physical requirements of the position, including but not limited to
long periods of sitting, walking, standing in one place.

Mobile patrol is responsible for, on a shift-to-shift basis, alarm response and investigation,
premise visitation, critical incident response, action and investigation and to enforce rules, laws
and regulations on private property as contracted by clients.
Mobile patrol Guards must have a valid G-2 or higher licence and preference is given to those with
a full G-class licence and listed at least five years as a driver on an insurance policy.

Supervisor
A Supervisor must have all of the skill sets of a Security Guard and are generally more experienced
and skilled employees with a strong knowledge of security procedures, access control systems,
Closed Circuit Television Systems and so on.

Loss Prevention Personnel

An L.P.P. is generally a plain-clothes Security Guard, whose role is predominantly detecting theft,
identifying and arresting shoplifters, and/or preventing loss of merchandise and other assets.

Body Guard
A Bodyguard is a plain-clothes Security Guard who through their professional activity protects a
person who is or may be at risk. A much higher level of training in disciplines for executive
protection or close protection, including physical control techniques, counter-surveillance,
technology and security strategies as well as exceptional physical fitness are required for this job.

Page 24 of 346 Basic Training Manual Version 10 – 14 March 2017 Paragon Security ©
 Paragon Academy Basic Security Training Manual

General - job specifications

All Contract Security Guards must be licensed by the Ministry; Security Guard, Private
Investigator or Dual and have a valid Emergency First Aid & CPR Level-B certificate. A clean
criminal record is required and other regulatory offences must have been processed and cleared as
acceptable to the Ministry. Security Guards must be able to pass training and testing standards as
set out by the Ministry.
All Guards must be 18 years of age or older. Security Guards conducting intervention must be able
to pass certification standards for handcuffs.
Certified Contract Officers for parking enforcement as required by the contract company must be
willing and able to pass municipal standards and maintain these required certifications.
Some security staffs must also have or be willing to obtain required safety equipment and tools at
their own cost such as a duty belt, approved black polish-able safety boots, handcuffs and body
armour depending on their assignment and as required by the company.
Staffs must be mature, physically fit according to the job specifications standards and disciplined.
Some Guards should have sufficient experience with arrests, intervention and physical
confrontations. They must also be able to demonstrate the ability to clearly communicate using a
two-way radio.

Working conditions
In this job, one is able to work in all positions but this is dictated by the task such as driving a
patrol car under various adverse conditions for protracted periods of time over 12 hour shifts,
during night hours and under all traffic and weather conditions.
Physical fatigue is caused by driving, conducting patrols, walking vast distances on various terrain,
such as stairs and outside on ice and snow, hard concrete or other floor surfaces, alarm response
and investigation, extensive report writing, overtime hours, sometimes reading in poor lighting
and physical altercations during intervention.
Mental stress is caused by tactical decision making as a result of immediate and serious
circumstances requiring correct thinking and possibly resulting in severe injury, loss of life or law
suits if decisions are faulty. During critical encounters the public, clients and subjects of
intervention may expose the Guard to criticism, hostility in the workplace, and pressures to meet
deadlines. The Guard may be continuously exposed to disruptions of lifestyle due to shift work
and extended periods of work.

Page 25 of 346 Basic Training Manual Version 10 – 14 March 2017 Paragon Security ©
 Paragon Academy Basic Security Training Manual

Clashes with uncooperative subjects can result in mental anguish and fatigue or serious physical
injury or death. This can occur with every day, mundane patrol duties going suddenly wrong or
emergencies such as break and enters, back up calls for assistance, removal of unwanted intruders
or violent arrests. Car accidents are another potential hazard for personal injury. The custody and
care of other property and keys is an additional demand. There is also some potential to suffer a
shooting, stabbing or injury caused by assaults.
Heart disease, ulcers, post-traumatic stress disorder, breaks, sprains, contusions, cuts, abrasions,
eye strain and severe physical fatigue may manifest. Continuous, repeated sympathetic nervous
system response activation resulting from high-risk situations can quicken the onset of symptoms.
The Security Guard prevents crime by providing a highly visible deterrent and ensures the integrity
of various premises including the absence of hazards. This function includes the inspection and
minor repairs to locking mechanisms, alarm equipment, fire detection and suppression equipment,
environmental systems and auxiliary power, lights and sump pumps with a view to minimizing
danger to life, potential property damage or loss of proprietary information.
The Security Guard investigates the causes of alarm conditions, suspicious persons and activities
(found or reported), interviews members of the public, clients, staff, tenants and merchants, police
and other emergency services staff, criminals and trespassers.
The Security Guard enforces the client’s rules and regulations, the Trespass to Property Act,
Criminal Code of Canada (on or in relation to contracted private property) and other statutes and
by-laws as required by the company.
The Guard chooses suitable and effective consequences for intervention including issue of fines,
notices prohibiting entry, physical removal of offenders and arrest as appropriate under the
circumstances. In order to facilitate these actions, the Guard may exercise physical control and
restraint of often violent or hostile persons, as required. The Guard attends court or other tribunals
to give evidence as subpoenaed or summonsed under the law, in accordance with activities related
to enforcement duties.
The Guard provides an immediate response to various circumstances such as intrusion, critical
systems, distress, medical or other life safety alarms, calls for emergency assistance from clients
and other staff and various contingencies such as persons trapped in elevators, harassment,
reported intruders, suspicious activity, etc.
The Guard must be fully knowledgeable and able regarding all appropriate actions on finding any
of the above or other situations, remaining calm and collected while assessing, planning and acting
using the correct methods, procedures or protocols including primary emergency first aid to save
life if required.

Page 26 of 346 Basic Training Manual Version 10 – 14 March 2017 Paragon Security ©
 Paragon Academy Basic Security Training Manual

In the role of Security Guard you will handle confidential information on a daily basis. The type
of confidential information used includes alarm codes, client information, post orders and sensitive
client or company information, as well as the identity and private information regarding young or
adult offenders.
Decisions may be made related to critical incidents regarding appropriate actions such as use of
force response selection, engage, disengage, approach or don’t approach, call for support, enter or
do not enter an area, determination of potential consequences or signs of intrusion/illicit activity.
These decisions are made based on investigation and correct determination of occupant or subject
in as much as validity of activity or if this activity or person is illegitimate. Security Guards
prioritize personal workloads and effective methods of service delivery to meet the mission of the
security team, client and contract company.

1.4 Section Summary

Security Guards are enjoying an expanded role serving and assisting the general public and
interacting with various official services, including the Police. In order to fulfill your duties
responsibly and succeed you need to fully understand the scope, demand, negative and positive
aspects of your role.
This introductory section has provided you some basis for that understanding and created a level
of awareness so that you can select one or more appropriate disciplines or careers, depending on
your personal needs and aspirations.
Although demanding, the role of a Security Guard is also very rewarding and there is honour in
the job. We expect you will learn a great deal while applying the skills you bring with you and
enhance on your journey.
While this section provided an introduction, the following sections will provide more practical
and technical information related to the profession.

Page 27 of 346 Basic Training Manual Version 10 – 14 March 2017 Paragon Security ©
 Paragon Academy Basic Security Training Manual

2.0 - PSISA Act & Regulations

2.1 Introduction

This section outlines all relevant components of the Private Security and Investigative Services
Act, and explains the Code of Conduct. The individual’s responsibility regarding licensing,
including the process for licence applications, mandatory requirements for eligibility, prohibitions
and penalties, and uniform and equipment specifications are also defined in this section.
The responsibilities of businesses that have employees who are performing work classified as
being regulated by this Act are also included here. The representation of both individuals and
employer organizations, with respects to the public are detailed, as are the obligations to provide
identification and maintain records of all aspects of their operations and to make those records
available to authorized inquiring parties.
The following are the types of licences that may be issued under this Act:
1. A licence to act as a private investigator.
2. A licence to act as a Security Guard.
3. A licence to engage in the business of selling the services of private investigators.
4. A licence to engage in the business of selling the services of Security Guards.
5. A licence to act as both a private investigator and a Security Guard (dual license).
6. A licence to engage in the business of selling the services of both private investigators and
Security Guards.
Registration
Registered employer
If a business entity, other than a business entity that engages in the business of selling the
services of private investigators or Security Guards to the public, employs a private
investigator or Security Guard, that business entity shall;
Register as an employer in accordance with the prescribed requirements; and
Provide the Registrar with a mailing address for service in Ontario, and notify the Registrar of
any change in its mailing address within five days of the change.

Page 28 of 346 Basic Training Manual Version 10 – 14 March 2017 Paragon Security ©
 Paragon Academy Basic Security Training Manual

Mandatory Requirements
No person is eligible to hold a licence under this Act unless the person possesses a clean criminal
record and in the case of an individual;
The person is 18 years old or older, the person is entitled to work in Canada, and the person has
successfully completed all prescribed training and testing.
If, at any time subsequent to being issued a licence, a person ceases to meet a requirement set out
in the Act, the person shall not continue to act or offer services under the licence and shall return
the licence to the Registrar as required under section 37 within five days, excluding Saturdays,
Sundays and public holidays, within the meaning of the Employment Standards Act,
A licence is not transferable.

2.2 Individual Responsibilities

Licensee means an individual or business entity that holds a licence under this Act, and “licensed”
has a corresponding meaning.
Registrar means the Registrar of Private Investigators and Security Guards appointed under section
3.
Tribunal means the Licence Appeal Tribunal established under the Licence Appeal Tribunal Act,
1999.
Individual licence
No person shall act as a private investigator or a Security Guard or hold himself or herself out as
one unless the person holds the appropriate licence under this Act.
No person who holds a licence to act as a private investigator or Security Guard shall act or hold
his self or herself or itself as being available to act with respect to, the collection of accounts acting
as a bailiff or an eviction under the Residential Tenancies Act, 2006.

Page 29 of 346 Basic Training Manual Version 10 – 14 March 2017 Paragon Security ©
 Paragon Academy Basic Security Training Manual

Protected witnesses
No person who holds a licence to act as a private investigator or Security Guard shall act or hold
himself, herself or itself as being available to act with respect to;
a) Locating a person known or suspected by the licensee to be a member of a witness
protection program
b) Gathering information about any person known or suspected by the licensee to be a
member of a witness protection program for the purpose of enabling the person to be
located
Licences – general rules
The Registrar may decline to issue or renew a licence if the Registrar is of the opinion that one of
the following applies, and if the Registrar is of the opinion that the matter is relevant to the
applicant’s fitness to hold a licence:
• The past conduct of the applicant or of an interested person in respect of the applicant
affords reasonable grounds to believe that the applicant will not carry on business in
accordance with the law and with integrity and honesty.
• The applicant, an employee or agent of the applicant makes a false statement or provides a
false statement in an application for a licence or for a renewal of the licence.
• The applicant, has been convicted of or found guilty of an offence under a law of Canada
for which a pardon under the Criminal Records Act (Canada) has not been issued or
granted.
• Has been convicted of or found guilty of a provincial offence or an offence under a law of
any other province or territory of Canada.
• Is liable to pay a fine for a provincial offence that has not been paid.
• Has been convicted of a criminal offence under the law of another jurisdiction for which a
pardon has not been issued or granted.
• A ground exists that is prescribed as a ground for which an application for the issuance or
renewal of a licence may be refused.
• It is in the public interest to refuse to issue or renew the licence.

An applicant who meets the requirements set out in this Act and the regulations for the applicable
licence is entitled to the issuance or renewal of a licence unless another condition as stated in the
act applies.

Page 30 of 346 Basic Training Manual Version 10 – 14 March 2017 Paragon Security ©
 Paragon Academy Basic Security Training Manual

A person may be issued more than one type of licence, but, regardless of the licences a person
holds, the person may not act as a Security Guard and a private investigator at the same time.
Every licence shall display a clearly recognizable photograph of the holder, if the holder is an
individual.
A licence is not transferable
The Registrar may issue or renew a licence subject to such conditions as he or she considers
appropriate and may, at any time, attach such additional conditions as he or she considers
appropriate to an existing licence.

2.3 Duties, Standards & Regulations

Application
This Act applies to private investigators and Security Guards within the meaning of the Act.

Notice by Registrar
Where the Registrar becomes aware that a person no longer meets a requirement as set, the
Registrar shall promptly give the person notice that the Registrar’s records have been changed to
show that the person no longer has a valid licence.

Request to reconsider
(4) Where the Registrar has given notice that the person no longer has a valid licence, the person
to whom notice has been given may request that the Registrar reconsider the change to the
Registrar’s records, and the Registrar may consider any relevant information in doing so.
Clean criminal record
A person possesses a “clean criminal record” if;
• The person has not been convicted of a prescribed offence under the Criminal Code
(Canada), the Controlled Drugs and Substances Act (Canada) or any other Act of Canada,
or;
• The person has been convicted of such an offence and a pardon under the Criminal Records
Act (Canada) has been issued or granted.

Page 31 of 346 Basic Training Manual Version 10 – 14 March 2017 Paragon Security ©
 Paragon Academy Basic Security Training Manual

Application for licence

A person who applies to the Registrar for the issuance or renewal of a licence shall
• Provide a mailing address for service in Ontario;
• Pay the required fee for the issuance or renewal of the appropriate licence;
• Provide a declaration that lists;
(i) All of the person’s convictions for and findings of guilt for offences under a law of Canada up
to the date of the declaration for which a pardon under the Criminal Records Act (Canada) has
not been issued or granted,
(ii) All of the person’s convictions for and findings of guilt for a provincial offence or an offence
under a law of any other province or territory of Canada
(iii) All fines levied against the person for a provincial offence that remain unpaid on the date of
the declaration.
(iv) All of the person’s convictions for criminal offences under the laws of other jurisdictions for
which a pardon has not been issued or granted.
(v) All charges for allegedly committing an offence against a law of Canada that have been laid
against the person and that have not been resolved on the date of the declaration, and
(vi) All charges for allegedly committing a criminal offence against the laws of another jurisdiction
that have been laid against the person and that have not been resolved on the date of the
declaration.
• Provide consent for the Registrar to collect information on any matter mentioned above
• The Registrar may require an applicant to provide, his or her fingerprints, a clearly
recognizable photograph of the applicant, his or her consent for the Registrar to conduct
or have local police conduct a background check, including information regarding
convictions and findings of guilt;
• His or her consent for the Registrar to investigate the person’s immigration status in
Canada; and
• Any other information or material as the Registrar considers necessary, including personal
information within the meaning of the Freedom of Information and Protection of Privacy
Act, in order to determine, whether the applicant meets the requirements for the issuance
or renewal of a licence, and

The Registrar may decline to issue or renew a licence if the Registrar is of the opinion that one of
the following applies, and if the Registrar is of the opinion that the matter is relevant to the
applicant’s fitness to hold a licence:

Page 32 of 346 Basic Training Manual Version 10 – 14 March 2017 Paragon Security ©
 Paragon Academy Basic Security Training Manual

1. The applicant or an interested person in respect of the applicant is carrying on activities, that
are in contravention of this Act or the regulations or that will be in contravention of this Act
or the regulations if the applicant is issued a licence or a licence is renewed
2. The past conduct of the applicant or of an interested person in respect of the applicant affords
reasonable grounds to believe that the applicant will not carry on business in accordance with
the law and with integrity and honesty.
3. The applicant, an employee or agent of the applicant makes a false statement or provides a
false statement in an application for a licence or for a renewal of the licence
15. The Registrar may revoke a licence or if the Registrar proposes to revoke a licence and he or
she considers it to be in the interest of public safety to do so, the Registrar may by order suspend
the licence and any such order takes effect immediately
(8) The Registrar shall, at the time of serving the written reasons, advise the applicant or licensee
of the right to appeal under section 17
No business entity shall employ a private investigator or a Security Guard unless the private
investigator or the Security Guard has an appropriate licence.
Every licensee under this Act shall ensure that the following information is on file with the
Registrar and shall inform the Registrar in writing of any change within five business days of the
change occurring:
• The licensee’s mailing address for service
• The mailing address of every branch office of the licensee
• The street address of the licensee’s office and branch offices, if different from the mailing
address
• Name of business

No person who holds a licence to engage in the business of selling the services of private
investigators or Security Guards shall carry on business in a name other than the name in which
the person is licensed

Identification as private investigator

Every person who is holding himself or herself out as a private investigator shall;
• carry his or her licence;
• on request, identify himself or herself as a private investigator; and
• on request, produce his or her licence

Page 33 of 346 Basic Training Manual Version 10 – 14 March 2017 Paragon Security ©
 Paragon Academy Basic Security Training Manual

No person who is acting as a private investigator or holding himself or herself out as one shall
possess any identification or symbol of authority other than the licence issued to him or her under
this Act.
Every person who is acting as a Security Guard or holding himself or herself out as one shall carry
his or her licence, on request, identify himself or herself as a Security Guard; and on request,
produce his or her licence (exceptions apply for LPPs & Undercover Investigators – please clarify
with the Paragon Academy, if you have questions).

Security Guard uniform

Every person who is acting as a Security Guard or holding himself or herself out as one shall wear
a uniform that complies with the regulations. This requirement does not apply to a person who is,
acting as a bodyguard; or performing services to prevent the loss of property through theft or
sabotage in an industrial, commercial, or residential or retail environment.

Identification, symbols of authority & licenses

No person who is acting as a Security Guard or holding himself or herself out as one shall possess
any identification or symbol of authority other than his or her uniform, the licence issued to him
or her under this Act, and any other form of identification or symbol of authority provided for in
the regulations.
No person who holds a licence to engage in the business of selling the services of private
investigators or Security Guards shall do so unless the licence is displayed in a conspicuous spot
in the office at which the public is invited to deal.
The licence issued by the Registrar that is applicable to a branch office shall be displayed in each
branch office.

Every licence is the property of the Crown and a person shall immediately return his, her or its
licence to the Registrar in the following circumstances:
The licence is suspended or revoked if;
• The licence names a branch office at which the public is invited to deal and the business
entity discontinues business at that office.
• The licence is to engage in the business of selling the services of private investigators or
Security Guards and the licensee discontinues the business.
• The person ceases to meet a requirement set out in the Act and is prohibited from acting or
offering services under the licence.

Page 34 of 346 Basic Training Manual Version 10 – 14 March 2017 Paragon Security ©
 Paragon Academy Basic Security Training Manual

Section 38
No person shall;
• Possess, display or permit to be displayed a fake, altered or fraudulently obtained licence.
• Lend a licence to another person or permit another person to use it.
• Display or represent as his, her or its own a licence that was not issued to him, her or it.
• Display or represent as valid a licence that has been suspended or revoked.
• Display or represent as valid a licence when the person to whom the licence was issued no
longer meets a requirement under subsection 10 (1). 2005, c. 34.

Section 39
No person who holds a licence under this Act shall hold himself, herself or itself out as providing
services or performing duties connected with police.
Section 40
No private investigator, Security Guard or person who engages in the business of selling the
services of private investigators or Security Guards shall use the following terms or variations of
them:
1. Detective or Private Detective.
2. Law enforcement.
3. Police
4. Officer

43. A person is guilty of an offence if he, she or it;

Knowingly furnishes false information in any application under this Act or in any statement or
return required under this Act or the regulations;
Fails to comply with any order or other requirement made under this Act or the regulations,
fails to comply with a condition of a licence, or contravenes or fails to comply with any
provision of this Act or the regulations.
Limitation
(2) No proceeding under this section shall be commenced more than one year after the Registrar
first became aware of the facts on which the proceeding is based.

Page 35 of 346 Basic Training Manual Version 10 – 14 March 2017 Paragon Security ©
 Paragon Academy Basic Security Training Manual

Offence – directors or officers

44. Where a business entity is guilty of an offence under this Act, every director, officer or partner
of the business entity who authorizes or permits or acquiesces in the offence is guilty of an offence.
45. (1) Penalties – Individuals
Every individual convicted of an offence under this Act is liable to a fine of not more than $25,000,
imprisonment for a term of not more than one year, or both.
45. (2) Penalties – businesses
Every business entity convicted of an offence under this Act is liable to a fine of not more than
$250,000.
52. A person who holds a licence under the Private Investigators and Security Guards Act on the
day this section comes into force shall be deemed to be licensed under this Act until the day the
person’s licence would have expired under that Act.

The Act- Private Security and Investigative Services Act, 2005 (S.O. 2005)

Investigators
The Registrar may appoint persons to be investigators for the purposes of this Act. The Registrar
shall issue to every investigator a certificate of appointment bearing the Registrar’s signature or a
facsimile of it.
Police officers, by virtue of office, are investigators for the purposes of this Act and the regulations,
but they do not require an investigator’s license. Every investigator who exercises powers under
this Act shall, on request, produce the certificate of appointment as an investigator or identification
as a police officer, as the case may be.
The Registrar or an investigator may, initiate an investigation based on a complaint alleging a
contravention of this Act, the regulations or a condition of a licence; or initiate an investigation
even if no complaint has been made.
Upon application made without notice by an investigator appointed under this Act, a justice of the
peace may issue a warrant, if he or she is satisfied on information under oath that there is
reasonable ground for believing that, a person has contravened or is contravening this Act or the
regulations; and there is in any building, dwelling, receptacle or place anything relating to a
contravention of this Act or the regulations.

Page 36 of 346 Basic Training Manual Version 10 – 14 March 2017 Paragon Security ©
 Paragon Academy Basic Security Training Manual

Evidence
A warrant obtained may authorize an investigator named in the warrant to enter premises,
including a dwelling, specified in the warrant;
• examine money, valuables, documents, records and other things relevant to the
investigation.

• seize anything on the premises that is relevant to the investigation for the purpose of being
used as evidence.

• require a person, other than a person on the premises of the licensee being investigated, to
produce anything mentioned that is relevant to the investigation.

• remove, for the purpose of making copies or extracts, anything mentioned above that is
relevant to the investigation.

• use any data storage, processing or retrieval device or system used in carrying on business
in order to produce a document or record in readable form.

• conduct such tests as are reasonably necessary.

• remove materials or substances for examination or test purposes subject to the owner, or
other occupant of the premises, being notified thereof.

• use any other investigative technique or procedure or do anything described in the warrant
if information and other evidence concerning the offence will be obtained through the use
of the technique or procedure or the doing of the thing.

A warrant obtained shall contain such conditions as the justice of the peace considers advisable to
ensure that any search authorized by the warrant is reasonable in the circumstances.
No person shall obstruct an investigator carrying out an investigation under this section or withhold
from him or her or conceal, alter or destroy anything that is relevant to the investigation.
A person who is required to produce anything as noted above shall produce it and shall, on request
by the investigator, provide any assistance that is reasonably necessary, including assistance in
using any data storage, processing or retrieval device or system, to produce a document or record
in readable form.

Page 37 of 346 Basic Training Manual Version 10 – 14 March 2017 Paragon Security ©
 Paragon Academy Basic Security Training Manual

An investigator who removes or seizes anything from premises under the authorities noted above
shall return it when it is no longer required.
Although a warrant issued would otherwise be required, an investigator may exercise any of the
powers described without a warrant if the conditions for obtaining the warrant exist but by reason
of exigent circumstances it would be impracticable to obtain the warrant.
Entry without warrant as noted in the above paragraph does not apply to a building or part of a
building that is being used as a dwelling place.
The investigator may, in executing any authority given by this section, call upon police officers
for assistance and the investigator and the police officers may use whatever force is reasonably
necessary under the circumstances.
A copy of a document or record certified by an investigator as being a true copy of the original is
admissible in evidence to the same extent as the original and has the same evidentiary value.
An investigator may take possession of a licence if, while acting in the course of his or her duties,
the investigator believes on reasonable grounds that the licence, is required to be returned to the
Registrar or is being used contrary to the Act.
An investigator who takes possession of a licence shall promptly forward it to the Registrar.
Inspectors
The Registrar may appoint persons to be inspectors for the purposes of ensuring compliance with
this Act, the regulations and the conditions of a licence. The Registrar shall issue to every inspector
a certificate of appointment bearing the Registrar’s signature or a facsimile of it.

Every inspector who exercises powers under this Act shall, on request, produce the certificate of
appointment as an inspector.

The Registrar or an appointed inspector may at any time initiate and conduct an inspection and
may, as part of that inspection, enter and inspect at any reasonable time the premises of a licensee
that is licensed to sell private investigator or Security Guard services for the purposes of ensuring
that the licensee is complying with the Act.
No person shall obstruct an inspector conducting an inspection or withhold from him or her or
conceal or destroy anything that is relevant to the inspection.

Page 38 of 346 Basic Training Manual Version 10 – 14 March 2017 Paragon Security ©
 Paragon Academy Basic Security Training Manual

The Ministry employs investigators and inspectors whose activity includes random
inspections of licensed Agencies, work sites and/or any security vehicles and
employees. Most of the investigators currently deployed are sworn Police Officers
of the Ontario Provincial Police.
Inspections include an assessment of compliance with various regulations as set out
pertaining to the uniform, vehicles, cresting, equipment carried by and used by the
Security Guard and the demeanour or attitude of the Security Guard inspected.
One of the criteria the Enforcement Branch will assess is the level of awareness
regarding the inspection program each Agency creates in the workforce. The purpose
of this advisory is to encourage awareness of the program in the Security
Professionals workforce.
This material is presented as part of the Basic Training program and you are
encouraged to discuss this with your Facilitator.

Page 39 of 346 Basic Training Manual Version 10 – 14 March 2017 Paragon Security ©
 Paragon Academy Basic Security Training Manual

ONTARIO REGULATION 366/07

EQUIPMENT
Firearms
1. An individual licensee may use a firearm in the provision of private
investigator or Security Guard services only if he or she is authorized to
carry the firearm under section 20 of the Firearms Act (Canada). O. Reg.
283/09, s. 1.
Batons
2. (1) An individual licensee may use a baton in the provision of private
investigator or Security Guard services only if the following conditions are
met:
1. The baton is issued to the individual licensee by the licensed or
registered business entity that employs the individual licensee.
2. The individual licensee may use the baton for defensive purposes only.
O. Reg. 366/07, s. 2 (1).
(2) A licensed business entity shall carry insurance to cover the risks
associated with its employees carrying batons. O. Reg. 366/07, s. 2 (2).
Handcuffs
3. An individual licensee may use handcuffs in the provision of private
investigator or Security Guard services only if the handcuffs are issued to
the individual licensee by the licensed or registered business entity that
employs the individual licensee. O. Reg. 366/07, s. 3.
Restraints
4. An individual licensee may not use cable ties or strip ties as restraints in the
provision of private investigator or Security Guard services. O. Reg.
366/07, s. 4.
Oversight by employers
5. A licensed business entity shall ensure that the individual licensees
employed by it comply with this Regulation. O. Reg. 366/07, s. 5.

Page 40 of 346 Basic Training Manual Version 10 – 14 March 2017 Paragon Security ©
 Paragon Academy Basic Security Training Manual

ONTARIO REGULATION 434/07

RECORDKEEPING REQUIREMENTS FOR LICENSED BUSINESS
ENTITIES

Records to be kept
1. (1) Every licensee that is a business entity shall keep the following records:
1. A list of all the private investigators and Security Guards currently
employed by the licensed business entity.
2. A list of all the private investigators and Security Guards not currently
employed by the licensed business entity but who were employed by the
licensed business entity at any time in the previous two years.
3. With respect to every person named on the lists required by paragraphs
1 and 2,
i. a copy of his or her employment contract, and
ii. a record detailing the period when the person was employed and the
locations where he or she provided private investigator or Security
Guard services in the course of that employment.
4. With respect to all private investigator and Security Guard services
provided by the licensed business entity,
i. all notes and reports prepared by the private investigators and
Security Guards employed by the licensed business entity,
ii. all photographs and video, audio or other electronic records
produced or obtained in the course of providing the services,
iii. a use of force report, in the form approved by the Registrar, for every
instance that a private investigator or Security Guard employed by
the licensed business entity used handcuffs, a baton, a firearm or any
other weapon or otherwise used force in the course of that
employment, and
iv. a use of force report, in the form approved by the Registrar, for every
instance that a dog used in the provision of private investigator or
Security Guard services attacks a person.
5. If a private investigator or Security Guard employed by the licensed
business entity is authorized or required by the licensed business entity

Page 41 of 346 Basic Training Manual Version 10 – 14 March 2017 Paragon Security ©
 Paragon Academy Basic Security Training Manual

to carry handcuffs, a baton or a firearm in the course of his or her

employment,
i. the name of each such private investigator and Security Guard,
ii. evidence that each private investigator and Security Guard named
under subparagraph i has been trained in the use of handcuffs, batons
or firearms, as the case may be,
iii. documentation as to the credentials of the trainer who provided the
training referred to in subparagraph ii,
iv. evidence that the licensed business entity is insured against the risks
associated with the use of handcuffs, batons or firearms, as
appropriate, and
v. an equipment log detailing,
A. each time that the licensed business entity issued handcuffs, a
baton or a firearm to a private investigator or Security Guard and
the name of the private investigator or Security Guard to whom
they were issued,
B. the type of handcuffs, baton or firearm issued in each case
detailed under sub-subparagraph A,
C. a description of the location where the handcuffs, baton or
firearm were carried in each case detailed under sub-
subparagraph A, and
D. for each baton issued, a threat assessment setting out the need
for the private investigator or Security Guard to carry it.

6. If a Security Guard employed by the licensed business entity is

authorized or required by the licensed business entity to be accompanied
by a dog for his or her protection in the provision of Security Guard
services,
i. a record of the training the dog received,
ii. evidence that the Security Guard has been trained in the use of dogs
in the provision of Security Guard services,
iii. a copy of the licensed business entity’s policies and procedures on
the care and handling of dogs, including policies and procedures on

Page 42 of 346 Basic Training Manual Version 10 – 14 March 2017 Paragon Security ©
 Paragon Academy Basic Security Training Manual

the dogs’ feeding, housing, transportation, veterinary care,

retirement and euthanasia, and
iv. a log detailing each time that the licensed business entity issued a
dog to a Security Guard for his or her protection in the provision of
Security Guard services and the name of the Security Guard to
whom the dog was issued. O. Reg. 434/07, s. 1 (1).
(2) Every licensed business entity shall retain the records required by
subsection (1) for two years or, if any such record is relevant to an ongoing
investigation, inspection, complaint, court proceeding or administrative
proceeding, until the conclusion of the matter. O. Reg. 434/07, s. 1 (2).
(3) For the purposes of subsection (2), a court proceeding or administrative
proceeding is concluded once a decision is rendered and all rights of appeal
or review have expired or been exhausted. O. Reg. 434/07, s. 1 (3).

Page 43 of 346 Basic Training Manual Version 10 – 14 March 2017 Paragon Security ©
 Paragon Academy Basic Security Training Manual

ONTARIO REGULATION 362/07 UNIFORMS

Security Guard uniform must comply with regulation

1. A person who is licensed as a Security Guard and who is required by the
Act to wear a uniform when acting as a Security Guard or holding himself or
herself out as one shall wear a uniform that complies with this Regulation
when acting as a Security Guard or holding himself or herself out as one.
O. Reg. 362/07, s. 1.
Words and logos, etc.
2. (1) The name, logo or crest of the licensee that employs the Security Guard
must be affixed to the chest of the outermost piece of the uniform.
O. Reg. 362/07, s. 2 (1).
(2) The term “SECURITY”, “SÉCURITÉ”, “SECURITY GUARD” or
“AGENT DE SÉCURITÉ”, in upper case letters not less than 1.5
centimetres high and in a colour that contrasts with the dominant colour
of the uniform, must be,
(a) permanently affixed to the chest of the outermost piece of the
uniform; and
(b) affixed between two and three centimetres below the name, logo or
crest of the licensee that employs the Security Guard, if the name,
logo or crest appears anywhere else on the uniform in addition to the
chest of the outermost piece. O. Reg. 362/07, s. 2 (2).
(3) The word “SECURITY” or “SÉCURITÉ”, in upper case letters not less
than 10 centimetres high and in a colour that contrasts with the dominant
colour of the uniform, must be permanently affixed to the back of the
outermost piece of the uniform unless the outermost piece of the
uniform is a shirt with a collar, a sweater, a blazer, a sports jacket or a
suit jacket. O. Reg. 362/07, s. 2 (3).
(4) Clause (2) (a) applies independently of subsection (1) and must be
complied with in addition to subsection (1) even if the name, logo or
crest required by subsection (1) includes a term required by clause (2)
(a). O. Reg. 362/07, s. 2 (4).

Page 44 of 346 Basic Training Manual Version 10 – 14 March 2017 Paragon Security ©
 Paragon Academy Basic Security Training Manual

Identification of guard
3. An identification tag with the Security Guard’s name or licence number must
be affixed to the chest of the outermost piece of the uniform. O. Reg.
362/07, s. 3.
Rank chevrons
4. (1) The uniform must not have rank chevrons. O. Reg. 362/07, s. 4 (1).
(2) Subsection (1) does not apply to a uniform worn by a licensee who is
an employee of a non-profit organization that was in existence before
August 23, 2007. O. Reg. 362/07, s. 4 (2).
Shirt colour
5. If the uniform includes a shirt with a collar, the shirt must not be black or
navy blue. O. Reg. 362/07, s. 5.
Trouser stripes
6. The trousers must not have stripes, other than reflective safety stripes, down
the side. O. Reg. 362/07, s. 6.
Hats
7. The uniform must not include a police-style forage cap. O. Reg. 362/07, s. 7.

Page 45 of 346 Basic Training Manual Version 10 – 14 March 2017 Paragon Security ©
 Paragon Academy Basic Security Training Manual

ONTARIO REGULATION 365/07

USE OF ANIMALS

Licensee must comply with regulation

1. A licensee shall not use any animal in the provision of private investigator
or Security Guard services except in accordance with this Regulation.
O. Reg. 365/07, s. 1.
Prohibitions re use of animals
2. (1) An animal may not be used to control individuals or crowds or for the
pursuit or restraint of individuals. O. Reg. 365/07, s. 2 (1).
(2) An animal may not be used to guard or patrol a place unless it is
accompanied by an individual licensee. O. Reg. 365/07, s. 2 (2).
Dogs for tracking or detection
3. A licensee may use a dog to track or detect people or things. O. Reg. 365/07,
s. 3.
Dogs accompanying a Security Guard licensee for protection
4. (1) An individual licensee, in the provision of Security Guard services, may
be accompanied by a dog for the licensee’s protection. O. Reg. 365/07,
s. 4 (1).
(2) A dog accompanying an individual licensee as permitted by subsection
(1) must,
(a) be on a lead and under the control of the licensee; and
(b) wear a fluorescent collar and identification tag that includes the
name of the licensed or registered business entity that employs the
individual licensee. O. Reg. 365/07, s. 4 (2).
Dog training
5. A dog may not be used as permitted under this Regulation unless it is first
trained,
(a) to obey the commands of the dog’s handler or the person the dog is
accompanying;

Page 46 of 346 Basic Training Manual Version 10 – 14 March 2017 Paragon Security ©
 Paragon Academy Basic Security Training Manual

(b) to respond only to aggression against the dog’s handler or the person the
dog is accompanying, and to respond accordingly when the aggression
abates; and
(c) to not kill or seriously injure people or animals. O. Reg. 365/07, s. 5.
Policies and procedures
6. A licensed business entity shall develop written policies and procedures on
the care and handling of dogs used as permitted by this Regulation,
including policies and procedures on the dogs’ feeding, housing,
transportation, veterinary care, retirement and euthanasia. O. Reg. 365/07,
s. 6.
Oversight by employers
7. A licensed business entity shall ensure that the individual licensees
employed by it comply with this Regulation. O. Reg. 365/07, s. 7.
Information to new owners
8. An individual licensee or licensed business entity that gives away or sells a
dog that was used as described in section 4 shall advise the dog’s new owner
that the dog was used to accompany one or more Security Guards in the
provision of Security Guard services. O. Reg. 365/07, s. 8.

Page 47 of 346 Basic Training Manual Version 10 – 14 March 2017 Paragon Security ©
 Paragon Academy Basic Security Training Manual

ONTARIO REGULATION 364/07

VEHICLES

Definition
1. In this Regulation, vehicle means,
(a) an automobile, or
(b) other motor vehicle with at least four wheels and a truck or delivery
body permanently attached to it. O. Reg. 364/07, s. 1.
Licensee providing Security Guard services to comply with regulation
2. A licensee shall not use a vehicle in the provision of Security Guard services
that is not in compliance with this Regulation. O. Reg. 364/07, s. 2.
Marked vehicles
3. (1) If a vehicle is marked as being a vehicle used in the provision of Security
Guard services, it must comply with the requirements of this section.
O. Reg. 364/07, s. 3 (1).
(2) The word “SECURITY” or “SÉCURITÉ”, in upper case letters, must
be prominently displayed in a colour that contrasts with the colour of
the vehicle,
(a) on both sides of the vehicle, in letters not less than 10 centimetres
high; and
(b) on the front and back of the vehicle, in letters not less than 8
centimetres high. O. Reg. 364/07, s. 3 (2).
(3) The word “security” or “sécurité” may also appear in or as part of the
licensee’s crest or logo. O. Reg. 364/07, s. 3 (3).
(4) The vehicle must not have any red, blue, gold or yellow stripes or any
combination of red, blue, gold or yellow stripes, except as part of the
licensee’s crest or logo. O. Reg. 364/07, s. 3 (4).

Page 48 of 346 Basic Training Manual Version 10 – 14 March 2017 Paragon Security ©
 Paragon Academy Basic Security Training Manual

Prohibited markings
4. A vehicle must not have the following terms, or any variations of them,
displayed anywhere on it:
1. Detective or détective.
2. Private detective or détective privé.
3. Police.
4. Officer or agent de police.
5. Law enforcement or exécution de la loi. O. Reg. 364/07, s. 4.

Page 49 of 346 Basic Training Manual Version 10 – 14 March 2017 Paragon Security ©
 Paragon Academy Basic Security Training Manual

2.4 Code of Conduct

ONTARIO REGULATION 363/07 CODE OF CONDUCT

Breach of code of conduct

1. A licensee is in breach of the code of conduct if the licensee contravenes or
fails to comply with this Regulation. O. Reg. 363/07, s. 1.
Individual licensees
2. (1) Every individual licensee, while working as a private investigator or
Security Guard, shall,
(a) act with honesty and integrity;
(b) respect and use all property and equipment in accordance with the
conditions of his or her licence;
(c) comply with all federal, provincial and municipal laws;
(d) treat all persons equally, without discrimination based on a person’s
race, ancestry, place of origin, colour, ethnic origin, citizenship,
creed, sex, sexual orientation, age, marital status, family status or
disability;
(e) refrain from using profane, abusive or insulting language or actions
or actions that are otherwise uncivil to any member of the public;
(f) refrain from exercising unnecessary force;
(g) refrain from behaviour that is either prohibited or not authorized by
law;
(h) respect the privacy of others by treating all information received
while working as a private investigator or Security Guard as
confidential, except where disclosure is required as part of such
work or by law; and
(i) co-operate with police where it is required by law. O. Reg. 363/07,
s. 2 (1).
(2) No individual licensee shall,
(a) be unfit for duty, while working, through consumption of alcohol or
drugs;

Page 50 of 346 Basic Training Manual Version 10 – 14 March 2017 Paragon Security ©
 Paragon Academy Basic Security Training Manual

(b) conspire with another person or aid or abet another licensee in a

breach of this code of conduct;
(c) wilfully or negligently make a false statement or complaint against
another licensee; or
(d) misrepresent to any person the type, class or conditions of his or her
licence. O. Reg. 363/07, s. 2 (2).
(3) Clause (2) (d) does not apply to an individual licensee who is
concealing his or her identity as a private investigator or Security Guard
in order to carry out his or her duties. O. Reg. 363/07, s. 2 (3).

Licensed business entities

3. (1) Every licensed business entity and every officer, director, partner and
sole proprietor of a licensed business entity shall, in the course of
conducting the licensed business,
(a) comply with all federal, provincial and municipal laws;
(b) treat all persons equally, without discrimination based on a person’s
race, ancestry, place of origin, colour, ethnic origin, citizenship,
creed, sex, sexual orientation, age, marital status, family status or
disability;
(c) respect the privacy of others by treating all information received in
the course of conducting the licensed business as confidential,
except where disclosure is required for conducting the licensed
business or by law; and
(d) co-operate with police where it is required by law. O. Reg. 363/07,
s. 3 (1).
(2) No licensed business entity and no officer, director, partner and sole
proprietor of a licensed business entity shall,
(a) conspire with another person or aid or abet another licensee in a
breach of this code of conduct;
(b) wilfully or negligently make a false statement or complaint against
another licensee; or
(c) misrepresent to any person the type, class or conditions of the
licensee’s licence. O. Reg. 363/07, s. 3 (2).

Page 51 of 346 Basic Training Manual Version 10 – 14 March 2017 Paragon Security ©
 Paragon Academy Basic Security Training Manual

Complaints and Investigations

The Registrar may receive a complaint from any person alleging that a licensee has breached the
code of conduct established under the regulations or alleging that a licensee has failed to comply
with this Act or the regulations or has breached a condition of a licence.

Form of complaint
A complaint shall be in writing, signed by the complainant, and filed with the Registrar within 90
days after the subject-matter that gives rise to the complaint arose or at a later date with the
Registrar’s consent.
The Registrar may, in writing, inform the licensee of the nature of the complaint.
The Registrar may decline to deal with a complaint related to a breach of the code of conduct if,
in the Registrar’s opinion, the complaint is frivolous, vexatious or not made in good faith.

Notice
If the Registrar declines to deal with a complaint the Registrar shall give notice of the decision to
the complainant and shall specify the reasons for the decision.
If the Registrar declines to deal with a complaint, and if in the opinion of the Registrar the
complaint is in regard to a breach of the code of conduct established under the regulations, the
Registrar shall refer the complaint to a facilitator, unless the complainant does not wish the matter
to be referred.
The Registrar may establish rules concerning facilitations under this section, and a facilitator shall
comply with any applicable rules.
Facilitation shall not take place without the participation of the complainant and the licensee must
attend any meetings required by the facilitator.
The facilitator shall attempt to resolve the complaint, and at the end of the facilitation shall
communicate to the Registrar the results of the facilitation and either his or her decision to make
no recommendation; or his or her recommendation that the Registrar require the licensee to take
appropriate remedial instruction.
Where the facilitator has made a recommendation the Registrar shall act in accordance with the
facilitator’s recommendations by imposing the taking of the remedial instruction as a condition of
the licence.

Page 52 of 346 Basic Training Manual Version 10 – 14 March 2017 Paragon Security ©
 Paragon Academy Basic Security Training Manual

This section does not prevent the Registrar from exercising his or her authority under any other
provision of this Act in respect of a licensee against whom a complaint has been made, whether or
not the Registrar has dealt with the complaint under this section (could revoke or suspend license).
2.5 Section Summary

Individual Security Guards and Private Investigators must be licensed and carry out duties in
accordance with the Act. The Regulations include the Code of Conduct.
Businesses providing investigation and security services for hire must also be licensed and comply
with the regulations as set out in the Act or may hire Security Guards for the protection of their
own business interests and must be a registered business.
There are specific minimum training and testing standards set out by the Act and all persons
working as Security Guards and Private Investigators must be trained and tested to work in the
occupation.
Record Keeping regulations are specifically set out under the regulations and all persons working
in the occupation must govern their self accordingly.
Uniform and equipment standards are clearly set out, as are regulations pertaining to the use of
vehicles, how they may be marked, and the use of animals in private sector security work.
Failure to comply with the Act & Regulations may result in penalties, including conditions
attached to the license of a business or individual, jail sentences, fines and suspension or revocation
of licenses as determined by the Registrar.

Page 53 of 346 Basic Training Manual Version 10 – 14 March 2017 Paragon Security ©
 Paragon Academy Basic Security Training Manual

3.0 Report writing

3.1 Introduction

Security Guards are required to compile written reports of occurrences, duties performed and
comprehensive descriptions of their tasks and observations. This section will prepare the
participant to write reports that are objective and standardized.
Your reports and source notes become documentary evidence for legal purposes and all
information contained in the documents you produce may be disclosed in court. Well written notes
and reports will support the evidence or testimony given by a Security Guard whereas poorly
written notes and reports may result in your loss of credibility as a witness or be deemed as
inflammatory or prejudicial and excluded from evidence as a result.
This section also introduces the participant to the different types and purposes of reports including
the correct use of notebooks and producing a report that is easy to read. What may appear of little
consequence when first observed may become exceptionally important related to events later on
and a properly kept notebook will assist capturing this information.
3.2 Recording Facts in Notebooks
Notes must contain facts, not your personal opinions. There is a difference regarding “the
audience” for a report and your memo book. The notebook or memo book is written for you; to
refresh your memory and to write your reports, however it must be understood that this notebook
becomes a legal document when professionally completed and may be examined and scrutinized
by others.
General Rules;
• Date each shift and ensure your notes are legible
• Print it in block letters and enter the time in the margin for each entry
• Use black or blue pen only (preferably black medium ballpoint ink, never pencil)
• Do not skip lines or pages, do not erase or blot out errors
• Write factual records not opinions
• Write your notes as soon as possible after the event

“Write” your notes by printing in block letters. This method lends itself to producing more legible
notes. Notebooks are always completed in ink and never in pencil. Do not erase (scribble out)
errors. Should an error be made, draw a single line through the error and initial it, then enter the
correct word(s).

Page 54 of 346 Basic Training Manual Version 10 – 14 March 2017 Paragon Security ©
 Paragon Academy Basic Security Training Manual

Four Part Heading & Date

Notebook shift or tour of duty entries start with the “Four part date and heading.” This
information includes a clearly and consistently written entry of the current date, such as;
1. Thu 15 Apr 2010
This information should be followed by your site name and/or assignment, such as;
2. ACME Offices, Patrol – Shift 1
The next line includes the full street address of your site or the main building where you
are assigned if you are at a site with more than one address, such as;
3. 1234 Any Street
Toronto, ON
M1M 1M1
The fourth part of your heading is the shift you are currently assigned to work, despite an
earlier start time or later finish time according to circumstances (these should be captured
in the body of your notes and qualified with the reasons why you started early or finished
late). For example;
4. Shift 00:01 to 08:00 Hours
Some employers provide an ink stamp to capture this information consistently in a standard
format in which case you will fill in the required fields, following imprinting the stamp on
your shift opening page. If not provided, it is recommended you use a straight edge such
as a ruler under the shift line of your four part date and heading to clearly identify when a
given shift starts and making these shifts easy to find later on.
Note any equipment or keys received at the start of your shift including the condition of
these items, particularly any damage to equipment such as cars or radios and cracked or
broken keys.
It is important for you to assess and record the weather conditions at the start of your shift
and any drastic changes in conditions such as storms throughout your tour. Other important
information that is passed along by way of briefs should also be noted.
The body of your notebook is completed in point form and/or short sentences that make
sense. The margins are reserved for times and special notations and the body of the
notebook entry to the right of the margin.

Page 55 of 346 Basic Training Manual Version 10 – 14 March 2017 Paragon Security ©
 Paragon Academy Basic Security Training Manual

The body of your notes contains important information including the following types of
information;
• Your general activities and patrols during your shift
• Conditions of areas checked, including information such as “all appeared in order”,
“no unusual or suspicious activity to report”, “conditions appeared normal”,
“normal activity in this area for the this time of day”, etc.
• Unusual circumstances, discrepancies, activity or persons.
• Hazardous conditions, safety hazards
• The time a call for service is received
• The event viewed, or the complaint made
• Nature of the occurrence
• Factual information, such as names and addresses
• Any diagrams required

• Evidence found: by whom, where, at what time, how it has been labelled, final
disposition
• Reports of lost or found property
• Statements of witnesses, victims and complainants
• Names of persons involved, including aliases and nicknames, if appropriate
• Addresses, telephone numbers, and dates of birth
• Descriptions of persons and property
• Description of the scene, including diagrams and measurements

It is okay to use abbreviations, codes and jargon in your notes as long as you follow a few
rules. When taking statements it is important that these are documented exactly as the
witness or complainant, etc gives to you including all of the exact words they use. We will
cover more on this topic later in this section.
Sign over any equipment and keys, including the condition etc to the person relieving you
or note where you placed it when ending your shift and if not normally relieved by another.
Close the notebook by entering “off duty” and the time at the end of a shift or tour. Sign
the notebook on the last line entry after the end of each shift.

Page 56 of 346 Basic Training Manual Version 10 – 14 March 2017 Paragon Security ©
 Paragon Academy Basic Security Training Manual

Reasons for memo books

Security Guards provide reports to the client regarding information that is important when the
client is not present and/or to document occurrences and circumstances or conditions that are
important and for which the client needs a written record. It is important to observe with all of
your patrol senses and report anything important at the site.
Notes serve as an aid to guide your activities. When you first orientate to a new site, you should
make notes about your patrol activities and duties so that you may refer to these when not
accompanied by a trainer or Supervisor so that you do not need to return to the office too frequently
to review your post orders or work instructions.
Your notes will assist you writing your final reports for the client as they will contain important
activities, occurrences, times, names, dates, descriptions of things and people and may even have
signatures from persons making statements for complaints or acting as witnesses. Do not be afraid
to draw relevant pictures or diagrams in your notebook for this purpose.
Your notes will also serve as an aid to your memory as there is a great deal of important
information that must be documented for reports throughout your shift. In the event you need to
attend court at some time, your notebook will also serve to aid your memory as your recall may
have faded by the time an important case is heard.
A properly written notebook will be acceptable to the courts as an aid for your memory and perhaps
form documentary evidence as long as proper procedures are followed both at the time of the event
and later in court.
Notebooks also help you develop intelligence information or investigative information as small
pieces of information may not appear relevant when considered individually yet when recorded in
notes and reports may prove substantial when put together.

General Best practices for Memo Books

It is important that all reports are factual and not biased or based on opinion. If you are not careful
it is easy to form conclusions that are not based in fact. For example, a person may appear
intoxicated when in fact they are ill.
Notes must be made at the time of an occurrence or activity or as soon as possible after the fact in
order for them to have value. The standard practice is to make an entry in your memo book every
twenty minutes at a minimum and in the event of an important occurrence you cannot put down
too much information in your notebook.

Page 57 of 346 Basic Training Manual Version 10 – 14 March 2017 Paragon Security ©
 Paragon Academy Basic Security Training Manual

A law enforcement or police style memo book will have a cover that contains spaces for you to
enter basic identifying information such as your company name, your name, employee number
and the date range of the entries made (First date, last date).
These notebooks will be small enough to carry in a uniform shirt or jacket pocket and may or may
not be issued with a hard or soft cover to preserve the memo book from wear and tear and the
elements. Most of these notebooks have numbered pages due to the legal implications of notes and
the integrity of making notes at the time of an event and not filling in information later.
If your employer does not provide you with a notebook, you will need to either purchase one of
these books yourself or create a notebook with numbered pages and other required information
according to the best practices in this training program.
Memo books must be carried on your person during your shift or work day and should be properly
secured away when not on your person so that the sensitive and confidential information that it
may contain is preserved. Notebooks must be kept by your employing agency as set out by the
Ministry standards. In order to assist with this, notebooks should be turned in to your employer for
safe keeping every time one is filled out and another memo book should be issued at that time.
Generally speaking, Security Guards will keep only one memo book at a time. The exception to
this rule may be where a Guard is regularly assigned and scheduled to one specific site, yet
regularly works for the same company in other roles or sites in order to earn overtime pay, etc. In
this circumstance the Guard would maintain one memo book for the regular site and another memo
book for the overtime duties that could be identified on the cover as the “Float” or “Field Support”
memo book, for example.
Keep control of your notebook. It contains confidential information such as descriptions of events,
telephone numbers, addresses, etc. You do not want this information to fall into the wrong hands.
If you lose it, the notes contained will be viewed as never written.
• No pages should be removed from the notebook.
• All notebook entries are made in chronological order, following the correct sequence in
time.
• If you forget to include something in your notebook, but remember it later, don’t hesitate
to submit a late entry into your notebook pertaining to the earlier occurrence. Make a note
of “Note”, “L.E.” or “Late Entry” and enter the information.
• Keep writing, you can never write too much when something important happens. Make
“copious notes”.
• If two Guards are involved in an occurrence they may discuss the occurrence, each
completing their own notes, sharing information discussed.
• When writing quickly your handwriting may be difficult to understand. That’s okay – you
can always interpret your notes when giving evidence. The back section of the notebook

Page 58 of 346 Basic Training Manual Version 10 – 14 March 2017 Paragon Security ©
 Paragon Academy Basic Security Training Manual

can be used to record quickly taken “source notes” and transposed to the neatly written
front section, later.
• No written entries of a personal nature are to be made in your notebook. This is a work
document.
• When taking statements have the person review what you have written and sign it. When
giving statements to the Police ask if you can write it out in your memo book, photocopy
it and sign the photocopy so you have a record of your own statement.
• The language used should be formal.
• A list of emergency numbers and information, other frequently used numbers and
important information such as lists of suspicious or problematic vehicles or persons and
relevant dates/times, etc. may be kept in the reference section at the back of your notebook.
• Other essentials that your notebook must include are
• Full four part date
• Site name & address, shift and assignment
• On/off duty times
• Name of the person(s) you are relieving/ being relieved by
• Weather conditions at the beginning/end of shift, as well as any changes that
occur during your tour
• Information you received during your briefing
• Information regarding the condition of the vehicle or equipment you have been
issued and sign over
• Dispatch Calls such as: Book On Duty/Book Off Duty/Hourly Calls or
emergency communications
• Occurrences and duties performed

Page 59 of 346 Basic Training Manual Version 10 – 14 March 2017 Paragon Security ©
 Paragon Academy Basic Security Training Manual

Image 3.2.a

Page 60 of 346 Basic Training Manual Version 10 – 14 March 2017 Paragon Security ©
 Paragon Academy Basic Security Training Manual

Image 3.2.b

Page 61 of 346 Basic Training Manual Version 10 – 14 March 2017 Paragon Security ©
 Paragon Academy Basic Security Training Manual

3.3 Types and purposes of reports

You are writing reports to provide information to the target audience, or other persons. The report
is a communication tool for you to explain a circumstance, environment or condition to other
persons such as the Client, your Supervisor, management at your company, authorities such as
police or Ministry representatives, etc.
Reports should be written in plain English without using abbreviations, slang, swearing or jargon
unless it is important to the report and it is being written as a quotation of words used by someone
else.
The industry standard for writing reports is to record information from the perspective of third
party, past tense. That is to refer to yourself in the reports as “the writer” and to enter all
information in the report as if it has already occurred, which of course it has by the time you enter
your report.
In other words rather than writing “I am walking down a hallway”, the Security Professional will
write “The writer patrolled the fourth floor hallway.” The first person word, “I” is replaced with
the third person term, “the writer” and the entire entry is written as having happened in the past.
This helps to keep and demonstrate a non-biased perspective in your reports.

Report Writing – Basic Format (Form)

There is certain information that must be contained in every report submitted and most employers
have standard form type reports for Guards to complete, depending on the nature of each. All
reports must contain the following information, at a minimum;
• Site name and address
• Date/time of report
• Details or body of the report
• Security Guard’s name (printed name of the person completing the report)
• Security Guard’s Signature

Depending on the type or format of the report you are writing there is certain information that must
also be included, if the report is regarding an occurrence or incident. This includes;
• Date/time of occurrence (versus date/time of report completion)
• Specific location of occurrence
• Occurrence type

Page 62 of 346 Basic Training Manual Version 10 – 14 March 2017 Paragon Security ©
 Paragon Academy Basic Security Training Manual

There may also be some optional information such as; “Attention to” or “Confidential to.” There
are also many various types of reports including incident or “Special Occurrence Reports” (known
as SOR).

S.O.R. (Special Occurrence Report) or Incident Report

An S.O.R. would normally be generated any time a condition exists that is outside the normal
activity or conditions of the site. This is usually dictated by site policy but certainly includes any
time a critical occurrence happens.
Critical occurrences may include but are not limited to the following situations; Medical
Emergencies, including serious injuries of any kind, Vehicle Accident (Major), Use of Force,
Sudden Death, Major Crime including Assaults, Burglaries, Robberies and Bomb Threats,
• Fire or Explosion, Gas or Fuel Leak, Chemical Spill, Elevator Entrapment
• Lost, Missing or Stolen Pass Cards or Keys
• Major Flood, HVAC (Heating Ventilation Air Conditioning) Failure
• Media Onsite
• Building Collapse
• Any Lost/Found Child Incident not resolved in a routine manner
• Unauthorized Move Outs
• Any Civil Disturbance, Demonstration or Unexpected Strike

How did you learn of the occurrence, event or circumstance?

No matter what the matter you are reporting is, the information came to your attention in some
way. It may be that you were dispatched to investigate an unknown disturbance or occurrence or
that you received a complaint of a specific activity or person on your site. You may hear an unusual
sound such as a mechanical device failing, yelling or screaming or a bang while patrolling. You
may also observe conditions such as fluid on the floor or a door with tool marks indicating possible
intrusion.
Regardless of the type of information or method of discovery, you must consistently report how
the matter came to your attention. When submitting reports, this is accomplished by using the
preamble.

Page 63 of 346 Basic Training Manual Version 10 – 14 March 2017 Paragon Security ©
 Paragon Academy Basic Security Training Manual

All Special Occurrence Reports (S.O.R.) or Incident Reports will begin with the preamble;
1. “At the above noted time, date and location while. ”
This initial statement is followed with appropriate words regarding how the matter came to your
attention, depending on the specific circumstances such as...
2. “ monitoring C.C.T.V. from the control room” or “while responding to an alarm” or “while
investigating a complaint” or “while conducting a regular perimeter patrol” or “while
conducting a floor by floor patrol” or “while checking the mechanical room”, etc.
3. The writer of the report next inserts the specific wording of the occurrence they are
reporting on, then concludes the report
For example, a report submitted by a Guard who was dispatched to investigate a complaint from
a tenant in an office tower may read as follows:
“At the above noted time, date and location while responding to MNO Services to investigate a
complaint as dispatched, the writer found a Subject later identified as John Paul George yelling
profanities at the owner of MNO, Mister Greg.”
The Interrogatories – Five W’s and the H
There are six questions to be answered for good reports to be written later on. These are sometimes
called the interrogatories because they ask interrogative type questions. These questions are also
essential elements of good notes that must be compiled at the time of an occurrence. The concept
is that by answering these questions, good factual data will be recorded.
1. Who
2. What
3. Where
4. When
5. Why
6. How

You should be using these questions as a guideline while recording notes on general patrol, when
taking statements and when investigating during your shift. When you use the five W’s and the H
as a matter of course, you will take good notes and ultimately submit better reports.

Page 64 of 346 Basic Training Manual Version 10 – 14 March 2017 Paragon Security ©
 Paragon Academy Basic Security Training Manual

Actions Taken
Recording the actions you took in response to an occurrence is the proper way to conclude an
occurrence report. These actions may include a course of action you undertook personally to
remedy a situation such as, “the writer placed a bucket under the dripping faucet and submitted
this report for your attention” or it may be reporting the matter to another person to take required
action or it may simply be reporting the matter both verbally and in writing to another person,
depending on the type of occurrence or seriousness of the circumstances.
For examples please see Figures 3.3.a to 3.3.f

Page 65 of 346 Basic Training Manual Version 10 – 14 March 2017 Paragon Security ©
 Paragon Academy Basic Security Training Manual

Figure 3.3.a

Page 66 of 346 Basic Training Manual Version 10 – 14 March 2017 Paragon Security ©
 Paragon Academy Basic Security Training Manual

Figure 3.3.b

Page 67 of 346 Basic Training Manual Version 10 – 14 March 2017 Paragon Security ©
 Paragon Academy Basic Security Training Manual

Figure 3.3.c

Page 68 of 346 Basic Training Manual Version 10 – 14 March 2017 Paragon Security ©
 Paragon Academy Basic Security Training Manual

Figure 3.3.d

Page 69 of 346 Basic Training Manual Version 10 – 14 March 2017 Paragon Security ©
 Paragon Academy Basic Security Training Manual

Figure 3.3.e

Page 70 of 346 Basic Training Manual Version 10 – 14 March 2017 Paragon Security ©
 Paragon Academy Basic Security Training Manual

See Figure 3.3.f

Page 71 of 346 Basic Training Manual Version 10 – 14 March 2017 Paragon Security ©
 Paragon Academy Basic Security Training Manual

Figure 3.3.g

Page 72 of 346 Basic Training Manual Version 10 – 14 March 2017 Paragon Security ©
 Paragon Academy Basic Security Training Manual

Briefing reports – Information sharing

Some sites will have a formal briefing log or pass along book for important information to be
shared between the various Guards and shifts. It is important to remember these are formal
communications and not a forum for resolving disputes or voicing concerns with others.
Appropriate information may include important verbal instructions received from the client or
company or events that other Guards should be made aware or that may have repercussions when
others come on duty. Some briefs occur verbally, for example day to day interactions between a
senior Supervisor and client whereby the senior security representative receives direction to be
acted on by the security department as a whole.
Arrest Reports – Ministry Required Use of Force Reports
Any time an arrest is made or a Security Guard uses a certain level of force there are reports that
must be completed in a very specific format, including a Ministry mandated Use of Force report
form, a “Form 1.” These must be properly completed and submitted as soon as possible after an
arrest or use of force, meaning before the Security Guard departs the site at the end of the day.
This will be covered in more detail later in this manual under section 5.7 Use of Force Theory and
the training program.

3.4 Legal Implications & Confidentiality

It is important for Security Guards to recognize the potential issues and concerns related to the
function of providing a formal written record of events at a client’s property. The report, no matter
what the form and any notes made by the Security Guard in relation to their duties and activities
at a site are submitted or entered with the understanding that these documents are an official record
of what occurred.
There is a recognized understanding and practice that these records will be entered objectively,
without any bias or opinion and without emotional influence so that the reports are fair and
accurate as possible. It is due to the factual and formal nature of these reports, as well as the ethical
and legal implications that increases the seriousness of failing to adhere to the guidelines set out.
This fact along with the expectations clearly articulated by law including the confidential and
personal nature of many of the reports submitted by Security Guards makes failure to adhere to
the standards a serious infraction with real consequences.
Your reports may be used for audits including health and safety concerns, contain important
evidence to be heard in courts and include sensitive and confidential personal information
including the names of victims and perpetrators of crimes, medical information or information
regarding activities or conditions on a site that may cause personal harm to some party if it got into
the wrong hands.

Page 73 of 346 Basic Training Manual Version 10 – 14 March 2017 Paragon Security ©
 Paragon Academy Basic Security Training Manual

Protection of this information is not only a duty of care for Security Guards but may also be
formally protected by other laws such as Personal Information Protection and Electronic
Documents Act (PIPEDA) to be covered under the section by that name in this manual and training
program.

3.5 Writing Basics

All reports must adhere to the basic standards and tenets of proper grammar and spelling. If you
were providing service in a Northern Ontario community, it may be appropriate to write in
Canada’s official language of French if the majority of the population was either primarily French
speaking or was fluent in both official languages.
As we are concerned with providing service in Southern and Central Ontario, it is appropriate to
complete reports in English as most persons in this area are fluent in that language. In addition to
basic rules such as consistency in gender and nouns or pronouns, the Security Guard must also
know how and why certain words are used together and the structure of sentences and paragraphs.
Good reports, like good essays not only have an introduction, body and conclusion but also adhere
to the use of the “Five C’s.”
Clarity – the reporter must make it clear to the reader of the report what and who the report is
about.
Conciseness – Being concise is keeping appropriately brief enough by getting to the point right
away. Use only as much dialogue as required.
Completeness – Reports must contain all of the information previously covered in this section by
starting with a preamble or introduction answering the Five W’s and H, as well as concluding with
the action taken.
Correctness – The report must be as correct (or accurate) as possible in addition to the other
concepts of the five C’s by ensuring all of the relevant information regarding the subject is
captured.
Courtesy – The concept of courtesy in report writing is a reference to being fair and keeping bias,
either personal bias or the bias of others out of the report. The report is factual, only.
As included earlier in this manual, reports must adhere to the rules of chronology in order for them
to make sense. Events unfold in an order and if the chronology or order is mixed up, the report
will be confusing. Another tendency of writers is to use a principal we call introspection or seeking
within one’s self for information. When writing factually based reports, falling prey to
introspection will certainly create bias.

Page 74 of 346 Basic Training Manual Version 10 – 14 March 2017 Paragon Security ©
 Paragon Academy Basic Security Training Manual

Avoid emotional terminology in your reports and simply describe events as they happen. In other
words, instead of writing, “The two men were angry.” You would instead write that, “the two men
involved in the occurrence were shouting obscenities at one another” then relay the specific
circumstances and words used.
We need to be careful with written language as the emotion and message normally relayed in
interpersonal communications is not present when using reports. In the above example there is an
important difference of perception created by the phrase, “the two men were yelling obscenities at
each other” and “the two men were yelling instructions at each other regarding how to best lift the
refrigerator, using foul language.” While one circumstance may appear a disagreement between
two people, the other may be subject of a complaint regarding the language used by two persons
working together.
E-mail communications can be one of the least secure forms of transmitting data. Not to mention
the fact that once sent over the internet, unauthorized persons in any of the Internet service
Providers may be able to access the data, once an e-mail is sent it may have gone to an incorrect
recipient if your e-mail address is entered incorrectly. This situation is aggravated by the fact that
incorrect entry of even one letter or keystroke/character in an e-mail address could result in
transmission to the wrong party as many e-mail addresses can be similar yet belong to different
persons.
E-mails may be printed and left in insecure areas of offices. Written and hand submitted or reports
transmitted by other means also present a concern in this regard as they may be left on desks or
other areas where persons either happen across them or purposely look at them due to curiosity.
Reports that are sent by inappropriate means or handled carelessly at any level could result in a
breach of confidentiality. Exceptional care must be taken to ensure this does not happen

Page 75 of 346 Basic Training Manual Version 10 – 14 March 2017 Paragon Security ©
 Paragon Academy Basic Security Training Manual

3.6 Taking Statements

Statements are different than reports as a statement is a way of recording one person’s perspective
or even opinion regarding a factual matter at hand. Statements are an important part of report work.
Due to the nature of statements, it is important to get many different statements so that a
comparison can be made by professionals who may either exclude a statement as extremely biased
one way or another or inaccurate or may corroborate other statements.
Statements made by witnesses, victims, suspects or accused persons must be recorded verbatim or
using the exact wording of the individual giving the statement. A sound method of obtaining a
statement from an individual is to use open ended questions such as “tell me what happened?”
This is followed by information seeking questions or probing for clarification.
An example of a close ended question, which is to be avoided is, “Did you see the truck run into
the car?” Close ended questions can usually be answered with a Yes or No reply and create bias
in a statement by exerting influence over the outcome of the questions and answers.
It is best to start by introducing yourself to the person giving the statement then advise them of the
reason you are seeking information, followed by a request for cooperation. After the person being
interviewed starts talking, ask their permission to take a few notes and begin writing down what
they are saying in your memo book.
In some cases, you may ask a person to write out their statement on separate lined paper or in your
memo book, if appropriate. It is best to request a person to sign a statement although as a private
person you cannot compel the person to do so.
In some cases, such as when interacting with a person accused of a crime, you must adhere to
certain rules as set out by law, including reading the person their Rights under the Charter of Rights
and Freedoms and/or cautioning the person before asking them for information. If it is this
circumstance, you are best to read the person their rights and caution them but do not interrogate
them or ask them to complete a statement as the interviews and statements are best collected by
the Police in these circumstances. We will cover more on this topic under the Legal Authorities
section of this program.
When taking statements from complainants, witnesses or victims or giving statements, write these
in first person, present tense from the statement giver’s perspective.

Page 76 of 346 Basic Training Manual Version 10 – 14 March 2017 Paragon Security ©
 Paragon Academy Basic Security Training Manual

3.7 Methods of submitting reports

Security reports are confidential matters, particularly when dealing with sensitive data.
As suggested in the previous sub sections on reports there are many different methods of report
submission. Often verbal reports are made for urgent matters in person or by telephone to the client
contact, dispatch centre or security company management.
As Security Guards may be in constant communication with a Dispatch Centre or a site specific
control room, many reports are also made by two way radio.
Written reports may be hand delivered, sent in the postal service, faxed and in some circumstances
e-mailed as an attachment or typed in the body of the electronic mail message. Some modern
reporting systems have electronic reporting that may transmit in real time over a local area
computer network on a site or even over a wide area network on the internet.
Regardless of the distribution method, it is important that reports are sent only to those authorized
to see them and on a “need to know” basis to ensure compliance with confidentiality requirements.
Another concern arises regarding the security of radio communications, considering that more than
one contracted service, for example the maintenance or cleaning staffs and security at a site may
share the same radio network and channels. In addition, radio communications may be overheard
by the general public in an area if an earpiece is not used or caution exercised so this is probably
not the best method of sending confidential reports.
A telephone line may seem secure however in the modern era of trunked phone lines a business
may have one common phone number which is trunked to several extensions. If the business
general phone line is called and the call transferred, there is a potential that a person who is not
authorized may still be connected during the transfer. When you consider as well that phones often
have two- way speaker capability, this mode may even be overheard if the person receiving the
call does not pick up the handset.

Page 77 of 346 Basic Training Manual Version 10 – 14 March 2017 Paragon Security ©
 Paragon Academy Basic Security Training Manual

3.8 Section Summary

Security reports are factual documents which serve as documentary evidence as well as official
records of conditions, events, occurrences and circumstances related to a client’s property.
A Security Guard’s source notes serve as an aid for completion of the final report and also to
refresh the Guard’s memory while giving testimony.
Notes and reports must be completed according to the various rules of grammar and spelling as
well as rules of evidence and best practices regarding official records.
There are many types of reports with which the Security Professional must be familiar in order to
properly select the type and method of report delivery.
Statements are different from reports in as much as reports are factually based whereas statements
give a person’s perspective and may be more subjective or reflect an individual’s bias as a result.
Statements may form part of the report and it is essential to follow the rules of taking statements
so as not to taint evidence or invalidate important information by not following rules of evidence
and the law. It is best to get as many statements from different sources as practicable under the
circumstances to corroborate evidence and discount biased or inaccurate statements.

Page 78 of 346 Basic Training Manual Version 10 – 14 March 2017 Paragon Security ©
 Paragon Academy Basic Security Training Manual

4.0 – Sources of legal authority

4.1 Introduction

This section focuses on the broader legal context of private security to help you understand your
rights and obligations when performing your duties. The intent is to provide the participant with a
working knowledge regarding the topics covered.

4.2 British common law

The Canadian Court and Legal system is descended from the British Common Law, which is law
developed from the decisions of Judges in Courts and other Tribunals. This has been further
developed from, Canadian Law precedents and decisions and codified law set out in documents
called statutes such as the British North America Act, which preceded The Constitution Act,
proclaimed in 1982 and the Criminal Code of Canada, etc.
Common Law systems, simply stated, require Judges to interpret decisions of other Courts and
make judgements based on appropriate guidelines which may affect the decisions of future cases.

4.3 Napoleonic code

Security Guards in Ontario may hear references to Napoleonic Code as a comparison to the
common law system, as the Napoleonic Code is the basis of the system applied in the Province of
Quebec, historically descended from the rule of France.
This was the civil law system and basically divided the law into three main areas of concern: the
law of persons, the law of property and the acquisition of property.
This system historically promoted judges interpreting the codified law only in relation to the case
at hand opposed to a system where the decisions of the courts could include the validity of a law,
influencing the regulations put in place by the government.

Page 79 of 346 Basic Training Manual Version 10 – 14 March 2017 Paragon Security ©
 Paragon Academy Basic Security Training Manual

4.4 The Constitution Act – The Charter of Rights and Freedoms

Whereas Canada is founded upon principles that recognize the supremacy of God and the rule
of law:
1. The Canadian Charter of Rights and Freedoms guarantees the rights and freedoms set out
in it subject only to such reasonable limits prescribed by law as can be demonstrably
justified in a free and democratic society.
2. Everyone has the following fundamental freedoms:
(a) Freedom of conscience and religion
(b) Freedom of thought, belief, opinion and expression, including freedom of the press and
other media of communication;
(c) Freedom of peaceful assembly and
(d) Freedom of association.

3. Every citizen of Canada has the right to vote in an election of members of the House of
Commons or of a legislative assembly and to be qualified for membership therein.
6. (1) Every citizen of Canada has the right to enter, remain in and leave Canada
Rights to move and gain livelihood
(2) Every citizen of Canada and every person who has the status of a permanent resident
of Canada has the right;
(a) to move to and take up residence in any province; and
(b) to pursue the gaining of a livelihood in any province.

Limitation
(3) The rights specified in subsection (2) are subject to
(a) Any laws or practices of general application in force in a province other than those that
discriminate among persons primarily on the basis of province of present or previous
residence; and
(b) Any laws providing for reasonable residency requirements as a qualification for the
receipt of publicly provided social services.

Page 80 of 346 Basic Training Manual Version 10 – 14 March 2017 Paragon Security ©
 Paragon Academy Basic Security Training Manual

Affirmative action programs

(4) Subsections (2) and (3) do not preclude any law, program or activity that has as its object
the amelioration in a province of conditions of individuals in that province who are socially
or economically disadvantaged if the rate of employment in that province is below the rate
of employment in Canada.
7. Everyone has the right to life, liberty and security of the person and the right not to be
deprived thereof except in accordance with the principles of fundamental justice.
Search or seizure
8. Everyone has the right to be secure against unreasonable search or seizure.
9. Everyone has the right not to be arbitrarily detained or imprisoned.
10. Everyone has the right on arrest or detention
(a) To be informed promptly of the reasons therefore;
(b) To retain and instruct counsel without delay and to be informed of that right; and
(c) To have the validity of the detention determined by way of habeas corpus and to be
released if the detention is not lawful.

Proceedings in criminal and penal matters

11. Any person charged with an offence has the right
(a) To be informed without unreasonable delay of the specific offence;
(b) To be tried within a reasonable time;
(c) Not to be compelled to be a witness in proceedings against that person in respect of
the offence
(d) To be presumed innocent until proven guilty according to law in a fair and public
hearing by an independent and impartial tribunal
(e) Not to be denied reasonable bail without just cause
(f) Except in the case of an offence under military law tried before a military tribunal,
to the benefit of trial by jury where the maximum punishment for the offence is
imprisonment for five years or a more severe punishment;
(g) Not to be found guilty on account of any act or omission unless, at the time of the
act or omission, it constituted an offence under Canadian or international law or
was criminal according to the general principles of law recognized by the
community of nations
(h) If finally acquitted of the offence, not to be tried for it again and, if finally found
guilty and punished for the offence, not to be tried or punished for it again; and

Page 81 of 346 Basic Training Manual Version 10 – 14 March 2017 Paragon Security ©
 Paragon Academy Basic Security Training Manual

(i) If found guilty of the offence and if the punishment for the offence has been varied
between the time of commission and the time of sentencing, to the benefit of the
lesser punishment.
12. Everyone has the right not to be subjected to any cruel and unusual treatment or
punishment.
13. A witness who testifies in any proceedings has the right not to have any incriminating
evidence so given used to incriminate that witness in any other proceedings, except in
a prosecution for perjury or for the giving of contradictory evidence.
24. (1) Anyone whose rights or freedoms, as guaranteed by this Charter, have been
infringed or denied may apply to a court of competent jurisdiction to obtain such
remedy as the court considers appropriate and just in the circumstances.
(2)Where, in proceedings under subsection (1), a court concludes that evidence was
obtained in a manner that infringed or denied any rights or freedoms guaranteed by
this Charter, the evidence shall be excluded if it is established that, having regard
to all the circumstances, the admission of it in the proceedings would bring the
administration of justice into disrepute.

Page 82 of 346 Basic Training Manual Version 10 – 14 March 2017 Paragon Security ©
 Paragon Academy Basic Security Training Manual

4.5 Case Law

Case law is a body of law that may be described as “best practices” for decisions by the courts in
relation to various cases that have already been tried. Case law or precedent is somewhat dynamic,
in other words it is subject to review depending on the level of court and relevancy to other
accepted standards such as statutes set out by parliament and British Common Law.
Case law sets out a number of standards related to justifications for reasonable use of force,
grounds for arrest and so on related to the duties you undertake and works along with official
statutes as guidance for authorities to decide the facts in a case.
A basic understanding of some of the principles set out in case law relevant to Security Guards;
arrest, search and use of force will assist you making sound decisions on what is the correct course
of action in various circumstances.
The concept of reasonable actions includes another concept known as duty of care. Duty of care is
a legal term that says anyone performing an act that could hurt others, must adhere to a reasonable
standard of care.
In most circumstances we are contracted to provide a reasonably safe environment by the Property
Manager/Owner at large facilities where there is an implied invitation to the general public to
enter. Entry is allowed on private property for the purposes to engage in activity for which it was
intended. When there is a significant disruption either by criminal act or otherwise we should take
reasonable steps to return the premises to normal.

Page 83 of 346 Basic Training Manual Version 10 – 14 March 2017 Paragon Security ©
 Paragon Academy Basic Security Training Manual

4.6 Ontario Statute Law and PIPEDA

4.6.1 Handling Information & PIPEDA (Personal Information Protection and

Electronic Documents Act)

This sub-section deals with collection, storage, dissemination & destruction of information. We
discuss the procedures & regulations with respect to managing information & how to keep
information secure in a manner consistent with PIPEDA
This is a Federal Act protecting personal information that is collected, used or disclosed in certain
circumstances, by electronic means to communicate or record information or transactions.
Personal information under this Act means information about an identifiable individual, but does
not include the name, title or business address or telephone number of an employee of an
organization.
A record for the purposes of PIPEDA includes any correspondence, memorandum, book, plan,
map, drawing, diagram, pictorial or graphic work, photograph, film, microform (size-reduced film
or paper copy), sound recording, videotape, machine-readable record and any other documentary
material, regardless of physical form or characteristics, and any copy of any of those things.
This part of the Act establishes rules to govern the collection, use and disclosure of personal
information in a manner that recognizes two needs:
• The right of privacy of individuals regarding their personal information
• The need of organizations to appropriately collect, use or disclose personal information.

This Part applies to every organization that collects uses or discloses personal information of an
individual in the course of commercial activities, or collects, uses or discloses personal information
about an employee in connection with the operation of a federal work, undertaking or business.

Page 84 of 346 Basic Training Manual Version 10 – 14 March 2017 Paragon Security ©
 Paragon Academy Basic Security Training Manual

DIVISION 1 - PROTECTION OF PERSONAL INFORMATION

Use without knowledge or consent
(2) For the purpose of clause 4.3 of Schedule 1, and despite the note that accompanies that
clause, an organization may, without the knowledge or consent of the individual, use
personal information only if
(a) In the course of its activities, the organization becomes aware of information that it has
reasonable grounds to believe could be useful in the investigation of a contravention of
the laws of Canada, a province or a foreign jurisdiction that has been, is being or is
about to be committed, and the information is used for the purpose of investigating that
contravention;
(b) It is used for the purpose of acting in respect of an emergency that threatens the life,
health or security of an individual;
(c) It is used for statistical, or scholarly study or research, purposes that cannot be achieved
without using the information, the information is used in a manner that will ensure its
confidentiality, it is impracticable to obtain consent and the organization informs the
Commissioner of the use before the information is used;

Disclosure without knowledge or consent

(3) For the purpose of clause 4.3 of Schedule 1, and despite the note that accompanies that
clause, an organization may disclose personal information without the knowledge or
consent of the individual only if the disclosure is
(c) Required to comply with a subpoena or warrant issued or an order made by a court,
person or body with jurisdiction to compel the production of information, or to comply
with rules of court relating to the production of records
(ii) The disclosure is requested for the purpose of enforcing any law of Canada, a
province or a foreign jurisdiction, carrying out an investigation relating to the
enforcement of any such law or gathering intelligence for the purpose of enforcing
any such law, or
(iii)The disclosure is requested for the purpose of administering any law of Canada or
a Province

Page 85 of 346 Basic Training Manual Version 10 – 14 March 2017 Paragon Security ©
 Paragon Academy Basic Security Training Manual

Assistance
(2) An organization shall assist any individual who informs the organization that they need
assistance in preparing a request to the organization (for a copy of their private information
held by the organization).
Time limit
(3) An organization shall respond to a request with due diligence and in any case not later than
thirty days after receipt of the request.
28. Every person who knowingly contravenes subsection 8(8) or 27.1(1) or who obstructs the
Commissioner or the Commissioner’s delegate in the investigation of a complaint or in
conducting an audit is guilty of;
(a) An offence punishable on summary conviction and liable to a fine not exceeding $10,000;
or
(b) An indictable offence and liable to a fine not exceeding $100,000.
(1.1) This Part does not apply to any organization in respect of personal health information that it
collects uses or discloses.

ELECTRONIC DOCUMENTS
31. (1) Definitions in this subsection apply in this Part.
Data means representations of information or concepts, in any form.
Electronic document means data that is recorded or stored on any medium in or by a
computer system or other similar device and that can be read or perceived by a person
or a computer system or other similar device. It includes a display, print out or other
output of that data.

Page 86 of 346 Basic Training Manual Version 10 – 14 March 2017 Paragon Security ©
 Paragon Academy Basic Security Training Manual

SCHEDULE 1 (Section 5)
4.1.4
Organizations shall implement policies and practices to give effect to the principles, including
(a) Implementing procedures to protect personal information.
(b) Establishing procedures to receive and respond to complaints and inquiries;
(c) Training staff and communicating to staff information about the organization’s policies
and practices; and
(d) Developing information to explain the organization’s policies and procedures.

4.2.5
Persons collecting personal information should be able to explain to individuals the purposes for
which the information is being collected.

4.3 Principle 3 — Consent

The knowledge and consent of the individual are required for the collection, use, or disclosure of
personal information, except where inappropriate.
Note: In certain circumstances personal information can be collected, used, or disclosed without
the knowledge and consent of the individual. For example,
• Legal, medical, or security reasons may make it impossible or impractical to seek consent.
• When information is being collected for the detection and prevention of fraud or for law
enforcement, seeking the consent of the individual might defeat the purpose of collecting
the information.
• Seeking consent may be impossible or inappropriate when the individual is a minor,
seriously ill, or mentally incapacitated.

Page 87 of 346 Basic Training Manual Version 10 – 14 March 2017 Paragon Security ©
 Paragon Academy Basic Security Training Manual

4.4 Principle 4 — Limiting Collection

The collection of personal information shall be limited to that which is necessary for the purposes
identified by the organization. Information shall be collected by fair and lawful means.

4.4.1
Organizations shall not collect personal information indiscriminately. Both the amount and the
type of information collected shall be limited to that which is necessary to fulfil the purposes
identified. Organizations shall specify the type of information collected as part of their
information-handling policies and practices, in accordance with the openness principle (Clause
4.8).

4.5.2
Organizations should develop guidelines and implement procedures with respect to the retention
of personal information. These guidelines should include minimum and maximum retention
periods. Personal information that has been used to make a decision about an individual shall be
retained long enough to allow the individual access to the information after the decision has been
made. An organization may be subject to legislative requirements with respect to retention periods.

4.5.3
Personal information that is no longer required to fulfil the identified purposes should be destroyed,
erased, or made anonymous. Organizations shall develop guidelines and implement procedures to
govern the destruction of personal information.

4.6 Principle 6 — Accuracy

Personal information shall be as accurate, complete, and up-to-date as is necessary for the purposes
for which it is to be used.

Page 88 of 346 Basic Training Manual Version 10 – 14 March 2017 Paragon Security ©
 Paragon Academy Basic Security Training Manual

4.6.2 4.6.2
An organization shall not routinely update personal information, unless such a process is necessary
to fulfil the purposes for which the information was collected.

4.7 Principle 7 — Safeguards

Personal information shall be protected by security safeguards appropriate to the sensitivity of the
information.

4.7.1
The security safeguards shall protect personal information against loss or theft, as well as
unauthorized access, disclosure, copying, use, or modification. Organizations shall protect
personal information regardless of the format in which it is held.

4.7.2
The nature of the safeguards will vary depending on the sensitivity of the information that has been
collected, the amount, distribution, and format of the information, and the method of storage. More
sensitive information should be safeguarded by a higher level of protection. The concept of
sensitivity is discussed in Clause 4.3.4.

4.7.3
The methods of protection should include
(a) Physical measures, for example, locked filing cabinets and restricted access to offices
(b) Organizational measures, for example, security clearances and limiting access on a “need-
to-know” basis; and
(c) Technological measures, for example, the use of passwords and encryption.

Page 89 of 346 Basic Training Manual Version 10 – 14 March 2017 Paragon Security ©
 Paragon Academy Basic Security Training Manual

4.7.4
Organizations shall make their employees aware of the importance of maintaining the
confidentiality of personal information.

4.7.5
Care shall be used in the disposal or destruction of personal information, to prevent unauthorized
parties from gaining access to the information (see Clause 4.5.3).

4.9 Principle 9 — Individual Access

Upon request, an individual shall be informed of the existence, use, and disclosure of his or her
personal information and shall be given access to that information. An individual shall be able to
challenge the accuracy and completeness of the information and have it amended as appropriate.
Note: In certain situations, an organization may not be able to provide access to all the personal
information it holds about an individual. Exceptions to the access requirement should be limited
and specific. The reasons for denying access should be provided to the individual upon request.
Exceptions may include information that is prohibitively costly to provide, information that
contains references to other individuals, information that cannot be disclosed for legal, security,
or commercial proprietary reasons, and information that is subject to solicitor-client or litigation
privilege.

4.10.2
Organizations shall put procedures in place to receive and respond to complaints or inquiries about
their policies and practices relating to the handling of personal information. The complaint
procedures should be easily accessible and simple to use.

Page 90 of 346 Basic Training Manual Version 10 – 14 March 2017 Paragon Security ©
 Paragon Academy Basic Security Training Manual

4.6.2 Employment Standards Act, “ESA RSO 2000”

PART I - Definitions
Under the Employment Standards Act (ESA), security services is called “Building services” which
also include other types of services such as food preparation and serving, cleaning and any other
prescribed services for a building;
“Building services provider” or “provider” means a person who provides building services for
premises and includes Security Guards, the owner or manager of premises if the owner or manager
provides building services for the person that owns or manages the building.
“Continuous operation” means an operation or that part of an operation that normally continues
24 hours a day without stopping in each seven-day period until it is concluded, such as security
services.
“Employee” includes, a person including managers and executives who perform work for wages
and a person who supplies services to an employer for wages. This includes a person who receives
training from a person who is considered an employer.
“Employer” includes, an owner, manager, superintendent, or overseer (supervisor, lead hand,
trainer), who has control, responsibility or direction for the employment of a person.
“Premium pay” means an employee’s entitlement for working on a public holiday.
“Public holiday” means any of the following:
1. New Year’s Day
2. Family Day
3. Good Friday
4. Victoria Day
5. Canada Day
6. Labour Day
7. Thanksgiving Day
8. Christmas Day
9. Boxing Day

*Any day prescribed as a public holiday (In Ontario, this includes Family Day)

Page 91 of 346 Basic Training Manual Version 10 – 14 March 2017 Paragon Security ©
 Paragon Academy Basic Security Training Manual

“Trade union” means an organization that represents employees in collective bargaining under any
of the following:
1. The Labour Relations Act, 1995.
2. The Crown Employees Collective Bargaining Act, 1993.
3. Part X.1 of the Education Act.
4. Part IX of the Fire Protection and Prevention Act, 1997.
5. The Colleges Collective Bargaining Act, 2008.
6. Any prescribed Acts or provisions of Acts;

Agreements in writing
An agreement between an employer and an employee shall be deemed to be a reference to an
agreement in writing or to their agreeing in writing to do something. Nothing agreed upon is
required to be in writing except a collective agreement.
PART III - How This Act Applies
The employment standards set out in this Act apply to an employee and his or her employer if the
employee’s work is to be performed in Ontario or the employee’s work is to be performed outside
Ontario and is a continuation of the work performed in Ontario (this could be a Private Investigator
continuing an investigation outside the province, for example).
This Act does not apply to a secondary school student who performs work under a work experience
program authorized by the school board or an individual who performs work under a program
approved by a college of applied arts and technology or a university.
An employment standard under this Act cannot be contracted out or waived. If a right or benefit
is provided under an employment contract or in another Act that provides a greater benefit to an
employee than the employment standard, then that right or benefit applies.
A settlement made on an employee’s behalf by a trade union representing the employee is binding
on the employee.
Agents
An agreement or authorization that may lawfully be made or given by an employee under this Act
may be made or given by his or her agent and is binding on the employee.

Page 92 of 346 Basic Training Manual Version 10 – 14 March 2017 Paragon Security ©
 Paragon Academy Basic Security Training Manual

PART IV – Continuity of Employment in the Event of Sale of Business, etc.

If a business is sold and the buyer continues to employ an employee of the seller then the Act
considers the employment to be continuous for the purpose of calculating length of service or
employment. This calculation does not apply if the day on which the purchaser hires the employee
is more than 13 weeks after the employee has left the business.

No termination or severance
This section applies if the building services provider for a building is replaced by a new provider
and an employee continues work for the new provider. The employment is considered continuous
for the purposes of this Act and for the purpose of calculating length of service or employment
with the new provider.
This rule does not apply if the day on which the new provider hires the employee is more than 13
weeks after the employee has left the business.

PART V – Payment of wages

Statement of wages
On the day of an employee’s pay day or before, the employer shall give to the employee a written
statement setting out the pay period for which the wages are being paid, the wage rate, the gross
amount of wages and, unless the information is provided to the employee in some other manner,
how that amount was calculated.
The statement must also include the amount and purpose of each deduction from wages and the
gross amount of any vacation pay being paid to the employee.
An employer shall not withhold wages payable to an employee, make a deduction from an
employee’s wages or cause the employee to return his or her wages to the employer unless
authorized to do so under this section.
Authorization would include a written agreement for payment of such items as uniforms,
equipment, tools, etc.

Page 93 of 346 Basic Training Manual Version 10 – 14 March 2017 Paragon Security ©
 Paragon Academy Basic Security Training Manual

PART VII – Limits on Hours of Work & Eating Periods

No employer shall require or permit an employee to work more than eight hours in a day or, if the
employer establishes a regular work day of more than eight hours for the employee, the number of
hours in his or her regular work day and 48 hours in a work week.

Exception:
If the employer has received an approval from the Ministry they may establish an agreement with
the employee or a group of employees that allow the following:
An employee’s hours of work may exceed 8 hours a day if the employee has made an agreement
with the employer that he or she will work up to a specified number of hours in a day in not to
exceed the number specified in the agreement. Exception: hours in a work week.
An employee’s hours of work may exceed 48 hours in a week if the employee has made an
agreement with the employer that he or she will work up to a specified number of hours in excess
of the limit.
For example regularly scheduled shifts that are 10 hours in duration for four consecutive days may
be averaged each week or over several weeks subject to certain restrictions set out by the Ministry
and/or a Union (Collective Bargaining Agreement).
An employer shall give an employee a period of at least 11 consecutive hours free from performing
work in each day. This rule does not apply to an employee who is on call and called in during a
period in which the employee would not otherwise be expected to perform work.

Free from work between shifts

An employer shall give an employee a period of at least eight hours free from the performance of
work between shifts unless the total time worked on successive shifts does not exceed 13 hours or
unless the employer and the employee agree otherwise.

Page 94 of 346 Basic Training Manual Version 10 – 14 March 2017 Paragon Security ©
 Paragon Academy Basic Security Training Manual

Weekly or biweekly free time requirements

An employer shall give an employee a period free from the performance of work equal to at least
24 consecutive hours in every work week or at least 48 consecutive hours in every period of two
consecutive work weeks.

Exceptional circumstances
An employer may require an employee to work more than the maximum number of hours
permitted under section or to work during a period that is required to be free from performing work
under section only as follows, but only so far as is necessary to avoid serious interference with the
ordinary working of the employer’s establishment or operations:
1. To deal with an emergency.
2. If something unforeseen occurs, to ensure the continued delivery of essential public
services, regardless of who delivers those services.
3. If something unforeseen occurs, to ensure that continuous processes or seasonal operations
are not interrupted.
4. To carry out urgent repair work to the employer’s plant or equipment

Eating periods
An employer shall give an employee an eating period of at least 30 minutes at intervals that will
result in the employee working no more than five consecutive hours without an eating period. This
rule does not apply if the employer and the employee agree, whether or not in writing, that the
employee is to be given two eating periods that together total at least 30 minutes in each
consecutive five-hour period.
An employer is not required to pay an employee for an eating period in which work is not being
performed unless his or her employment contract requires such payment.

PART VIII - Overtime Pay

Overtime threshold
An employer shall pay an employee overtime pay of at least one and one-half times his or her
regular rate for each hour of work in excess of 44 hours in each week or, if another limit is allowed,
the hours above that limit.

Page 95 of 346 Basic Training Manual Version 10 – 14 March 2017 Paragon Security ©
 Paragon Academy Basic Security Training Manual

Averaging
An employee’s hours of work may be averaged over two or more consecutive weeks for the
purpose of determining the employee’s entitlement, if any, to overtime pay if:
The employee has made an agreement with the employer that his or her hours of work may be
averaged over periods of a specified number of weeks, according to certain restrictions, including
the approval of the Ministry and any agreements made by the Union, if any.

PART IX - Minimum wage

An employer shall pay employees at least the prescribed minimum wage according to the standards
in effect at the time. This will be determined on a pay period basis by the amount of regular wages
paid to the employee in the pay period, divided by the number of hours he or she worked in the
pay period, other than hours for overtime pay or premium pay.
When the amount of overtime pay and premium pay is divided by the number of overtime hours
worked it must be at least equal to one and one half times the prescribed minimum wage.

PART X - Public holiday pay

An employee’s public holiday pay for a given public holiday shall be equal to, the total amount of
regular wages earned and vacation pay payable to the employee in the four work weeks before the
work week in which the public holiday occurred, divided by 20 or if some other manner of
calculation is prescribed, the amount determined using that manner of calculation.
An employer who is required under this Part to pay premium pay to an employee shall pay the
employee at least one and one half times his or her regular rate.
Requirement to work on a public holiday: certain operations
If an employee is employed in a hospital, a continuous operation, or a hotel, motel, tourist resort,
restaurant or tavern, the employer may require the employee to work on a public holiday.

Page 96 of 346 Basic Training Manual Version 10 – 14 March 2017 Paragon Security ©
 Paragon Academy Basic Security Training Manual

PART XI - Right to vacation with pay

An employer shall give an employee a vacation of at least two weeks after each vacation
entitlement year that he or she completes. The year includes both active employment and inactive
employment.
If an employee does not take his or her vacation in complete weeks the employer shall base the
number of days of vacation that the employee is entitled to on, the number of days in the
employee’s regular work week. If the employee does not have a regular work week, the average
number of days the employee worked per week during the most recently completed vacation
entitlement year.

PART XII - Equal pay for equal work

No employer shall pay an employee of one sex at a rate of pay less than the rate paid to an employee
of the other sex when they perform substantially the same kind of work in the same establishment.
This applies when their performance requires substantially the same skill, effort and responsibility
and their work is performed under similar working conditions.
This rule does not apply when the difference in the rate of pay is made on the basis of a seniority
system, merit system, a system that measures earnings by quantity or quality of production or any
other factor other than sex.
No employer shall reduce the rate of pay of an employee in order to equalize two employees being
paid different rates based on sex.
No trade union or other organization shall cause or attempt to cause an employer to contravene
this rule.
PART XIV – Leaves of absence
“Parent” includes a person with whom a child is placed for adoption and a person who is in a
relationship of some permanence with a parent of a child and who intends to treat the child as his
or her own.
“Spouse” means, a spouse as defined in section 1 of the Family Law Act, or either of two persons
who live together in a conjugal relationship outside marriage.

Page 97 of 346 Basic Training Manual Version 10 – 14 March 2017 Paragon Security ©
 Paragon Academy Basic Security Training Manual

Pregnancy leave
A pregnant employee is entitled to a leave of absence without pay unless her due date falls fewer
than 13 weeks after she commenced employment. An employee may begin her pregnancy leave
no earlier than the day that is 17 weeks before her due date or the day on which she gives birth.
An employee’s pregnancy leave ends, if she is entitled to parental leave, 17 weeks after the
pregnancy leave began. If she is not entitled to parental leave, on the day that is the later of, 17
weeks after the pregnancy leave began, and six weeks after the birth, still-birth or miscarriage.
An employee may end her leave earlier than the day set out above by giving her employer written
notice at least four weeks before the day she wishes to end her leave.

Parental leave
An employee who has been employed for at least 13 weeks and who is the parent of a child is
entitled to a leave of absence without pay following the birth of the child or the coming of the child
into the employee’s custody, care and control for the first time.
An employee may begin parental leave no later than 52 weeks after the day the child is born or
comes into the employee’s custody, care and control for the first time.
An employee who has taken pregnancy leave must begin her parental leave when her pregnancy
leave ends unless the child has not yet come into her custody, care and control for the first time.
An employee wishing to take parental leave shall give the employer written notice at least two
weeks before the day the leave is to begin.

Page 98 of 346 Basic Training Manual Version 10 – 14 March 2017 Paragon Security ©
 Paragon Academy Basic Security Training Manual

Emergency leave
An employee whose employer regularly employs 50 or more employees is entitled to a leave of
absence without pay because of any of the following:
1. A personal illness, injury or medical emergency.

2. The death, illness, injury or medical emergency of an individual described below.

3. An urgent matter that concerns an individual described below;

a) The employee’s spouse
b) Parent, step-parent or foster parent of the employee or the employee’s spouse
c) A child, step-child or foster child of the employee or the employee’s spouse
d) A grandparent, step-grandparent, grandchild or step-grandchild of the employee or
of the employee’s spouse
e) The spouse of a child of the employee
f) The employee’s brother or sister
g) A relative of the employee who is dependent on the employee for care or assistance

An employee who wishes to take leave under this section shall advise his or her employer that he
or she will be doing so. An employee is entitled to take a total of 10 days’ leave under this section
in each calendar year.
If an employee takes any part of a day as leave under this section, the employer may deem the
employee to have taken one day’s leave on that day for the purposes. An employer may require an
employee who takes leave under this section to provide evidence reasonable in the circumstances
that the employee is entitled to the leave.

Member of the reserves

An employee is entitled to a leave of absence without pay if the employee is a reservist and will
not be performing the duties of his or her position because the employee is deployed to a Canadian
Forces operation outside Canada or the employee is deployed to a Canadian Forces operation
inside Canada that is or will be providing assistance in dealing with an emergency or with its
aftermath.
Participation, whether inside or outside Canada, in pre-deployment or post-deployment activities
that are required by the Canadian Forces in connection with an operation described is considered
deployment to the operation for the purposes.

Page 99 of 346 Basic Training Manual Version 10 – 14 March 2017 Paragon Security ©
 Paragon Academy Basic Security Training Manual

An employee is not entitled to begin a leave under this section unless he or she has been employed
by the employer for at least the prescribed period or, if no period is prescribed, for at least six
consecutive months.

PART XV – Termination and Severance of Employment

No employer shall terminate the employment of an employee who has been continuously
employed for three months or more unless the employer has given to the employee written notice
of termination or an employer may terminate the employment of an employee without notice or
with less notice than is required if the employer:
Pays to the employee termination pay in a lump sum equal to the amount the employee would have
been entitled to receive if had notice been given and continues to make whatever benefit plan
contributions would be required to be made in order to maintain the benefits to which the employee
would have been entitled had he or she continued to be employed during the period of notice that
he or she would otherwise have been entitled to receive.

Temporary lay-off
A temporary layoff is a lay-off of not more than 13 weeks in any period of 20 consecutive weeks
or is less than 35 weeks in any period of 52 consecutive weeks and the employee continues to
receive substantial payments from the employer, the employer continues to make payments for the
benefit of the employee under a legitimate retirement or pension plan or a legitimate group or
employee insurance plan, or the employee receives supplementary unemployment benefits.

Temporary lay-off not termination

An employer who has laid-off an employee without specifying a recall date shall not be considered
to terminate the employment, unless the period of the lay-off exceeds the time allowed

Page 100 of 346 Basic Training Manual Version 10 – 14 March 2017 Paragon Security ©
 Paragon Academy Basic Security Training Manual

Notice of termination
• One week before the termination, if the employee’s period of employment is less than one
year
• At least two weeks before the termination, if the employee’s period of employment is one
year or more and fewer than three years
• At least three weeks before the termination, if the employee’s period of employment is
three years or more and fewer than four years
• At least four weeks before the termination, if the employee’s period of employment is four
years or more and fewer than five years
• At least five weeks before the termination, if the employee’s period of employment is five
years or more and fewer than six years
• At least six weeks before the termination, if the employee’s period of employment is six
years or more and fewer than seven years
• At least seven weeks before the termination, if the employee’s period of employment is
seven years or more and fewer than eight years
• At least eight weeks before the termination, if the employee’s period of employment is
eight years or more

Entitlement to severance pay

An employer who severs an employment relationship with an employee shall pay severance pay
to the employee if the employee was employed by the employer for five years or more and, the
severance occurred because of a permanent discontinuance of all or part of the employer’s business
at an establishment and the employee is one of 50 or more employees who have their employment
relationship severed within a six-month period as a result.

PART XVI - Lie Detectors

An employee has a right not to take a lie detector test, be asked to take a lie detector test, or be
required to take a lie detector test.
No person shall, directly or indirectly, require, request, enable or influence an employee to take a
lie detector test
No person shall disclose to an employer that an employee has taken a lie detector test or disclose
to an employer the results of a lie detector test taken by an employee

Page 101 of 346 Basic Training Manual Version 10 – 14 March 2017 Paragon Security ©
 Paragon Academy Basic Security Training Manual

This Part shall not be interpreted to prevent a person from being asked by a police officer to take,
consenting to take and taking a lie detector test administered on behalf of a police force in Ontario
or by a member of a police force in Ontario in the course of the investigation of an offence

PART XVIII.1 – Temporary Help Agencies

Temporary help agency means an employer that employs persons for the purpose of assigning
them to perform work on a temporary basis for clients of the employer.
Where an assignment employee has been assigned by a temporary help agency to perform work
on a temporary basis for a client and the employee has begun to perform the work, the agency may
charge a fee to the client in the event that the client enters into an employment relationship with
the employee, but only during the six-month period beginning on the day on which the employee
first began to perform work for the client of the agency

PART XIX – Building Services Providers

This Part applies if a building services provider for a building is replaced by a new provider
Termination and severance pay
The new provider shall comply with Part XV (Termination and Severance of Employment) with
respect to every employee of the replaced provider who is engaged in providing services at the
premises and whom the new provider does not employ as if the new provider had terminated and
severed the employee’s employment
A provider who ceases to provide services at a premises and who ceases to employ an employee
shall pay to the employee the amount of any accrued vacation pay

PART XXI - Who enforces this Act and what they can do
Investigation and inspection powers
An employment standards officer may, without a warrant, enter and inspect any place in order to
investigate a possible contravention of this Act or to perform an inspection to ensure that this Act
is being complied with.
The power to enter and inspect a place without a warrant may be exercised only during the place’s
regular business hours or, if it does not have regular business hours, during daylight hours.

Page 102 of 346 Basic Training Manual Version 10 – 14 March 2017 Paragon Security ©
 Paragon Academy Basic Security Training Manual

The power to enter and inspect a place without a warrant shall not be exercised to enter and inspect
a part of the place that is used as a dwelling unless the occupier of the dwelling consents or a
warrant has been issued.
An employment standards officer is not entitled to use force to enter and inspect a place.
An employment standards officer shall produce, on request, evidence of his or her appointment.
An employment standards officer conducting an investigation or inspection may question any
person on matters the officer thinks may be relevant to the investigation or inspection.

Obstruction
No person shall hinder, obstruct or interfere with or attempt to hinder, obstruct or interfere with an
employment standards officer conducting an investigation or inspection.
No person shall refuse to answer questions on matters that an employment standards officer thinks
may be relevant to an investigation or inspection or provide an employment standards officer with
information on matters the officer thinks may be relevant to an investigation or inspection that the
person knows to be false or misleading.
No person shall prevent or attempt to prevent an employment standards officer from making
inquiries of any person.

PART XXII- Complaints and enforcement

A person alleging that this Act has been or is being contravened may file a complaint with the
Ministry in a written or electronic form. A complaint that is not filed in a form approved by the
Director shall be deemed not to have been filed.
A complaint regarding a contravention that occurred more than two years before the day on which
the complaint was filed shall be deemed not to have been filed.
An employee who files a complaint under this Act with respect to an alleged failure to pay wages
or comply with Part XIII (Benefit Plans) may not commence a civil proceeding with respect to the
same matter.
An employee who files a complaint under this Act alleging an entitlement to termination pay or
severance pay may not commence a civil proceeding for wrongful dismissal if the complaint and
the proceeding would relate to the same termination or severance of employment.
An employee who commences a civil proceeding with respect to an alleged failure to pay wages
or to comply with Part XIII (Benefit Plans) may not file a complaint with respect to the same
matter or have such a complaint investigated.

Page 103 of 346 Basic Training Manual Version 10 – 14 March 2017 Paragon Security ©
 Paragon Academy Basic Security Training Manual

An employee who commences a civil proceeding for wrongful dismissal may not file a complaint
alleging an entitlement to termination pay or severance pay or have such a complaint investigated
if the proceeding and the complaint relate to the same termination or severance of employment.
Enforcement under Collective Agreement
If an employer is or has been bound by a collective agreement, this Act is enforceable against the
employer as if it were part of the collective agreement with respect to an alleged contravention of
this Act that occurs.
Complaint not permitted
An employee who is represented by a trade union that is or was a party to a collective agreement
may not file a complaint alleging a contravention of this Act that is enforceable under the collective
agreement.

Employee bound by decision of union

An employee who is represented by a trade union that is or was a party to a collective agreement
is bound by any decision of the trade union with respect to the enforcement of this Act under the
collective agreement, including a decision not to seek that enforcement.
Despite the foregoing, the Director may permit an employee to file a complaint and may direct an
employment standards officer to investigate it if the Director considers it appropriate in the
circumstances.

Page 104 of 346 Basic Training Manual Version 10 – 14 March 2017 Paragon Security ©
 Paragon Academy Basic Security Training Manual

4.6.3 Ontario Labour Relations Act (OLRA), RSO 1999

The following are the purposes of the Act:

1. To facilitate collective bargaining between employers and trade unions that are freely
designated representatives of the employees.
2. To recognize the importance of workplace parties adapting to change.
3. To promote flexibility, productivity and employee involvement in the workplace.
4. To encourage communication between employers and employees in the workplace.
5. To recognize the importance of economic growth as the foundation for mutually beneficial
relations amongst employers, employees and trade unions.
6. To encourage co-operative participation of employers and trade unions in resolving
workplace issues.

Definitions
Accredited employers’ organization means an organization of employers that is accredited under
this Act as the bargaining agent for a unit of employers.
Bargaining unit means a unit of employees appropriate for collective bargaining, whether it is an
employer unit or a plant unit or a subdivision of either of them.
Board means the Ontario Labour Relations Board
Certified council of trade unions means a council of trade unions that is certified under this Act as
the bargaining agent for a bargaining unit of employees of an employer.
Collective agreement means an agreement in writing between an employer or an employers’
organization, on the one hand, and a trade union that, or a council of trade unions that, represents
employees of the employer or employees of members of the employers’ organization, on the other
hand, containing provisions respecting terms or conditions of employment or the rights, privileges
or duties of the employer, the employers’ organization, the trade union or the employees, and
includes a provincial agreement and does not include a project agreement under section 163.1.
Council of trade unions includes an allied council, a trade council, a joint board and any other
association of trade unions.

Page 105 of 346 Basic Training Manual Version 10 – 14 March 2017 Paragon Security ©
 Paragon Academy Basic Security Training Manual

Employee includes a dependent contractor

Employers’ organization means an organization of employers formed for purposes that include the
regulation of relations between employers and employees and includes an accredited employers’
organization and a designated or accredited employer bargaining agency.
Lock-out includes the closing of a place of employment, a suspension of work or a refusal by an
employer to continue to employ a number of employees, with a view to compel or induce the
employees, or to aid another employer to compel or induce that employer’s employees, to refrain
from exercising any rights or privileges under this Act or to agree to provisions or changes in
provisions respecting terms or conditions of employment or the rights, privileges or duties of the
employer, an employers’ organization, the trade union, or the employees.
Member, when used with reference to a trade union, includes a person who has applied for
membership in the trade union.
Strike includes a cessation of work, a refusal to work or to continue to work by employees in
combination or in concert or in accordance with a common understanding, or a slow-down or other
concerted activity on the part of employees designed to restrict or limit output.
Trade union means an organization of employees formed for purposes that include the regulation
of relations between employees and employers and includes a provincial, national, or international
trade union, a certified council of trade unions and a designated or certified employee bargaining
agency.
For the purposes of this Act, no person shall be deemed to have ceased to be an employee by
reason only of the person’s ceasing to work for the person’s employer as the result of a lock-out
or strike or by reason only of being dismissed by the person’s employer contrary to this Act or to
a collective agreement.
Subject to section 97, for the purposes of this Act, no person shall be deemed to be an employee,
(b) who, in the opinion of the Board, exercises managerial functions or is employed in a
confidential capacity in matters relating to labour relations.

Injunction – a legal process or order of the courts requiring the person or entity named to do
something or refrain from doing something. This may include, for example an injunction limiting
the number of picketers allowed during a strike or the employer from hiring replacements.
Arbitration – a judicial process regarding a dispute that is generally heard before a tribunal with a
panel of up to three persons deciding the resolutions.
Mediation – a process to facilitate agreement or reconciliation between two parties.
This process is also usually overseen by a panel or an appointed independent mediator.
Grievance – a written complaint regarding a wrong, unjust or unfair act.

Page 106 of 346 Basic Training Manual Version 10 – 14 March 2017 Paragon Security ©
 Paragon Academy Basic Security Training Manual

Collective agreement – a contract between the employees and their representatives (Union of
employees) and the employer setting out the rules and practices in the workplace.

Security Guards
This section applies with respect to guards who monitor other employees or who protect the
property of an employer.
Trade unions with members other than Guards may have members who are both Guards and other
employees under the same bargaining unit unless the employer notifies the Board it objects. This
could be on the grounds of conflict of interest, for example.
If the employer objects, the trade union must satisfy the Board that no conflict of interest would
result from the trade union becoming the bargaining agent or from including persons other than
guards in the bargaining unit.
The Board shall consider the following factors in determining whether a conflict of interest would
result:
1. The extent of the guards’ duties monitoring other employees of their employer or protecting
their employer’s property.
2. Any other duties or responsibilities of the guards that might give rise to a conflict of
interest.
3. Such other factors as the Board considers relevant.
If the Board is satisfied that no conflict of interest would result, the Board may certify the trade
union to represent the bargaining unit.

Conciliation Boards
A conciliation board has power to summon and enforce the attendance of witnesses and compel
them to give oral or written evidence on oath, and to produce such documents and things as the
board considers requisite to the full investigation and consideration of the matters referred to it in
the same manner as a court of record in civil cases.

Mediation and mediators

Where a mediator is appointed, he or she shall confer with the parties and endeavour to effect a
collective agreement.
A mediator has all the powers of a conciliation board.

Page 107 of 346 Basic Training Manual Version 10 – 14 March 2017 Paragon Security ©
 Paragon Academy Basic Security Training Manual

Voluntary arbitration
Despite any other provision of this Act, the parties may at any time following the giving of notice
of desire to bargain, irrevocably agree in writing to refer all matters remaining in dispute between
them to an arbitrator or a board of arbitration for final and binding determination.
The agreement to arbitrate shall supersede all other dispute settlement provisions of this Act,
including those provisions relating to conciliation, mediation, strike and lock-out.
Where a party, employer, trade union or employee has failed to comply with any of the terms of
the decision of an arbitrator or arbitration board, any party, employer, trade union or employee
affected by the decision may file in the Superior Court of Justice a copy of the decision, exclusive
of the reasons therefore, in the prescribed form, whereupon the decision shall be entered in the
same way as a judgment or order of that court and is enforceable as such.

Provisions allowed
The employer and the union may include provisions in the collective agreement requiring, as a
condition of employment, membership in the trade union and requiring the payment of dues or
contributions to the trade union.
Permitting an employee who represents the trade union such a s union steward to attend to the
business of the trade union during working hours without deduction of wages or time.
The employer and the union may include provisions for permitting the trade union the use of the
employer’s premises for the purposes of the trade union.

Religious beliefs that preclude union membership

Where the Board is satisfied that an employee because of his or her religious conviction or belief,
objects to joining a trade union or objects to the paying of dues or other assessments to a trade
union, the Board may order that the provisions of a collective agreement do not apply to the
employee and that the employee is not required to join the trade union, to be or continue to be a
member of the trade union, or to pay any dues, fees or assessments to the trade union, provided
that amounts equal to any initiation fees, dues or other assessments are paid by the employee to or
are remitted by the employer to a charitable organization mutually agreed upon by the employee
and the trade union, but if the employee and the trade union fail to so agree then to a charitable
organization registered as a charitable organization in Canada under Part I of the Income Tax Act
(Canada) that may be designated by the Board.

Page 108 of 346 Basic Training Manual Version 10 – 14 March 2017 Paragon Security ©
 Paragon Academy Basic Security Training Manual

Discrimination prohibited
A collective agreement must not discriminate against any person if the discrimination is contrary
to the Human Rights Code or the Canadian Charter of Rights and Freedoms.
How collective agreements apply
A collective agreement between an employers’ organization and a trade union or council of trade
unions is, subject to and for the purposes of this Act, binding upon the employers’ organization
and each person who was a member of the employers’ organization at the time the agreement was
entered into and on whose behalf the employers’ organization bargained with the trade union or
council of trade unions as if it was made between each of such persons.
The collective agreement is also binding upon the trade union or council of trade unions and upon
the employees in the bargaining unit defined in the agreement, and, if any such person ceases to
be a member of the employers’ organization during the term of operation of the agreement, the
person shall, for the remainder of the term of operation of the agreement, be deemed to be a party
to a like agreement with the trade union or council of trade unions.

Threatening strike or lock-out

No employee shall threaten an unlawful strike and no employer shall threaten an unlawful lock-
out of an employee.

Removal, etc., of posted notices

No person shall wilfully destroy, mutilate, obliterate, alter, deface or remove or cause to be
destroyed, mutilated, obliterated, altered, defaced or removed any notice that the Board has
required to be posted during the period that the notice is required to be posted.

Inquiry, alleged contravention

96. (1) The Board may authorize a labour relations officer to inquire into any complaint alleging
a contravention of this Act.

Page 109 of 346 Basic Training Manual Version 10 – 14 March 2017 Paragon Security ©
 Paragon Academy Basic Security Training Manual

Offences
Every person, trade union, council of trade unions or employers’ organization that contravenes any
provision of this Act or of any decision, determination, interim order, order, direction, declaration
or ruling made under this Act is guilty of an offence and on conviction is liable, if an individual,
to a fine of not more than $2,000 or if a corporation, trade union, council of trade unions or
employers’ organization, to a fine of not more than $25,000.
Each day that a person, trade union, council of trade unions or employers’ organization
contravenes any provision of this Act or of any decision, determination, interim order, order,
direction, declaration or ruling made under this Act constitutes a separate offence.
If a corporation, trade union, council of trade unions or employers’ organization is guilty of an
offence under this Act, every officer, official or agent thereof who assented to the commission of
the offence shall be deemed to be a party to and guilty of the offence.

4.6.4 Liquor Licence Act, R.S.O. 1990

Definitions
In this Act, “alcohol” means a product of fermentation or distillation of grains, fruits or other
agricultural products, and includes synthetic ethyl alcohol.
“Beer” means any beverage containing alcohol in excess of the prescribed amount obtained by the
fermentation of an infusion or decoction of barley, malt and hops or of any similar products in
drinkable water;
No person shall keep for sale, offer for sale or sell liquor except under the authority of a licence or
permit to sell liquor or under the authority of a manufacturer’s licence.
No person shall canvass for, receive or solicit orders for the sale of liquor unless the person is the
holder of a licence or permit to sell liquor or unless the person is the holder of a licence to represent
a manufacturer.
No person shall deliver liquor for a fee except under the authority of a licence to deliver liquor.
The Registrar may issue a proposal to revoke or suspend a licence to sell liquor or refuse to renew
such a licence for any ground under subsection 6 (2), (4) or (4.1) that would disentitle the licensee
to a licence if the licensee were an applicant or if the licensee has contravened this Act, the
regulations or a condition of the licence.

Page 110 of 346 Basic Training Manual Version 10 – 14 March 2017 Paragon Security ©
 Paragon Academy Basic Security Training Manual

Conditions of permit
A police officer or a person designated under subsection 43 (1) may, by giving a notice of
revocation in accordance with subsection (15), revoke a special occasion permit issued for an event
while the event is under way if he or she reasonably believes that this Act or a prescribed provision
of the regulations is being contravened in connection with the event.
The notice of revocation may be given orally or in writing to the permit holder or to a person
designated under the regulations by the permit holder to attend the event in the permit holder’s
place.
A notice of revocation under subsection (14) takes effect immediately.
No person shall purchase liquor except from a government store or from a person authorized by
licence or permit to sell liquor.
No manufacturer or employee, agent or licensed representative of a manufacturer shall give any
liquor to any person, except as permitted by the regulations.
No person shall sell or supply liquor or permit liquor to be sold or supplied to any person who is
or appears to be intoxicated.
No person shall knowingly sell or supply liquor to a person that is under nineteen years of age.
No person shall sell or supply liquor to a person who appears to be under the age of nineteen years.
No licensee or employee or agent of a licensee shall knowingly permit a person under the age of
nineteen years to have or consume liquor in the licensee’s licensed premises.
No licensee or employee or agent of a licensee shall permit a person who appears to be under
nineteen years of age to have or consume liquor in the licensee’s licensed premises.
The above subsections do not prohibit a licensee or employee or agent of a licensee from
permitting a person eighteen years of age to be in possession of liquor during the course of the
person’s employment on the licensee’s licensed premises.

Possession or consumption
No person under nineteen years of age shall have, consume or attempt to purchase, purchase or
otherwise obtain liquor.
This subsection does not prohibit a person eighteen years of age from being in possession of liquor
during the course of the person’s employment on premises in which the sale or service of liquor is
authorized.

Page 111 of 346 Basic Training Manual Version 10 – 14 March 2017 Paragon Security ©
 Paragon Academy Basic Security Training Manual

Entering premises
No person under nineteen years of age shall enter or remain on premises in which the sale of liquor
is authorized if the person knows that a condition of the licence or permit for the premises prohibits
the entry of persons under the age of nineteen years.
This does not apply to a person eighteen years of age who is employed on premises in which the
sale or service of liquor is authorized while the person is on the premises during the course of his
or her employment.

Improper documentation
No person shall present as evidence of his or her age any documentation other than documentation
that was lawfully issued to him or her.

Supply by parent
This section does not apply to the supplying of liquor to a person under nineteen years of age in a
residence as defined or in a private place as defined in the regulations by a parent of the person or
a person having lawful custody of the person or to the consumption of liquor by a person who is
supplied liquor in this setting, if the liquor is consumed at the place where it is supplied.
In this section, “residence” means a place that is actually occupied and used as a dwelling, whether
or not in common with other persons, including all premises used in conjunction with the place to
which the general public is not invited or permitted access, and, if the place occupied and used as
a dwelling is a tent, includes the land immediately adjacent to and used in conjunction with the
tent.
Unlawful possession or consumption
No person shall have or consume liquor in any place other than a residence, a premises in respect
of which a licence or permit is issued or a private place as defined in the regulations.
This subsection does not apply to the possession of liquor that is in a closed container.
No person shall be in an intoxicated condition in a place to which the general public is invited or
permitted access or in any part of a residence that is used in common by persons occupying more
than one dwelling in the residence.

Page 112 of 346 Basic Training Manual Version 10 – 14 March 2017 Paragon Security ©
 Paragon Academy Basic Security Training Manual

Arrest without warrant

A police officer may arrest without warrant any person whom he or she finds contravening the
above subsections if, in the opinion of the police officer, to do so is necessary for the safety of any
person.
In this section, a reference to a police officer includes a conservation officer.

Removing person from premises

The holder of a licence or permit issued in respect of premises shall ensure that a person does not
remain on the premises if the holder has reasonable grounds to believe that the person is unlawfully
on the premises, is on the premises for an unlawful purpose or is contravening the law on the
premises.
The holder of a licence or permit may request a person referred to in the section, above to leave
the premises immediately and if the request is not forthwith complied with may remove the person
or cause the person to be removed by the use of no more force than is necessary.

Order to vacate premises

If there are reasonable grounds to believe that a disturbance or breach of the peace sufficient to
constitute a threat to the public safety is being caused on premises for which a licence or permit is
issued, a police officer may require that all persons vacate the premises.

Not to remain after being required to leave, No re-entry

No person shall remain on licensed premises after being required to vacate the premises by a police
officer under this section.
No person shall re-enter the licensed premises on the same day he or she is required to vacate
unless authorized to re-enter by a police officer.

Duty to ensure premises vacated

The holder of the licence or permit for premises that are required to be vacated under this
subsection shall take all reasonable steps to ensure that the premises are vacated.

Page 113 of 346 Basic Training Manual Version 10 – 14 March 2017 Paragon Security ©
 Paragon Academy Basic Security Training Manual

Right to refuse entry

A licensee or employee of a licensee who has reason to believe that the presence of a person on
the licensee’s licensed premises is undesirable may request the person to leave or forbid the person
to enter the licensed premises.
No person shall remain on licensed premises after he or she is requested to leave by the licensee
or an employee of the licensee or re-enter the licensed premises on the same day he or she is
requested to leave.

Removing persons from premises where contravention suspected

If there are reasonable grounds to believe that this Act or a prescribed provision of the regulations
is being contravened on any premises, a police officer may require that all persons vacate the
premises.
Not to remain after being required to leave
No person shall remain on the premises after being required to vacate the premises by a police
officer under this section or re-enter the premises on the same day he or she is required to vacate
unless authorized to re-enter by a police officer.
This section does not apply in respect of persons actually residing in the premises.

By-law designating recreational area

The council of a municipality may by by-law designate a recreational area within the municipality
that is owned or controlled by the municipality as a place where the possession of liquor is
prohibited.
A police officer who finds a person apparently in contravention of subsection 31 (4) may take the
person into custody and, in lieu of laying an information in respect of the contravention, may escort
the person to a hospital designated by the regulations.

Page 114 of 346 Basic Training Manual Version 10 – 14 March 2017 Paragon Security ©
 Paragon Academy Basic Security Training Manual

Civil liability
The following rules apply if a person or an agent or employee of a person sells liquor to or for a
person whose condition is such that the consumption of liquor would apparently intoxicate the
person or increase the person’s intoxication so that he or she would be in danger of causing injury
to himself or herself or injury or damage to another person or the property of another person:
1. If the person to or for whom the liquor is sold commits suicide or meets death by accident
while so intoxicated, an action under Part V of the Family Law Act lies against the person
who or whose employee or agent sold the liquor.
2. If the person to or for whom the liquor is sold causes injury or damage to another person
or the property of another person while so intoxicated, the other person is entitled to recover
an amount as compensation for the injury or damage from the person who or whose
employee or agent sold the liquor.

Obstruction
No person shall obstruct a person carrying out an inspection under this Act or withhold, destroy,
conceal or refuse to provide any relevant information or thing required for the purpose of the
inspection.

Seizure
A police officer may seize any thing, including liquor, if:
(a) He or she reasonably believes that the thing will afford evidence of an offence under this
Act;
(b) He or she reasonably believes that the thing was used or is being used in connection with
the commission of an offence under this Act, and unless the thing is seized it is likely that
it would continue to be used or would be used again in the commission of an offence under
this Act; or
(c) He or she reasonably believes that the thing is proceeds from the commission of an offence
under this Act.

Page 115 of 346 Basic Training Manual Version 10 – 14 March 2017 Paragon Security ©
 Paragon Academy Basic Security Training Manual

Arrest without warrant

If a police officer finds a person apparently in contravention of this Act or apparently in
contravention of a prescribed provision of the regulations, and the person refuses to give his or her
name and address or there are reasonable grounds to believe that the name or address given is
false, the police officer may arrest the person without warrant.

Confidentiality
Every person engaged in the administration of this Act shall preserve confidentiality in respect of
all matters that come to his or her knowledge in the course of his or her duties and shall not
communicate any such matter to any other person except;
(a) As may be required in connection with the administration of this Act and the regulations
or any proceeding under this Act;
(b) To his or her counsel; or
(c) With the consent of the person to whom the matter relates.

61. (1) A person is guilty of an offence if the person;

(a) Knowingly furnishes false information in any application under this Act or in any
statement or return required to be furnished under this Act;
(b) Knowingly fails to comply with an order under subsection 38 (2); or
(c) Contravenes any provision of this Act or the regulations.

Derivative
(2) A director or officer of a corporation who caused, authorized, permitted or participated
in an offence under this Act by the corporation is guilty of an offence.

Page 116 of 346 Basic Training Manual Version 10 – 14 March 2017 Paragon Security ©
 Paragon Academy Basic Security Training Manual

Penalties
Upon conviction for an offence under this Act, other than a contravention of subsection 30 (1),
(2), (3), (4) or (4.1);
(a) A corporation is liable to a fine of not more than $250,000; and
(b) An individual is liable to a fine of not more than $100,000 or to imprisonment for a term
of not more than one year or both.
Same, sale, etc., to a minor
Upon conviction for contravening subsection 30 (1), (2), (3), (4) or (4.1),
(a) A corporation is liable to a fine of not more than $500,000; and
(b) An individual is liable to a fine of not more than $200,000 or to imprisonment for a term
of not more than one year or both.

Exception
An individual who is convicted of an offence under subsection 31 (2) or (4) is not liable to
imprisonment.

City of Toronto By-laws

Toronto by-law extending hours of sale
The City of Toronto may pass by-laws extending the hours of sale of liquor in all or part of the
City by the holders of a licence and a by-law may authorize a specified officer or employee of the
City to extend the hours of sale during events of municipal, provincial, national or international
significance.

Page 117 of 346 Basic Training Manual Version 10 – 14 March 2017 Paragon Security ©
 Paragon Academy Basic Security Training Manual

4.6.5 Provincial Offences Act

This Act applies most specifically to those Security Guards certified by municipalities as “Certified
Contract Officers” or “CCO” for the purposes of issuing Parking Infraction Notices for parking
offences on private property.

Purpose of Act
The purpose of this Act is to replace the summary conviction procedure for the prosecution of
provincial offences, including the provisions adopted by reference to the Criminal Code (Canada),
with a procedure that reflects the distinction between provincial offences and criminal offences.

Issuance and service

A provincial offences officer who believes that one or more persons have committed an offence
may issue, by completing and signing in the form prescribed under section 13, (a) a certificate of
offence certifying that an offence has been committed; and (b) either an offence notice indicating
the set fine for the offence or a summons.

Certificate of service
Where service is made by the provincial offences officer who issued the certificate of offence, the
officer shall certify on the certificate of offence that he or she personally served the offence notice
or summons on the person charged and the date of service.

Filing of certificate of offence

A certificate of offence shall be filed in the office of the court as soon as is practicable, but no later
than seven days after service of the offence notice or summons.

Page 118 of 346 Basic Training Manual Version 10 – 14 March 2017 Paragon Security ©
 Paragon Academy Basic Security Training Manual

PART II
COMMENCEMENT OF PROCEEDINGS FOR PARKING INFRACTIONS

“14. In this Part, “parking infraction” means any unlawful parking, standing or stopping of
a vehicle that constitutes an offence.

Proceeding, parking infraction

14.1 In addition to the procedure set out in Part III for commencing a proceeding by “laying
an information” a proceeding in respect of a parking infraction may be commenced in
accordance with this Part.

Certificate and notice of parking infraction

15. (1) A provincial offences officer who believes from his or her personal knowledge that
one or more persons have committed a parking infraction may issue,
(a) A certificate of parking infraction certifying that a parking infraction has been
committed; and
(b) A parking infraction notice indicating the set fine for the infraction.

Municipal by-laws
(3) If the alleged infraction is under a by-law of a municipality, it is not necessary to
include a reference to the number of the by-law on the certificate or notice.

Service on owner
(4) The issuing provincial offences officer may serve the parking infraction notice on the
owner of the vehicle identified in the notice,
(a) By affixing it to the vehicle in a conspicuous place at the time of the alleged
infraction; or
(b) By delivering it personally to the person having care and control of the vehicle at
the time of the alleged infraction.

Page 119 of 346 Basic Training Manual Version 10 – 14 March 2017 Paragon Security ©
 Paragon Academy Basic Security Training Manual

Service on operator
(5) The issuing provincial offences officer may serve the parking infraction notice on the
operator of a vehicle by delivering it to the operator personally at the time of the alleged
infraction.

Certificate of service
(6) The issuing provincial offences officer shall certify on the certificate of parking
infraction that he or she served the parking infraction notice on the person charged and
the date and method of service.

Penalty for failure to attend

42. (1) Every person who, being required by law to attend or remain in attendance at a hearing,
fails without lawful excuse to attend or remain in attendance accordingly is guilty of
an offence and on conviction is liable to a fine of not more than $2,000, or to
imprisonment for a term of not more than thirty days, or to both.

General penalty
61. Except where otherwise expressly provided by law, every person who is convicted of an
offence is liable to a fine of not more than $5,000.

Notice of order
(5) Where the court makes a probation order, it shall cause a copy of the order and a copy
of section 75 to be given to the defendant.
Regulations for community service orders
(6) The Lieutenant Governor in Council may make regulations governing restitution,
compensation and community service orders, including their terms and conditions.

(7) The court shall not make a probation order when an individual has been convicted of
an absolute liability offence, unless the order is made in addition to a sentence of
imprisonment imposed under section 69 in default of payment of a fine.

Page 120 of 346 Basic Training Manual Version 10 – 14 March 2017 Paragon Security ©
 Paragon Academy Basic Security Training Manual

Absolute liability offence is an offence where the defendant cannot use the fact they did not
intend to commit an offence as an excuse to obtain a finding that they were not guilty.
PART V GENERAL PROVISIONS

77. (1) every person is a party to an offence who,

(a) Actually commits it;
(b) Does or omits to do anything for the purpose of aiding any person to commit it; or
(c) Abets any person in committing it.

Common purpose
(2) Where two or more persons form an intention in common to carry out an unlawful
purpose and to assist each other therein and any one of them, in carrying out the
common purpose, commits an offence, each of them who knew or ought to have known
that the commission of the offence would be a probable consequence of carrying out
the common purpose is a party to the offence.

Counselling
78. (1) Where a person counsels or procures another person to be a party to an offence and that
other person is afterwards a party to the offence, the person who counselled or procured
is a party to the offence, even if the offence was committed in a way different from that
which was counselled or procured.

(2) Every person who counsels or procures another person to be a party to an offence is a
party to every offence that the other commits in consequence of the counselling or
procuring that the person who counselled or procured knew or ought to have known
was likely to be committed in consequence of the counselling or procuring.
Computation of age
79. In the absence of other evidence, or by way of corroboration of other evidence, a justice
may infer the age of a person from his or her appearance.

Page 121 of 346 Basic Training Manual Version 10 – 14 March 2017 Paragon Security ©
 Paragon Academy Basic Security Training Manual

Common law defences

80. Every rule and principle of the common law that renders any circumstance a justification
or excuse for an act or a defence to a charge continues in force and applies in respect of
offences, except in so far as they are altered by or inconsistent with this or any other Act.
Ignorance of the law
81. Ignorance of the law by a person who commits an offence is not an excuse for committing
the offence.

Penalty for false statements

86. Every person who makes an assertion of fact in a statement or entry in a document or form
for use under this Act knowing that the assertion is false is guilty of an offence and on
conviction is liable to a fine of not more than $2,000.

Contempt
91. (1) Except as otherwise provided by an Act, every person who commits contempt in the
face of a justice of the peace presiding over the Ontario Court of Justice in a proceeding
under this Act is on conviction liable to a fine of not more than $1,000 or to
imprisonment for a term of not more than thirty days, or to both.

Part VI - Young Persons

93. In this Part, “parent”, when used with reference to a young person, includes an adult with
whom the young person ordinarily resides;
“Young person” means a person who is or, in the absence of evidence to the contrary,
appears to be,
(a) twelve years of age or more, but
(b) under sixteen years of age, and includes a person sixteen years of age or more charged
with having committed an offence while he or she was twelve years of age or more but
under sixteen years of age.

Minimum age
94. No person shall be convicted of an offence committed while he or she was under age twelve
years.

Page 122 of 346 Basic Training Manual Version 10 – 14 March 2017 Paragon Security ©
 Paragon Academy Basic Security Training Manual

Identity of young person not to be published

99. (1) No person shall publish by any means a report,
(a) Of an offence committed or alleged to have been committed by a young person; or
(b) Of a hearing, adjudication, sentence or appeal concerning a young person who
committed or is alleged to have committed an offence, in which the name of or any
information serving to identify the young person is disclosed.
For the purposes of this section, the word publish means make public

Offence
(2) Every person who contravenes subsection (1) and every director, officer or employee
of a corporation who authorizes, permits or acquiesces in a contravention of subsection
(1) by the corporation is guilty of an offence and is liable on conviction to a fine of not
more than $10,000.
(3) Subsection (1) does not prohibit the following:
1. The disclosure of information by the young person concerned.
2. The disclosure of information by the young person’s parent or lawyer, for the
purpose of protecting the young person’s interests.
3. The disclosure of information by a police officer, for the purpose of investigating
an offence which the young person is suspected of having committed.
4. The disclosure of information to an insurer, to enable the insurer to investigate a
claim arising out of an offence committed or alleged to have been committed by
the young person.
5. The disclosure of information in the course of the administration of justice, but not
for the purpose of making the information known in the community.
6. The disclosure of information by a person or member of a class of persons
prescribed by the regulations, for a purpose prescribed by the regulations.

Page 123 of 346 Basic Training Manual Version 10 – 14 March 2017 Paragon Security ©
 Paragon Academy Basic Security Training Manual

Arrest without warrant limited

106. No person shall exercise an authority under this or any other Act to arrest a young person
without warrant unless the person has reasonable and probable grounds to believe that it is
necessary in the public interest to do so in order to,
(a) Establish the young person’s identity; or
(b) Prevent the continuation or repetition of an offence that constitutes a serious danger to
the young person or to the person or property of another.
Substantial wrong
(4) On an application for relief in the nature of certiorari, the Superior Court of Justice
shall not grant relief unless the court finds that a substantial wrong or miscarriage of
justice has occurred, and the court may amend or validate any decision already made,
with effect from such time and on such terms as the court considers proper.

Certiorari is a legal term meaning the higher court sends the lower court an order to
send the record of the trial concerned for review by the higher court. This section means
that unless there is a serious wrong created by the lower court’s decision, the lower
court’s decision will not be reviewed.

Habeas corpus
142. (1) On application, the Superior Court of Justice may by order grant any relief in respect
of a matter arising under this Act that the applicant would be entitled to in an
application for an order in the nature of habeas corpus.

Habeas Corpus is a legal action that compels an authority holding someone prisoner to bring
them before the courts in order to prove the legality of holding the person prisoner.
Habeas corpus has been enshrined in our Charter Rights under Section 10.

Page 124 of 346 Basic Training Manual Version 10 – 14 March 2017 Paragon Security ©
 Paragon Academy Basic Security Training Manual

PART VIII ARREST, BAIL AND SEARCH WARRANTS

Arrest without warrant
145. Any person may arrest without warrant a person who he or she has reasonable and probable
grounds to believe has committed an offence and is escaping from and freshly pursued by
a police officer who has lawful authority to arrest that person, and, where the person who
makes the arrest is not a police officer, shall forthwith deliver the person arrested to a police
officer.
Use of force
146. (1) Every police officer is, if he or she acts on reasonable and probable grounds, justified
in using as much force as is necessary to do what the officer is required or authorized
by law to do.
(2) Every person upon whom a police officer calls for assistance is justified in using as
much force as he or she believes on reasonable and probable grounds is necessary to
render such assistance.
147. Where a person is wrongfully arrested, whether with or without a warrant, no action for
damages shall be brought,
(a) against the police officer making the arrest if he or she believed in good faith and
on reasonable and probable grounds that the person arrested was the person named
in the warrant or was subject to arrest without warrant under the authority of an
Act;
(b) Against any person called upon to assist the police officer if such person believed
that the police officer had the right to effect the arrest; or
(c) Against any person required to detain the prisoner in custody if such person
believed the arrest was lawfully made.
(2) It is the duty of everyone who arrests a person, whether with or without warrant, to give
notice to that person, where it is feasible to do so, of the reason for the arrest.

Page 125 of 346 Basic Training Manual Version 10 – 14 March 2017 Paragon Security ©
 Paragon Academy Basic Security Training Manual

4.6.6 Residential Tenancies Act, 1996

Purposes of Act
1. The purposes of this Act are to provide protection for residential tenants from unlawful
rent increases and unlawful evictions, to establish a framework for the regulation of
residential rents, to balance the rights and responsibilities of residential landlords and
tenants and to provide for the adjudication of disputes and for other processes to informally
resolve disputes.

“Landlord” includes,
(a) The owner of a rental unit or any other person who permits occupancy of a rental unit,
other than a tenant who occupies a rental unit in a residential complex and who permits
another person to also occupy the unit or any part of the unit,
(b) The heirs, assigns, personal representatives and successors in title of a person referred
to in clause (a), and
(c) a person, other than a tenant occupying a rental unit in a residential complex, who
is entitled to possession of the residential complex and who attempts to enforce
any of the rights of a landlord under a tenancy agreement or this Act, including the
right to collect rent;
Tenancy agreement means a written, oral or implied agreement between a tenant and a landlord
for occupancy of a rental unit and includes a licence to occupy a rental unit;
Utilities; means heat, electricity and water; “vital service” means hot or cold water, fuel, electricity,
gas or, during the part of each year prescribed by the regulations, heat.

Interpretation, sublet
(2) For the purposes of this Act, a reference to subletting a rental unit refers to the situation in
which,
(a) The tenant vacates the rental unit;
(b) the tenant gives one or more other persons the right to occupy the rental unit for a term
ending on a specified date before the end of the tenant’s term or period; and
(c) The tenant has the right to resume occupancy of the rental unit after that specified date.

Page 126 of 346 Basic Training Manual Version 10 – 14 March 2017 Paragon Security ©
 Paragon Academy Basic Security Training Manual

Interpretation, abandoned
(3) For the purposes of this Act, a tenant has not abandoned a rental unit if the tenant is not in
arrears of rent.
5. This Act does not apply with respect to,
(a) living accommodation intended to be provided to the travelling or vacationing public
or occupied for a seasonal or temporary period in a hotel, motel or motor hotel, resort,
lodge, tourist camp, cottage or cabin establishment, inn, campground, trailer park,
tourist home, bed and breakfast vacation establishment or vacation home;
(b) Living accommodation whose occupancy is conditional upon the occupant continuing
to be employed on a farm, whether or not the accommodation is located on that farm;
(c) Living accommodation that is a member unit of a non-profit housing co-operative;
(e) living accommodation that is subject to the Public Hospitals Act, the Private Hospitals
Act, the Community Psychiatric Hospitals Act, the Mental Hospitals Act, the Homes
for the Aged and Rest Homes Act, the Nursing Homes Act, the Ministry of Correctional
Services Act, the Charitable Institutions Act or the Child and Family Services Act or is
listed in Schedule 1 to Regulation 272 of the Revised Regulations of Ontario, 1990
made under the Developmental Services Act;

Page 127 of 346 Basic Training Manual Version 10 – 14 March 2017 Paragon Security ©
 Paragon Academy Basic Security Training Manual

PART II TENANCY AGREEMENTS

Information to be provided by landlord
11. (1) if a tenancy agreement is entered into, the landlord shall provide to the tenant
information relating to the rights and responsibilities of landlords and tenants, the role
of the Board and how to contact the Board.

Failure to comply
(4) Until a landlord has complied with subsections (1) and (2), or with subsection (3), as
the case may be,
(a) the tenant’s obligation to pay rent is suspended; and
(b) The landlord shall not require the tenant to pay rent.

Actual entry not required

(2) A tenancy agreement takes effect when the tenant is entitled to occupy the rental unit,
whether or not the tenant actually occupies it.

“No pet” provisions void

14. A provision in a tenancy agreement prohibiting the presence of animals in or about the
residential complex is void.

21. (1) A landlord shall not at any time during a tenant’s occupancy of a rental unit and before
the day on which an order evicting the tenant is executed, withhold the reasonable
supply of any vital service, care service or food that it is the landlord’s obligation to
supply under the tenancy agreement or deliberately interfere with the reasonable supply
of any vital service, care service or food.

22. A landlord shall not at any time during a tenant’s occupancy of a rental unit and before the
day on which an order evicting the tenant is executed substantially interfere with the
reasonable enjoyment of the rental unit or the residential complex in which it is located for
all usual purposes by a tenant or members of his or her household.

Page 128 of 346 Basic Training Manual Version 10 – 14 March 2017 Paragon Security ©
 Paragon Academy Basic Security Training Manual

Landlord Not to Harass, etc.:

23. A landlord shall not harass, obstruct, coerce, threaten or interfere with a tenant.

Changing locks
24. A landlord shall not alter the locking system on a door giving entry to a rental unit or
residential complex or cause the locking system to be altered during the tenant’s occupancy
of the rental unit without giving the tenant replacement keys.

Privacy
25. A landlord may enter a rental unit only in accordance with section 26 or 27.

Entry without notice, emergency, consent

26. (1) A landlord may enter a rental unit at any time without written notice,
(a) In cases of emergency; or
(b) If the tenant consents to the entry at the time of entry.
(2) A landlord may enter a rental unit without written notice to clean it if the tenancy
agreement requires the landlord to clean the rental unit at regular intervals and,
(a) The landlord enters the unit at the times specified in the tenancy agreement; or
(b) If no times are specified, the landlord enters the unit between the hours of 8 a.m.
and 8 p.m.

Page 129 of 346 Basic Training Manual Version 10 – 14 March 2017 Paragon Security ©
 Paragon Academy Basic Security Training Manual

Entry to show rental unit to prospective tenants

(3) A landlord may enter the rental unit without written notice to show the unit to
prospective tenants if,
(a) The landlord and tenant have agreed that the tenancy will be terminated or one of
them has given notice of termination to the other;
(b) The landlord enters the unit between the hours of 8 a.m. and 8 p.m.; and
(c) Before entering, the landlord informs or makes a reasonable effort to inform the
tenant of the intention to do so.

Entry with notice

27. (1) A landlord may enter a rental unit in accordance with written notice given to the tenant
at least 24 hours before the time of entry under the following circumstances:
1. To carry out a repair or replacement or do work in the rental unit.
2. To allow a potential mortgagee or insurer of the residential complex to view the
rental unit.
3. To allow a person who holds a certificate of authorization within the meaning of
the Professional Engineers Act or a certificate of practice within the meaning of the
Architects Act or another qualified person to make a physical inspection of the
rental unit to satisfy a requirement imposed under subsection 9 (4) of the
Condominium Act, 1998.
4. To carry out an inspection of the rental unit, if,
i. the inspection is for the purpose of determining whether or not the rental unit is
in a good state of repair and fit for habitation and complies with health, safety,
housing and maintenance standards, consistent with the landlord’s obligations
under subsection 20 (1) or section 161, and
ii. It is reasonable to carry out the inspection.
5. for any other reasonable reason for entry specified in the tenancy agreement.
28. No landlord shall restrict reasonable access to a residential complex by candidates for
election to any office at the federal, provincial or municipal level, or their authorized
representatives, if they are seeking access for the purpose of canvassing or distributing
election material.

Page 130 of 346 Basic Training Manual Version 10 – 14 March 2017 Paragon Security ©
 Paragon Academy Basic Security Training Manual

29. (1) a tenant or former tenant of a rental unit may apply to the Board for any of the following
orders:
1. An order determining that the landlord has breached an obligation under subsection
20 (1) or section 161.
2. An order determining that the landlord, superintendent or agent of the landlord has
withheld the reasonable supply of any vital service, care service or food that it is
the landlord’s obligation to supply under the tenancy agreement or deliberately
interfered with the reasonable supply of any vital service, care service or food.
3. An order determining that the landlord, superintendent or agent of the landlord has
substantially interfered with the reasonable enjoyment of the rental unit or
residential complex for all usual purposes by the tenant or a member of his or her
household.
4. An order determining that the landlord, superintendent or agent of the landlord has
harassed, obstructed, coerced, threatened or interfered with the tenant during the
tenant’s occupancy of the rental unit.
5. An order determining that the landlord, superintendent or agent of the landlord has
altered the locking system on a door giving entry to the rental unit or the residential
complex or caused the locking system to be altered during the tenant’s occupancy
of the rental unit without giving the tenant replacement keys.
6. An order determining that the landlord, superintendent or agent of the landlord has
illegally entered the rental unit.
36. A tenant shall not harass, obstruct, coerce, threaten or interfere with a landlord.
40. No landlord shall, without legal process, seize a tenant’s property for default in the payment
of rent or for the breach of any other obligation of the tenant.
42. (1) A landlord may dispose of property in a rental unit that a tenant has abandoned and
property of persons occupying the rental unit that is in the residential complex in which
the rental unit is located in accordance with subsections (2) and (3) if,
(a) The landlord obtains an order terminating the tenancy under section 79; or
(b) The landlord gives notice to the tenant of the rental unit and to the Board of the
landlord’s intention to dispose of the property.
(2) If the tenant has abandoned the rental unit, the landlord may dispose of any unsafe or
unhygienic items immediately.

Page 131 of 346 Basic Training Manual Version 10 – 14 March 2017 Paragon Security ©
 Paragon Academy Basic Security Training Manual

Termination for cause, damage

62. (1) a landlord may give a tenant notice of termination of the tenancy if the tenant, another
occupant of the rental unit or a person whom the tenant permits in the residential
complex wilfully or negligently causes undue damage to the rental unit or the
residential complex.
64. (1) a landlord may give a tenant notice of termination of the tenancy if the conduct of the
tenant, another occupant of the rental unit or a person permitted in the residential
complex by the tenant is such that it substantially interferes with the reasonable
enjoyment of the residential complex for all usual purposes by the landlord or another
tenant or substantially interferes with another lawful right, privilege or interest of the
landlord or another tenant.
89. (1) a landlord may apply to the Board for an order requiring a tenant to pay reasonable
costs that the landlord has incurred or will incur for the repair of or, where repairing is
not reasonable, the replacement of damaged property, if the tenant, another occupant
of the rental unit or a person whom the tenant permits in the residential complex
wilfully or negligently causes undue damage to the rental unit or the residential
complex and the tenant is in possession of the rental unit.
91. (1) if a tenant of a rental unit dies and there are no other tenants of the rental unit, the
tenancy shall be deemed to be terminated 30 days after the death of the tenant.
(2) The landlord shall, until the tenancy is terminated under subsection (1), (a) preserve
any property of a tenant who has died that is in the rental unit or the residential complex
other than property that is unsafe or unhygienic; and
(b) Afford the executor or administrator of the tenant’s estate, or if there is no executor
or administrator, a member of the tenant’s family reasonable access to the rental
unit and the residential complex for the purpose of removing the tenant’s property.

PART XI THE LANDLORD AND TENANT BOARD

168. (1) The Ontario Rental Housing Tribunal is continued under the name Landlord and
Tenant Board in English.
174. The Board has authority to hear and determine all questions of law and fact with respect
to all matters within its jurisdiction under this Act.

Page 132 of 346 Basic Training Manual Version 10 – 14 March 2017 Paragon Security ©
 Paragon Academy Basic Security Training Manual

PART XII BOARD PROCEEDINGS

187. (1) the parties to an application are the landlord and any tenants or other persons
directly affected by the application.
(2) The Board may add or remove parties as the Board considers appropriate.
207. (1) The Board may, where it otherwise has the jurisdiction, order the payment to any
given person of an amount of money up to the greater of $10,000 and the monetary
jurisdiction of the Small Claims Court.

PART XV ADMINISTRATION AND ENFORCEMENT

228. The Minister may in writing delegate to any person any power or duty vested in the
Minister under this Act, subject to the conditions set out in the delegation.
229. The Minister may appoint investigators for the purpose of investigating alleged
offences and may appoint inspectors for the purposes of sections 224 and 225. 2006, c.
17, s. 229.
230. (1) Subject to subsection (6), an inspector may, at all reasonable times and upon
producing proper identification, enter any property for the purpose of carrying out
his or her duty under this Act.

PART XVI OFFENCES

233. A person is guilty of an offence if the person knowingly,
(a) Withholds the reasonable supply of a vital service, care service or food or interferes
with the supply in contravention of section 21;
(b) Alters or causes to be altered the locking system on any door giving entry to a rental
unit or the residential complex in a manner that contravenes section 24 or 35;
(c) Restricts reasonable access to the residential complex by political candidates or
their authorized representatives in contravention of section 28;
(d) Seizes any property of the tenant in contravention of section 40;
234. A person is guilty of an offence if the person,
(a) Enters a rental unit where such entry is not permitted by section 26, 27 or 142 or
enters without first complying with the requirements of section 26, 27 or 142;
(b) Fails to make an evicted tenant’s property available for retrieval in accordance with
subsection 41 (3);

Page 133 of 346 Basic Training Manual Version 10 – 14 March 2017 Paragon Security ©
 Paragon Academy Basic Security Training Manual

(u) Obstructs or interferes with an inspector exercising a power of entry under section
230 or 231 or with an investigator exercising a power of entry under section 231;
(v) Furnishes false or misleading information in any material filed in any proceeding
under this Act or provided to the Board, an employee or official of the Board, an
inspector, an investigator, the Minister or a designate of the Minister;
Penalties
238. (1) A person, other than a corporation, who is guilty of an offence under this Act is
liable on conviction to a fine of not more than $25,000.
(2) A corporation that is guilty of an offence under this Act is liable on conviction to a fine of
not more than $100,000.

Page 134 of 346 Basic Training Manual Version 10 – 14 March 2017 Paragon Security ©
 Paragon Academy Basic Security Training Manual

4.6.7 (T.P.A.) Trespass to Property Act Ontario, R.S.O. 1990

All Security Guards should be familiar with the excerpts from the T.P.A. The phrase, “Agent of
the Occupier” under the act includes Security Guards who have been contracted by the Owner or
Agent of Private Property. We are contracted to protect life, property and minimize liability
allowing the facility to operate normally. We are responsible to ensure compliance with the rules
and regulations on the property, including laws as well as maintaining order and providing a
reasonably safe environment.
You must be familiar with the specific arrest authorities as provided in the act, below:

Section 2,
(1) Every person who is not acting under a right or authority conferred by law and who,
(a) without the express permission of the occupier, the proof of which rests on the defendant,
(Called a “reverse onus” under the law, meaning it is up to the subject to prove
otherwise)
(i) enters on premises when entry is prohibited under this Act, or
(ii) engages in an activity when the activity is prohibited under this Act; or
(b) does not leave the premises immediately after he or she is directed to do so by the occupier
of the premises or a person authorized by the occupier, is guilty of an offence and on
conviction is liable to a fine of not more than $2000.00.
The arrest authorities for trespass are included under Section 9 of the Trespass to
Property Act and allows for Security Guards to arrest, without warrant, persons
committing an offence on private property, they believe on reasonable grounds
that have committed an offence under section 2, using as much force as is
reasonable and justified under all of the circumstances and within company
policy, related to this act as long as it is not a trifling matter.

Page 135 of 346 Basic Training Manual Version 10 – 14 March 2017 Paragon Security ©
 Paragon Academy Basic Security Training Manual

Most trespass issues are best handled by means short of arrest.

You should document any breach of the “Mall (property) Code of Conduct”, describing it as
Engaging in Prohibited Activity, or Entry Where Entry is Prohibited, or Refusing to Leave after
Directed to do so, if appropriate for an arrest.
Section 9, (1) allows for a police officer or the occupier of the premises, or a person authorized by
the occupier (agent-Security Guard) to arrest without warrant any person believed on reasonable
grounds to be on the premises in contravention of section 2.
Section 9, (2) provides that you must promptly call for the assistance of a police officer and give
the person arrested into their custody.

Case Law Specific to Trespass:

R V Asante-Mensah [2003] S.C.J. No.38
This decision traced the legal meaning of “reasonable force” related to a trespass arrest
undertaken by private citizens in Ontario. The judge stated, “If the party conducting a legal arrest
has no power to employ reasonable force to effect the arrest in the face of unlawful resistance, the
law would create a situation in which the party being arrested is free to resist without any fear of
reprisal.”
As long as force used is reasonable considering all of the circumstances, then using force to
conduct the arrest is justifiable. This decision also stated clearly that many arrests are so “trivial”
in nature that they are best handled by means short of arrest.
This decision is binding on all lower courts in Ontario.

Tucker v. Cadillac Fairview Corp. [2005] O.J. No. 2921

In another decision the court document discusses justifications for trespass arrest in relation to
whether an arrest is reasonable in the first place. This decision also takes into account if a
defendant is liable in tort (owes a debt in a law suit) according to what the criminal law states is
justifiable and is not justifiable conduct.
It is once again reinforced that many trespass offences are of trivial importance and are best
handled by means short of arrest. This ruling further reinforces the concepts noted above, as the
circumstances in the Asante-Mensah case were extreme and all other attempts to secure the
subject’s compliance had failed, therefore arrest was a reasonable course of action.

Page 136 of 346 Basic Training Manual Version 10 – 14 March 2017 Paragon Security ©
 Paragon Academy Basic Security Training Manual

Reasonable force under the Trespass to Property Act considers not only what force is necessary
to accomplish the arrest, but also considering all of the circumstances was arrest a reasonable
course of action in the first place?
The judge also asked these fundamental questions regarding the tests if a trespass arrest is
reasonable or not:
1. What had the appellants (arrested persons) done to cause the Security Guards to view
them as trespassers? Were these activities the subject of a complaint?
2. Were the appellants (arrested persons) acting in a disruptive manner either before
their arrest or at the time of their arrest?
3. Had the appellants (arrested persons) previously received a trespass notice? Had they
previously been prosecuted for trespassing?
4. Is it likely that the appellants (arrested persons) would have left the mall in a
reasonable period of time had Reverend Tucker been given the opportunity to
purchase the book that he wished to buy?
5. Once the appellants (arrested persons) were apprehended by the guards, did they
offer to wait for a police officer to attend?
6. Was it necessary to arrest the appellants (arrested persons) to prevent them from
continuing their prohibited conduct (of soliciting)?
7. Was the arrest of the appellants (arrested persons) necessary to preserve relevant
evidence?

If these criteria can be met and the matter could not have been reasonably dealt with by means
short of arrest, these dialogues from Judges’ decisions provide strong precedents for trespass
arrests that are justified under the circumstances.

Phrases helpful for gaining compliance under T.P.A., versus arrest

• That is prohibited activity, or what you’re doing is prohibited
• We don’t condone that activity here, or we don’t allow that
• You are not contributing to the enjoyment of the property, or that is not a normal use of
the facilities

Page 137 of 346 Basic Training Manual Version 10 – 14 March 2017 Paragon Security ©
 Paragon Academy Basic Security Training Manual

4.6.8 Highway Traffic Act

The Highway Traffic Act is another Provincial Statute enforced by Police and specially appointed
enforcement officers on public roadways.
Certain traffic offences and driver behaviours are discouraged on private property, particularly if
they endanger others, including the driver or occupants of the offending vehicle.
Although the H.T.A. (Highway Traffic Act) is not part of the Ministry mandated curriculum, there
are certain specific sections and applications of the regulations that are vital for the security
professional.
All Security Guards operating a motor vehicle need to be properly licensed and familiar with the
rules of the road that apply to them. A security vehicle does not currently have any emergency
vehicle privileges or status and must be operated in accordance with the laws pertaining to all
drivers.
All Security Guards working as Certified Contract Officers for the purpose of enforcing Municipal
By-Laws on private property need to be familiar with certain definitions provided by the H.T.A.
• “Park” or “parking”, when prohibited, means the standing of a vehicle, whether occupied
or not, except when standing temporarily for the purpose of and while actually engaged in
loading or unloading merchandise or passengers.
• “Stand” or “standing”, when prohibited, means the halting of a vehicle, whether occupied
or not, except for the purpose of and while actually engaged in receiving or discharging
passengers.
• “Stop” or “stopping”, when prohibited, means the halting of a vehicle, even momentarily,
whether occupied or not, except when necessary to avoid conflict with other traffic or in
compliance with the directions of a police officer or of a traffic control sign or signal.
Most parking infractions on private property are considered trifling or of small importance, in
comparison to other offences and the consequences for an infraction or contravention include
issuing a certificate of offence with a set fine that may be paid outside of court. Keeping this in
mind, most Judges would frown on a Security Guard arresting a person for a parking infraction.
Extreme circumstances such as vehicles blocking a fire route in times of emergency may increase
the seriousness of a parking offence.
Unless you are certified to issue parking infraction notices by your municipality, there is little you
can do, beyond persuasion to get the public to cooperate with these rules, other than call for the
authorities for assistance.

Page 138 of 346 Basic Training Manual Version 10 – 14 March 2017 Paragon Security ©
 Paragon Academy Basic Security Training Manual

Picking up passenger for compensation prohibited without license, etc.

39.1 (1) A driver of a motor vehicle other than a bus shall not pick up a passenger for the purpose
of transporting him or her for compensation where a license, permit or authorization is
required to do so by,
(a) The Public Vehicles Act;
(b) A municipal by-law passed under Part IV of the Municipal Act, 2001;
(c) A regulation made under the Department of Transport Act (Canada); or
(d) An airport or airport authority, except under the authority of such license, permit or
authorization.

Those working on private property conducting traffic control duties or enforcing rules related to
“illegal taxis” or vehicles for hire should be aware of the best practices and consequences,
including who may enforce these as set out by the provisions.
The H.T.A. is enforceable by Police or specially appointed officers. This particular contravention
under Section 39.1 can result in serious circumstances originating from illegal taxis operating, in
the first place. There may be confrontations between the illegal drivers and licensed cabs on your
property. In addition, these vehicles are often not properly insured and the drivers may commit
other offences or engage in poor practices, resulting in injury or loss to patrons on your protected
property.
If this is occurring on your protected property, you may enforce the rules under the authorities of
the Trespass to Property Act, if allowed by your policies and appropriate. Most often the offender
would be issued a notice prohibiting entry and be asked not to return. The specific authorities are
covered in section 4.6.7

Page 139 of 346 Basic Training Manual Version 10 – 14 March 2017 Paragon Security ©
 Paragon Academy Basic Security Training Manual

4.6.9 Smoke Free Ontario Act

The Smoke Free Ontario Act sets out provisions in relation to the sale, purchase and use, etc. of
tobacco products. Security Guards may be required to assist the property manager enforcing
certain rules that the owner of the property is responsible for. Please follow site policies,
procedures and reasonable/lawful directions provided at your site.

Proprietor obligations
(6) Every proprietor of an enclosed public place or a place or area mentioned in subsection (2)
shall,
(a) Ensure compliance with this section with respect to the enclosed public place, place or
area;
(b) Give notice to each person in the enclosed public place, place or area that smoking is
prohibited in the enclosed public place, place or area in accordance with the regulations,
if any;
(c) Post any prescribed signs prohibiting smoking throughout the enclosed public place,
place or area, including washrooms, in the prescribed manner;
(d) Ensure that no ashtrays or similar equipment remain in the enclosed public place, place
or area, other than a vehicle in which the manufacturer has installed an ashtray;
(e) Ensure that a person who refuses to comply with subsection (1) or (2) does not remain
in the enclosed public place, place or area; and
(f) Ensure compliance with any other prescribed obligations.

Definition
(12) In this section, “proprietor” means the owner, operator or person in charge.

Page 140 of 346 Basic Training Manual Version 10 – 14 March 2017 Paragon Security ©
 Paragon Academy Basic Security Training Manual

Obstruction
(16) No person shall hinder, obstruct or interfere with an inspector conducting an inspection,
refuse to answer questions on matters relevant to the inspection or provide the inspector
with information, on matters relevant to the inspection that the person knows to be false or
misleading.

The Smoke Free Ontario Act, sets out the standards for restrictions and prohibitions regarding the
sale, purchase and use of tobacco products, including age limits, prescribed premises and
consequences for contraventions.

It should be apparent from the sections, above that a Security Guard could find they are in the
position of proprietor. If you are working in an establishment such as a health care facility, nursing
or veterans home or entertainment facility that has an approved designated smoking space or if
you are working at a retail establishment that sells tobacco products, it is recommended you obtain
a copy of the regulations and become familiar with the specific regulatory obligations.

As the Smoke Free Ontario Act does not have an arrest provision for contraventions yet creates an
obligation for the proprietor to cause violators to vacate the property, it is apparent this must be
accomplished by means of the Trespass to Property Act or with the assistance of an authority who
has powers to enforce the Smoke Free Ontario Act.

4.6.10 Occupier’s Liability Act, R.S.O. 1990

Under the Occupier’s Liability Act, Security Guards are defined as an occupier as they are agents
of the Owner/Property Manager and have “responsibility for and control over the condition of
premises or the activities there carried on, or control over persons allowed to enter the premises.”
This responsibility is set out by our terms of contract and the job function we fulfill.

“Premises” under the act includes not only lands and structures but water, ships and vessels, trailers
and portable structures, trains, railway cars, vehicles and aircraft except when in operation
(moving).

The Occupier’s Liability Act applies in place of the rules of common law that determine the care
the occupier is required to show in respect of dangers to persons entering on the premises and/or

Page 141 of 346 Basic Training Manual Version 10 – 14 March 2017 Paragon Security ©
 Paragon Academy Basic Security Training Manual

property they bring with them. It is the occupier’s duty to take reasonable care that in all in all
circumstances that persons entering on the premises and the property brought on the premises by
those persons are reasonably safe while there. The duty of care provided under this act applies
whether the danger is caused by the condition of the premises or by an activity carried on at the
premises.

4.7 Municipal By-Laws

The most common by law offences Security Guards may have cause to enforce are parking
violations. These may include fire routes, accessible parking spaces, loading zones and other
specially designated areas on private property.
Most Guards enforcing these municipal laws will be provided special training and certified to
enforce the laws by issuing municipal parking infraction notices when appropriate. If you do not
have special training from the municipality where you work for enforcing parking laws and you
are expected by site procedures to do so, please follow the site policies and procedures as set out
and seek further advice from your Supervisor.
The Municipal Code, an Ontario Statute delegates the authority to Municipalities to govern matters
within their jurisdiction. Much of this Code concerns rules of good government and the collection
of taxes.
Other responsibilities covered includes highways and by-laws, transportation systems, structures
such as buildings, fences and signs, animal control, etc. One area where a Security Guard may
assist with enforcement is Health, Safety and Nuisance. This section includes regulations related
to noise and so on. Another section where your attention may be required is business hours of retail
business establishments.
A Security Guard should be familiar with the Municipal Code in their particular area of
jurisdiction, considering by-laws vary to some degree from municipality to municipality. As there
is no provision for an authority for a Security Guard to enforce these by-laws in most of the
regulations, the role of a Security Guard is to observe and recognize contraventions and then to
report these to the correct authority for action, often the client if there is no immediate threat of
harm or urgency.
One area of importance for Security Guards includes occupancy limits related to rooms or
premises for public gatherings, as set out by fire code, particularly in licensed establishments.

Page 142 of 346 Basic Training Manual Version 10 – 14 March 2017 Paragon Security ©
 Paragon Academy Basic Security Training Manual

4.8 Section Summary

The Canadian system of laws and regulations is essentially laid out at three levels; Federal,
Provincial and Municipal. Although this is a simplification it serves our purposes of allowing a
Security Guard to develop an understanding of some of those laws and regulations affecting the
day to day duties performed. This section serves to introduce the participant to the sources of legal
authorities and provincial and municipal laws and regulations. The Federal Laws and Court
systems and rules of evidence including the Ontario Evidence Act will be further detailed in
Section Five (5) of this manual to assist developing a more comprehensive understanding of the
system as a whole.

Page 143 of 346 Basic Training Manual Version 10 – 14 March 2017 Paragon Security ©
 Paragon Academy Basic Security Training Manual

5.0 – Canadian Legal System

5.1 Introduction

Security Guards need to be able to accurately identify and categorize offences and how to perform
a citizen’s arrest. This section introduces the Criminal Code within the context of liability, duty of
care and lawful authority.
This manual is a guideline and an aid for study, only. Many of the sections below are simplified
for this purpose. The official statutes and case law should be consulted for exact wording and
proper understanding.
The Criminal Code is a document containing most of the Criminal Offences in Canada and comes
under the jurisdiction of Parliament, the governing body that sets our laws. It descends from other
historical documents setting out laws, particularly the British North America Act, 1867.

5.2 Canadian Criminal Court System

As shown in Figure 5.2.1, our Courts are divided into four basic levels. Lower courts are bound
by the decisions of higher courts, consistent with the principles of Case Law or “precedents.”

Figure 5.2.1

Supreme Court of Canada

Court Martial Appeals Provincial Court of Appeal Fedral Court of Appeal

Provincial/Territorial Superior Courts Federal Court Trial Division Tax Court of Canada

Military Courts Provincial Courts

Provincial Administrative Tribunals Federal Administrative Tribunals

Page 144 of 346 Basic Training Manual Version 10 – 14 March 2017 Paragon Security ©
 Paragon Academy Basic Security Training Manual

Supreme Court
The Supreme Court of Canada has nine Judges, called Justices, including the Chief Justice of
Canada. The Supreme Court makes decisions on appeals regarding questions of Law and also
provides decisions regarding the constitutionality of laws passed by Parliament.

Federal Court of Appeal

This court reviews decisions made by certain Administrative bodies such as the Immigration
Board, etc.

Tax Court of Canada

This is a specialized division of the Federal Court of Appeal.
Federal Court Trial Division
Judges of the Federal Court may sit as Judges at the Court of Appeal and vice versa, however
this is not often practiced. This court makes decisions on Federal matters such as privacy
legislation, etc.
Ontario Court of Appeal
“Appellate courts” are in place for every Province and Territory of Canada. These courts
review the decisions of Superior Courts and provide some guidance to the Territory or
Provincial Government when requested, similar to what the Supreme Court does for the
Federal Government.
The Court of Appeal for Ontario hears cases related to civil law, constitutional law, criminal
law and administrative law, such as the Private Security Investigative Services Act and other
regulations of Ontario. This is the highest level of court hearing appeals in Ontario, unless a
matter is referred to the Supreme Court of Canada.
Decisions made by the Ontario Court of Appeal are binding on all other courts in Ontario
whereas decisions made by a Court of Appeal in another province are used more as a guideline
for the lower courts as a best practice.

Page 145 of 346 Basic Training Manual Version 10 – 14 March 2017 Paragon Security ©
 Paragon Academy Basic Security Training Manual

Court of Ontario
The court of Ontario has two divisions, the Superior Court of Justice and the Ontario Court of
Justice.

Ontario Superior Court of Justice

The Superior Court of Justice was previously called the Ontario Court of Justice. The Ontario
Court of Justice was originally formed when the High Court of Justice, District Court and
Surrogate Court were combined in the 1990’s.
The Superior Court of Justice holds proceedings related to divorce, law suits not considered
“small claims” and prosecute indictable (more serious) offences, including all of those cases
heard before a Judge and jury. The Superior Court hears appeals from Summary Conviction
(less serious) cases.
The Ontario Superior Court of Justice has a special division that deals with law suits for small
claims where lawyers do not represent the parties to the claim.
This Court also reviews the decisions of lower courts and the Ontario Human Rights Tribunal,
Ontario Labour Relations Board and so on.
The Superior Court also has a branch that deals exclusively with appeals and reviews of
tribunal decisions called the Divisional Court.
Some family law cases are heard by the Ontario Court of Justice. These matters do not concern
cases where there are claims regarding the division of property, child support and custody.
Ontario Court of Justice
The Ontario Court of Justice was previously called the Ontario Court, Provincial Division.
This court is created under Ontario Provincial Statute and the jurisdiction is limited as a result.
Most of these courts were formed from previous local courts that were historically presided
over by Magistrates and Justices of the Peace, who were not necessarily educated as lawyers
but appointed. Originally these courts were managed by municipalities.
The Ontario court of justice deals with summary conviction offences and family law matters
except as noted above.

Page 146 of 346 Basic Training Manual Version 10 – 14 March 2017 Paragon Security ©
 Paragon Academy Basic Security Training Manual

Family Law
Family law concerns matters of divorce, child custody, support and so on and are generally not
a subject of concern for most day to day functions of a Security Guard. That said, it is possible
that Security Guards become involved in a domestic matter that causes a disturbance on a
protected property. In this event, it is often best to involve the Police if there is a dispute
involving custody of children and other contentious matters as the Police will be able to obtain
more clear information regarding the legality of these issues than a private security
professional.
Municipal Court System
Security Guards may be engaged in the Municipal Court System, particularly related to parking
offences for which they must give evidence on behalf of the Prosecution when an accused
indicates they intend to challenge a Certified Contract Officer’s evidence.
The Provincial Offences Act and related Regulations apply to these proceedings. These trials
will be presided over by a Justice of the Peace. The Defendant may be absent and represented
by an Agent, sometimes a lawyer but more often a Paralegal practitioner.
For parking infractions, the Defendant is always the company or person who is named as the
registered owner of the vehicle.
The prosecutor is employed as an agent of the city.

Court Procedures
Pre-court preparation
• Gather all related paperwork and evidence (reports, statements, video, Memo book)
• Review your case and your notes and take your notebook to court. Make notes about your
attendance at trial during appropriate times (not in the courtroom but discreetly in the
waiting area or a private place, such as before and after court, in your car)
• Bring your subpoena and Security Guard License
• Wear business attire
• Take a photograph of yourself in full uniform
• Check you have nothing that may be construed as a weapon on your person, including
small pocket knives, “Kubaton” key chains, handcuffs or handcuff keys
• Do not chew gum or cough candies, etc. while in the courtroom

Page 147 of 346 Basic Training Manual Version 10 – 14 March 2017 Paragon Security ©
 Paragon Academy Basic Security Training Manual

Arrive early in court

Enter the secure area passing through security – empty all metal objects from your pockets and
place them in the tray/basket provided, place your Security ID on top of your subpoena which
should be on top of your other property for the court security to scrutinize. Smile and be friendly
with court security and police but not too familiar. You are giving evidence on behalf of the Crown.
The court officials must take an impartial and nonbiased approach and follow all of their
procedures. As a Security Guard, you are not given security clearance like a court officer, Crown
attorney or Law Enforcement Officer but you are on the side of the Prosecution.
The court security must follow their protocols, screening you as they would the general public and
accused who you will be lined up with. Choose your place in line well, relative to the other persons
passing through the security screening, carefully assessing and being aware of the potential for
conflict with an accused related to your case, friends or family and the potential for persons with
a general dislike of authority. Do not chat or share your identity with those not officially connected
to the court.
Once through security
Find the court docket for your case to locate your courtroom by the name of the accused and
determine the timing and order of your trial. The docket may be posted outside of each office or
you may need to attend the secure reception area at the Crown’s office to determine the room
where your case will be tried.
Try to locate any Police Officers who are in attendance related to your case, who you may
remember from the day of the occurrence. Re-introduce yourself and ask if they need to discuss
any issue with you ahead of time.
Try to determine who the Crown Attorney for your case is and ask if they have time to see you for
a short briefing before the trial (this is unlikely unless your case is of great importance or a serious
charge(s) as they will be exceptionally busy organizing their day, resources and the related
officials, but ask anyway) – record the names of police officers present and the Crown Attorney
related to your case.
Try to identify the accused (your subject) by studying the various persons in the vicinity of the
courtroom close to the session start time. Sometimes an accused will significantly alter their
appearance through shaving facial hair, a new hairstyle and they will certainly be well dressed if
they were coached properly by a Lawyer.
After your initial preparation –wait near your room
Please note there is a low likelihood of an accused confronting you as most of these persons are
aware they are under intense scrutiny and/or they have been given strict instructions by their lawyer
who will be close by their side.

Page 148 of 346 Basic Training Manual Version 10 – 14 March 2017 Paragon Security ©
 Paragon Academy Basic Security Training Manual

Attend the waiting area, near your courtroom and be seated until the room’s doors are opened to
the public. Keep in mind that you are likely on video surveillance systems and being scrutinized
by court security and police while waiting.

Stay alert and vigilant for any persons who may create a scene by confronting you, although this
is highly unlikely. If this occurs, use polite loud and clear command language, so that police and
court security can hear you, using words such as, “Sir, your comments are inappropriate. I don’t
want to fight, move away from me now!” Ensure you stand in a defensive posture and disengage
as far as possible from this individual, going to a more secure area such as near the front where the
screening is taking place (police and court security). Report the matter to court security
immediately.

It is more likely you will be approached by the defence attorney for the accused (your subject) and
you will be asked questions about the case. Adopt a friendly and cheerful attitude, if anyone not
clearly related to the Crown’s office or police approaches you, ask who they are and/or if they
represent the accused. Do not discuss details of the case with them. Simply reply you will be happy
to discuss anything with them outside of the courtroom, except the case before the courts and tell
them you are prepared to testify in court then ask them what they thought of the “recent hockey
game” or some other non-controversial news event.

When the courtroom doors open

Enter the court and find a seat in the public area, close to the front but behind the first row. It is
preferable to sit near the police officers or on the side of the witness box.
Take off any overcoat but do not drape it over the back of your seat. Have your notebook in a suit
jacket pocket or your hand where you can easily find it. Keep your overcoat in your lap until you
get up to testify then leave it on the bench where you were sitting. Remove any non-religious
headwear (hats) or sunglasses. Ensure your eye glasses are clean to facilitate reading, if needed.
Various court officials may approach you regarding information pertaining to calling you as a
witness before the court is in session. These questions and/or directions will be related to how the
case will proceed and perhaps a briefing regarding how long it will take to bring your case forward.
Understand and be prepared for the matter to be discussed by the Crown and Defence Lawyer and
for it to be put over to another date for trial or to have a settlement reached without a trial.

Page 149 of 346 Basic Training Manual Version 10 – 14 March 2017 Paragon Security ©
 Paragon Academy Basic Security Training Manual

If you are not approached, approach the Crown or other court official before Court is in session, if
you have not met for a briefing outside when you first arrived, show them your subpoena and make
sure they are aware you are present. They will likely look at the document, comment that “that is
fine, we will call you when needed” and direct you to have a seat.
Be aware, everything you say in court, even if whispered in confidence to another may be recorded
on the official court record. Ensure you remain professional at all times.
Presiding officials
For provincial offences such as trespasses, the Court official may be a Justice of the Peace. Listen
carefully to determine this, when they are introduced upon entering the room. The correct title to
use when addressing a J.P. is “Your Worship”, “Sir” or “Ma’am”. A Justice, in some rare cases
may be called a “Magistrate.”

A Judge is called “Your Honour”, “Sir” or “Ma’am”. A Judge usually handles Criminal Matters.
In a serious Criminal Trial, at Supreme Court or a jury trial for the accused or perhaps on appeal,
you may hear the term “Supreme Court Justice or Supreme Court Judge.” The correct title for
these officials is “Your Lordship” or “Your Ladyship” or “Sir or Ma’am.” (You will be more
respected using the correct titles).
In all cases, no matter who is addressing you or who you are addressing in court, you cannot go
far wrong with “Sir’ or “Ma’am.”
Court in session
As court comes closer to the scheduled start time, you will notice less discussions and general
activity in groups at the front of the court and the various officials will begin to take their place.
The presiding official, usually a Judge or Justice of the Peace (J.P.) depending on the nature of the
case will enter from a side door, wearing robes and a court official will call out, “now rise,” or “all
rise” announce the judge or J.P. and proclaim court in session.
After the presiding official is seated, you may sit back down. Every time the judge enters or exits
the court, for example to declare a recess, you must stand.
If you need to leave the court at any time before or during the court session, do so at a time when
you are not disrupting the court, such as between cases or when summoned outside by the police
or a court official, face the judge and bow at the door, before departing. Do not allow the doors to
slam and use caution to close them quietly.

Page 150 of 346 Basic Training Manual Version 10 – 14 March 2017 Paragon Security ©
 Paragon Academy Basic Security Training Manual

When/If you are called to testify

Leave your seat and approach the front of the court, where you will be directed to the witness
stand. Stand straight and ensure you have your notebook in hand or where you can readily locate
it.
Speak loudly and clearly, without shouting and in a tone appropriate for public speaking (with
confidence) and when asked to state your name for the record, state your full name. You will be
directed to take a holy book of your choice to swear an oath. Select and hold in your hand the
Bible, Quran, etc. according to your beliefs or only if it is not allowed according to your religion
to swear an oath, ask the official if you could give an affirmation, instead.
An affirmation is a solemn declaration allowed those who “conscientiously object” to taking an
oath. This affirmation has exactly the same legal effect as swearing an oath and will be allowed if
you can explain it is forbidden due to your faith, etc. This act is an official process, compelling
you to tell the truth. You will be asked if you swear or affirm to tell the truth, whole truth and
nothing but the truth.
Answer “I do.” Ensure you are completely forthright and give testimony (your story in court) and
answer all questions completely honestly. Withholding relevant information or telling falsehoods
may result in a conviction for perjury which is punishable by imprisonment. Being evasive or
withholding facts or even showing inappropriate emotions such as being stubborn, hostile or
antagonistic may result in a conviction for “contempt of court” and is also punishable by
imprisonment.
When giving testimony, speak in the same public speaking tone. When asked questions, pause
before answering each one so the Crown has an opportunity to object, if necessary. Answer only
the question asked, without going into unnecessary details. Look at the legal representative who is
asking the questions and turn to the Judge or J.P. to answer the question. If you don’t understand
a question or require clarification, look at the Judge or J.P. and respectfully state that. If the
question cannot be answered with a simple yes or no and/or requires elaborating more detail, state
to the Judge or J.P. that fact.
Try to balance your tone so that your voice is not too mono-tone or droning on, yet not too
emotional, be like the village story teller. You need to show a good balance between these styles
and remove emotion but emphasizing important points with your voice as a tool.
Be cautious of questions that are phrased with the words, “I suggest to you.” For example, the
lawyer may say, “I suggest to you that you only arrested my client because you felt you were
insulted.” What this questions insinuates is that you were not professional and arrested the accused
because you were insulted and that your ego was offended as opposed to having grounds to arrest
the accused. The answer to this question would be, “No, that is incorrect.”

Page 151 of 346 Basic Training Manual Version 10 – 14 March 2017 Paragon Security ©
 Paragon Academy Basic Security Training Manual

Testimony
There are three phases to the evidence giving/answering questions phase:
1. Examination in chief (The Crown Attorney)
2. Cross examination (The Defence Attorney – accused counsel)
3. Redirect or re-examination (The Crown Attorney)
When you need to use your notes (you must use these to be professional), produce your memo
book before starting to give evidence/testimony in your words, when prompted to tell the court
what happened and ask, “May I use my notes to refresh my memory your Honour/Worship/Sir or
Ma’am?”
They may ask when the notes were made and you should reply, “At the time of the case in question,
Sir (Ma’am).” You may need to surrender your notebook to the Judge or Defence Counsel for
them to examine your notes.
The Crown will usually open with a few short questions, setting the stage for you to testify by
asking your relationship to the case and why you were there at the day in question, your role, etc.
Once you are introduced and they have confirmed your relationship to the event, they will usually
ask a question or direct such as, “Tell the court what happened?”
When you begin talking, in your own words, start by saying the following;
“Your honour on January 1st, 2010 (use the date of the occurrence) I was working as a uniformed
Security Guard for Paragon Security, providing service to Retail Mall (name of your site) by
contract with the property management, Green Management (name your property management
company and/or property manager’s name).
My duties required patrolling the mall and ensuring security and safety on the property,
including maintaining order, keeping the peace and enforcing rules and regulations as an agent
of the occupier (use these specific words or as close to it as you can remember).
About 2:00 pm (or whatever time the occurrence happened) I received a call for assistance
from...Or, for example, “About 2:00 pm (or whatever time the occurrence happened) I received a
call for assistance from...Then tell your story
Please note you may get asked if you have copy of the contract in which case you tell them, no
that is held by the office of your company but we do have a contract to provide service to (your
site’s name).

Page 152 of 346 Basic Training Manual Version 10 – 14 March 2017 Paragon Security ©
 Paragon Academy Basic Security Training Manual

Once all of the questions have been asked and you have been excused from the stand, say “Thank
you” bow to the Judge and step away from the stand and take your seat in court until the conclusion
of the trial. If you are told you are excused and do not have to remain, simply state you would
prefer to hear the outcome of the trial so you may submit a report, as required by your employer.
5.3 Search and Evidence

5.3.1 Ontario Evidence Act

2. This Act applies to all actions and other matters whatsoever respecting which the Legislature
has jurisdiction. R.S.O. 1990, c. E.23, s. 2.
Witnesses, not incapacitated by crime, etc.
6. No person offered as a witness in an action shall be excluded from giving evidence by reason
of any alleged incapacity from crime or interest. R.S.O. 1990, c. E.23, s. 6.
Admissibility notwithstanding interest or crime
7. Every person offered as a witness shall be admitted to give evidence although he or she has an
interest in the matter in question or in the event of the action and although he or she has been
previously convicted of a crime or offence. R.S.O. 1990, c. E.23, s. 7.
Witness not excused from answering questions tending to criminate
9. (1) A witness shall not be excused from answering any question upon the ground that the
answer may tend to criminate the witness or may tend to establish his or her liability to a
civil proceeding at the instance of the Crown or of any person or to a prosecution under
any Act of the Legislature. R.S.O. 1990, c. E.23, s. 9 (1).
Communications made during marriage
11. A person is not compellable to disclose any communication made to the person by his or her
spouse during the marriage. 2005, c. 5, s. 25 (5).
Expert evidence
12. Where it is intended by a party to examine as witnesses persons entitled, according to the law
or practice, to give opinion evidence, not more than three of such witnesses may be called upon
either side without the leave of the judge or other person presiding. R.S.O. 1990, c. E.23, s. 12.

Page 153 of 346 Basic Training Manual Version 10 – 14 March 2017 Paragon Security ©
 Paragon Academy Basic Security Training Manual

Actions by or against incapable persons, etcetera

14. An opposite or interested party in an action by or against one of the following persons shall
not obtain a verdict, judgment or decision on the party’s own evidence, unless the evidence is
corroborated by some other material evidence:
1. A person who has been found,
i. incapable of managing property under the Substitute Decisions Act, 1992 or under the
Mental Health Act,
ii. incapable of personal care under the Substitute Decisions Act, 1992, or
iii. incapable by a court in Canada or elsewhere.
2. A patient in a psychiatric facility.
3. A person who, because of a mental disorder within the meaning of the Mental Health Act,
is incapable of giving evidence. 2009, c. 33, Sched. 2, s. 32 (1).
Presumption of competency
18. (1) A person of any age is presumed to be competent to give evidence. 1995, c. 6, s. 6 (1).
Challenge, examination
(2) When a person’s competence is challenged, the judge, justice or other presiding officer
shall examine the person. 1995, c. 6, s. 6 (1).
Evidence of witness under 14
18.1 (1) When the competence of a proposed witness who is a person under the age of 14 is
challenged, the court may admit the person’s evidence if the person is able to
communicate the evidence, understands the nature of an oath or solemn affirmation
and testifies under oath or solemn affirmation. 1995, c. 6, s. 6
Corroboration not required, witness under 14
18.2 (1) Evidence given by a person under the age of 14 need not be corroborated. 1995, c.
6, s. 6 (1).

Page 154 of 346 Basic Training Manual Version 10 – 14 March 2017 Paragon Security ©
 Paragon Academy Basic Security Training Manual

Attendance of witnesses
19. A witness served in due time with a summons issued out of a court in Ontario, and paid proper
witness fees and conduct money, who makes default in obeying such summons, without any
lawful and reasonable impediment, in addition to any penalty he or she may incur as for a
contempt of court, is liable to an action on the part of the person by whom, or on whose behalf,
he or she has been summonsed for any damage that such person may sustain or be put to by
reason of such default. R.S.O. 1990, c. E.23, s. 19.
Consequences of disobedience
8. In case any person so served does not appear according to the exigency of such writ or process,
the Court out of which the same issued, may, upon proof made of the service thereof, and of
such default to the satisfaction of such Court, transmit a certificate of such default, under the
seal of the same Court, to any of Her Majesty’s Superior Courts of Law or Equity in that part
of Canada in which the person so served may reside, being out of the jurisdiction of the Court
transmitting such certificate, and the Court to which such certificate is sent, shall thereupon
proceed against and punish such person so having made default, in like manner as they might
have done if such person had neglected or refused to appear to a writ of subpoena or other
similar process issued out of such last mentioned Court.
Examination of witnesses, proof of contradictory written statements
20. A witness may be cross-examined as to previous statements made by him or her in writing, or
reduced into writing, relative to the matter in question, without the writing being shown to the
witness, but, if it is intended to contradict the witness by the writing, his or her attention shall,
before such contradictory proof is given, be called to those parts of the writing that are to be
used for the purpose of so contradicting the witness, and the judge or other person presiding at
any time during the trial or proceeding may require the production of the writing for his or her
inspection, and may thereupon make such use of it for the purposes of the trial or proceeding
as he or she thinks fit. R.S.O. 1990, c. E.23, s. 20.
Proof of previous conviction of a witness
22. (1) A witness may be asked whether he or she has been convicted of any crime, and upon being
so asked, if the witness either denies the fact or refuses to answer, the conviction may be
proved, and a certificate containing the substance and effect only, omitting the formal part,
of the charge and of the conviction, purporting to be signed by the officer having the
custody of the records of the court at which the offender was convicted, or by the deputy
of the officer, is, upon proof of the identity of the witness as such convict, sufficient
evidence of the conviction, without proof of the signature or of the official character of the
person appearing to have signed the certificate. R.S.O. 1990, c. E.23, s. 22 (1).

Page 155 of 346 Basic Training Manual Version 10 – 14 March 2017 Paragon Security ©
 Paragon Academy Basic Security Training Manual

Copies of public books or documents

32. (1) Where a book or other document is of so public a nature as to be admissible in evidence
on its mere production from the proper custody, a copy thereof or extract there from is
admissible in evidence if it is proved that it is an examined copy or extract, or that it
purports to be signed and certified as a true copy or extract by the officer to whose custody
the original was entrusted. R.S.O. 1990, c. E.23, s. 32 (1).
Books and records of banks
(2) Subject to this section, a copy of an entry in a book or record kept in a bank is in any action
to which the bank is not a party proof in the absence of evidence to the contrary of such
entry and of the matters, transactions and accounts therein recorded. R.S.O. 1990, c. E.23,
s. 33 (2); 1993, c. 27, Schedule.

Electronic records
34.1 (1) In this section, “data” means representations, in any form, of information or
concepts;
“electronic record” means data that is recorded or stored on any medium in or by a
computer system or other similar device, that can be read or perceived by a person
or a computer system or other similar device, and includes a display, print out or
other output of that data, other than a printout referred to in subsection (6);
“electronic records system” includes the computer system or other similar device
by or in which data is recorded or stored, and any procedures related to the
recording and storage of electronic records. 1999, c. 12, Schedule B, s. 7 (2).

Standards
(8) For the purpose of determining under any rule of law whether an electronic record
is admissible, evidence may be presented in respect of any standard, procedure,
usage or practice on how electronic records are to be recorded or stored, having
regard to the type of business or endeavour that used, recorded or stored the
electronic record and the nature and purpose of the electronic record. 1999, c. 12,
Schedule B, s. 7 (2).
35. (1) In this section, “business” includes every kind of business, profession, occupation, calling,
operation or activity, whether carried on for profit or otherwise;
“Record” includes any information that is recorded or stored by means of any device.
(“document”) R.S.O. 1990, c. E.23, s. 35 (1).

Page 156 of 346 Basic Training Manual Version 10 – 14 March 2017 Paragon Security ©
 Paragon Academy Basic Security Training Manual

Where business records admissible

(2) Any writing or record made of any act, transaction, occurrence or event is admissible
as evidence of such act, transaction, occurrence or event if made in the usual and ordinary
course of any business and if it was in the usual and ordinary course of such business to make
such writing or record at the time of such act, transaction, occurrence or event or within a
reasonable time thereafter, R.S.O. 1990, c. E.23, s. 35 (2).
5.3.2 Canada Evidence Act

An Act respecting witnesses and evidence

PART I
Application
2. This Part applies to all criminal proceedings and to all civil proceedings and other matters
whatever respecting which Parliament has jurisdiction.
3. A person is not incompetent to give evidence by reason of interest or crime.
Accused and spouse
4. (1) Every person charged with an offence, and, except as otherwise provided in this section,
the wife or husband, as the case may be, of the person so charged, is a competent witness
for the defence, whether the person so charged is charged solely or jointly with any other
person.
Accused and spouse
(2) The wife or husband of a person charged with an offence under subsection 136(1) of the
Youth Criminal Justice Act or with an offence under any of sections 151, 152, 153, 155 or
159, subsection 160(2) or (3), or sections 170 to 173, 179, 212, 215, 218, 271 to 273, 280
to 283, 291 to 294 or 329 of the Criminal Code, or an attempt to commit any such offence,
is a competent and compellable witness for the prosecution without the consent of the
person charged.
Communications during marriage
(3) No husband is compellable to disclose any communication made to him by his wife during
their marriage, and no wife is compellable to disclose any communication made to her by
her husband during their marriage.

Page 157 of 346 Basic Training Manual Version 10 – 14 March 2017 Paragon Security ©
 Paragon Academy Basic Security Training Manual

Offences against young persons

(4) The wife or husband of a person charged with an offence against any of sections 220, 221,
235, 236, 237, 239, 240, 266, 267, 268 or 269 of the Criminal Code where the complainant
or victim is under the age of fourteen years is a competent and compellable witness for the
prosecution without the consent of the person charged. Saving;
(5) Nothing in this section affects a case where the wife or husband of a person charged with
an offence may at common law be called as a witness without the consent of that person.
Failure to testify
(6) The failure of the person charged, or of the wife or husband of that person, to testify shall
not be made the subject of comment by the judge or by counsel for the prosecution. R.S.,
1985, c. C-5, s. 4; R.S., 1985, c. 19 (3rd Supp.), s. 17; 2002, c. 1, s. 166.
Incriminating questions
5. (1) No witness shall be excused from answering any question on the ground that the answer to
the question may tend to criminate him, or may tend to establish his liability to a civil
proceeding at the instance of the Crown or of any person.
Answer not admissible against witness
(2) Where with respect to any question a witness objects to answer on the ground that his
answer may tend to criminate him, or may tend to establish his liability to a civil proceeding
at the instance of the Crown or of any person, and if but for this Act, or the Act of any
provincial legislature, the witness would therefore have been excused from answering the
question, then although the witness is by reason of this Act or the provincial Act compelled
to answer, the answer so given shall not be used or admissible in evidence against him in
any criminal trial or other criminal proceeding against him thereafter taking place, other
than a prosecution for perjury in the giving of that evidence or for the giving of
contradictory evidence.
6.1 For greater certainty, a witness may give evidence as to the identity of an accused whom
the witness is able to identify visually or in any other sensory manner. 1998, c. 9, s. 1.
Expert witnesses
7. Where, in any trial or other proceeding, criminal or civil, it is intended by the prosecution or
the defence, or by any party, to examine as witnesses professional or other experts entitled
according to the law or practice to give opinion evidence, not more than five of such witnesses
may be called on either side without the leave of the court or judge or person presiding. R.S.,
c. E-10, s. 7.

Page 158 of 346 Basic Training Manual Version 10 – 14 March 2017 Paragon Security ©
 Paragon Academy Basic Security Training Manual

Handwriting comparison
8. Comparison of a disputed writing with any writing proved to the satisfaction of the court to be
genuine shall be permitted to be made by witnesses, and such writings, and the evidence of
witnesses respecting those writings, may be submitted to the court and jury as proof of the
genuineness or otherwise of the writing in dispute. R.S., c. E-10, s. 8.
Adverse witnesses
9. (1) A party producing a witness shall not be allowed to impeach his credit by general evidence
of bad character, but if the witness, in the opinion of the court, proves adverse, the party
may contradict him by other evidence, or, by leave of the court, may prove that the witness
made at other times a statement inconsistent with his present testimony, but before the last
mentioned proof can be given the circumstances of the supposed statement, sufficient to
designate the particular occasion, shall be mentioned to the witness, and he shall be asked
whether or not he did make the statement.
Previous statements by witness not proved adverse
(2) Where the party producing a witness alleges that the witness made at other times a
statement in writing, reduced to writing, or recorded on audio tape or video tape or
otherwise, inconsistent with the witness’ present testimony, the court may, without proof
that the witness is adverse, grant leave to that party to cross-examine the witness as to the
statement and the court may consider the cross-examination in determining whether in the
opinion of the court the witness is adverse. R.S., 1985, c. C-5, s. 9; 1994, c. 44, s. 85.
Cross-examination as to previous statements
10. (1) On any trial a witness may be cross-examined as to previous statements that the witness
made in writing, or that have been reduced to writing, or recorded on audio tape or video
tape or otherwise, relative to the subject-matter of the case, without the writing being
shown to the witness or the witness being given the opportunity to listen to the audio tape
or view the video tape or otherwise take cognizance of the statements, but, if it is intended
to contradict the witness, the witness’ attention must, before the contradictory proof can be
given, be called to those parts of the statement that are to be used for the purpose of so
contradicting the witness, and the judge, at any time during the trial, may require the
production of the writing or tape or other medium for inspection, and thereupon make such
use of it for the purposes of the trial as the judge thinks fit.

Page 159 of 346 Basic Training Manual Version 10 – 14 March 2017 Paragon Security ©
 Paragon Academy Basic Security Training Manual

Examination as to previous convictions

12. (1) A witness may be questioned as to whether the witness has been convicted of any offence,
excluding any offence designated as a contravention under the Contraventions Act, but
including such an offence where the conviction was entered after a trial on an indictment.
Proof of previous convictions
(1.1) If the witness either denies the fact or refuses to answer, the opposite party may
prove the conviction.

Solemn affirmation by witness instead of oath

14. (1) A person may, instead of taking an oath, make the following solemn affirmation:
I solemnly affirm that the evidence to be given by me shall be the truth, the whole truth
and nothing but the truth.
Effect
(2) Where a person makes a solemn affirmation in accordance with subsection (1), his
evidence shall be taken and have the same effect as if taken under oath. R.S., 1985, c. C-5,
s. 14; 1994, c. 44, s. 87.
(2) Any witness whose evidence is admitted or who makes a solemn affirmation under this
section or section 14 is liable to indictment and punishment for perjury in all respects as if
he had been sworn. R.S., 1985, c. C-5, s. 15; 1994, c. 44, s. 88.
Person under fourteen years of age
16.1 (1) A person under fourteen years of age is presumed to have the capacity to testify.
Evidence shall be received
(3) The evidence of a proposed witness under fourteen years of age shall be received
if they are able to understand and respond to questions.

Page 160 of 346 Basic Training Manual Version 10 – 14 March 2017 Paragon Security ©
 Paragon Academy Basic Security Training Manual

Documentary Evidence
Business records to be admitted in evidence
30. (1) Where oral evidence in respect of a matter would be admissible in a legal proceeding, a
record made in the usual and ordinary course of business that contains information in
respect of that matter is admissible in evidence under this section in the legal proceeding
on production of the record.
Inference where information not in business record
(2) Where a record made in the usual and ordinary course of business does not contain
information in respect of a matter the occurrence or existence of which might reasonably
be expected to be recorded in that record, the court may on production of the record admit
the record for the purpose of establishing that fact and may draw the inference that the
matter did not occur or exist.
Authentication of electronic documents
31.1 Any person seeking to admit an electronic document as evidence has the burden of
proving its authenticity by evidence capable of supporting a finding that the electronic
document is that which it is purported to be. 2000, c. 5, s. 56.
Application of best evidence rule — electronic documents
31.2 (1) The best evidence rule in respect of an electronic document is satisfied
(a) on proof of the integrity of the electronic documents system by or in which the
electronic document was recorded or stored; or
(b) if an evidentiary presumption established under section 31.4 applies.
Printouts
(2) Despite subsection (1), in the absence of evidence to the contrary, an electronic
document in the form of a printout satisfies the best evidence rule if the printout
has been manifestly or consistently acted on, relied on or used as a record of the
information recorded or stored in the printout. 2000, c. 5, s. 56.

Page 161 of 346 Basic Training Manual Version 10 – 14 March 2017 Paragon Security ©
 Paragon Academy Basic Security Training Manual

Presumption of integrity
31.3 For the purposes of subsection 31.2(1), in the absence of evidence to the contrary, the
integrity of an electronic documents system by or in which an electronic document is
recorded or stored is proven
(a) by evidence capable of supporting a finding that at all material times the computer
system or other similar device used by the electronic documents system was
operating properly or, if it was not, the fact of its not operating properly did not
affect the integrity of the electronic document and there are no other reasonable
grounds to doubt the integrity of the electronic documents system;
(b) if it is established that the electronic document was recorded or stored by a party
who is adverse in interest to the party seeking to introduce it; or
(c) if it is established that the electronic document was recorded or stored in the usual
and ordinary course of business by a person who is not a party and who did not
record or store it under the control of the party seeking to introduce it. 2000, c. 5,
s. 56.
Standards may be considered
31.5 For the purpose of determining under any rule of law whether an electronic document
is admissible, evidence may be presented in respect of any standard, procedure, usage
or practice concerning the manner in which electronic documents are to be recorded or
stored, having regard to the type of business, enterprise or endeavour that used,
recorded or stored the electronic document and the nature and purpose of the electronic
document.

Page 162 of 346 Basic Training Manual Version 10 – 14 March 2017 Paragon Security ©
 Paragon Academy Basic Security Training Manual

How applicable
40. In all proceedings over which Parliament has legislative authority, the laws of evidence in
force in the province in which those proceedings are taken, including the laws of proof of
service of any warrant, summons, subpoena or other document, subject to this Act and other
Acts of Parliament, apply to those proceedings. R.S., c. E-10, s. 37.
46. (1) If, on an application for that purpose, it is made to appear to any court or judge that any
court or tribunal outside Canada, before which any civil, commercial or criminal matter is
pending, is desirous of obtaining the testimony in relation to that matter of a party or
witness within the jurisdiction of the first mentioned court, of the court to which the judge
belongs or of the judge, the court or judge may, in its or their discretion, order the
examination on oath on interrogatories, or otherwise, before any person or persons named
in the order, of that party or witness accordingly, and by the same or any subsequent order
may command the attendance of that party or witness for the purpose of being examined,
and for the production of any writings or other documents mentioned in the order and of
any other writings or documents relating to the matter in question that are in the possession
or power of that party or witness.
Exclusion of evidence – exclusionary rule
The exclusionary holds that evidence collected that is not legally obtained according to the
founding principles of law is not admitted into evidence or “excluded” from the evidence at trial.
There are several examples of this principle in various statutes and cases, creating precedents for
decisions.
The Charter of Rights and Freedoms protects people from unreasonable search and seizure under
section eight (8) as previously mentioned in this manual. There are other examples of this principle
under the Case Law section of this manual.
Physical evidence
Physical evidence is an object or part of an object offered as proof of a crime. Physical evidence
could include fingerprints, stolen items, weapons, shell casings, blood stains or DNA, etc.

Page 163 of 346 Basic Training Manual Version 10 – 14 March 2017 Paragon Security ©
 Paragon Academy Basic Security Training Manual

Forensic Evidence
Forensic science is an academic or scientific discipline that pertains to investigations and the legal
system. This includes a method of determining facts from various types of evidence uncovered by
the method.
There are various types of forensic evidence including hand writing analysis, blood stain pattern
interpretation, firearms and ammunition identification, fingerprint analysis, trace evidence such as
fibres, blood type matching, DNA analysis, tool mark identification, skid mark analysis, document
analysis, computer forensics, pathology (study of disease), entomology (study of insects), etc.
The basic premise is that the physical environment and all things, including humans interact with
one another so that evidence of an event is always present, no matter how minute or difficult to
identify. Once this interaction is identified and proven by scientific method, inferences of what
occurred can be objectively shown, with a level of “moral certainty” that the events as assessed by
an expert occurred.
Security Guards need to be mindful of the related issues as forensic evidence that is valuable can
easily be contaminated and rendered inaccurate or useless if one is not careful.
Authentication
Authentication is a process that proves physical evidence is genuine and not tampered or forged
and so on. The continuity of evidence or “chain of custody” is directly related to this concept which
is a method to show who handled physical evidence and how it was handled by each person who
has come into contact with it from the time it was left at a crime scene until it is produced for
inspection in a court of law.
Burden of proof
The burden of proof or “onus probandi,” from the Latin is the obligation of the prosecution
(complainant) or defence (respondent) presenting evidence to reasonably demonstrate to a court
that evidence presented is probably true.
In most cases, the burden lies with the person or entity that makes the complaint or brings charges
against another. In some specific circumstances there is a “reverse onus” or the burden is on the
person who is accused or charged to prove the fact alleged is not so. A good example of this reverse
onus in law would be the Trespass to Property Act of Ontario.
Essentially this means that in most cases the burden is on the accuser or prosecutor to persuade the
trier of fact beyond a reasonable doubt that the case is true, whereas there is no obligation for the
accused to prove innocence.
The evidentiary burden or burden of leading evidence holds that certain evidence submitted by
one side or the other in court is accepted at face value, creating a burden on the other side to prove
the related assumption is not true.

Page 164 of 346 Basic Training Manual Version 10 – 14 March 2017 Paragon Security ©
 Paragon Academy Basic Security Training Manual

Standard of proof
Standard of proof is the burden of proof to convince a court that a given argument is true. The
standard of proof is applied according to a scale or hierarchy according to the rules of law under a
given condition or circumstance.
Beyond a reasonable doubt – This is the concept that the Crown must prove that a set of facts and
circumstances is presented that leaves no doubt in the mind of an ordinary, prudent and cautious
person (reasonable, average person) that an accused is guilty of the offence.
Preponderance of evidence or balance of probabilities – this concept is applied in civil cases and
suggests a set of facts or circumstances is more likely to be true than not true.
Clear and convincing evidence –this concept often used in the United States of America holds that
the party who has the burden of proof must convince the court that a set of facts or circumstances
has a higher likelihood of being true than not true.
Reasonable and probable grounds – Reasonable grounds is a set of facts and circumstances that
would lead an ordinary, prudent and cautious person (average, reasonable person) to have a strong
belief in a matter, beyond mere suspicion. In other words the average and reasonable person would
believe the circumstances with faith.
Reasonable doubt can be described as doubt based on reason and common sense that leaves the
decider of fact fully satisfied or entirely convinced of a matter. In England, the case of R V Majid,
2009 [EWCA Crime 2563] indicated the appeal court preferred the term “sure the defendant is
guilty” rather than “satisfied beyond all reasonable doubt” in the lower court Judge’s instructions
to the jury.
Reasonable suspicion is a concept closely tied to “articulable cause” or a constellation of
objectively discernible facts that would give a person reasonable cause to believe a person is
clearly implicated in a crime.
Air of reality – a test that asks if a defence case has a chance to succeed if all of the facts claimed
by the defendant are assumed to be true

Page 165 of 346 Basic Training Manual Version 10 – 14 March 2017 Paragon Security ©
 Paragon Academy Basic Security Training Manual

Best evidence rule

In Canada and under current practices, this rule is applied only to documentary evidence.
This rule has roots in the common law of England and is cited in both the courts of the United
States of America and Canada. The case referred to is Omychund V Barker from 1745. Lord
Harwicke, an English Judge is quoted as stating, that evidence would not be allowed unless it was
“the best that the nature of the case will allow.”
Best evidence rules are often inter-related to the authentication rule.
The basic concept is that the best evidence is the original, if available and if it is not and all
originals have been destroyed, then a copy is admissible if it is a true reflection of the original
and/or the original was destroyed by the opposing side if this was done in bad faith. Copies would
normally be supported by testimony as to the accuracy reflecting the original.
This was an exclusionary principle, originally and now is exercised in as much if an original is
available, one must produce this in court, not copy it for presentation.
Documentary Evidence
Documentary evidence includes a formal legal book, statutes, a ruling of parliament and so on that
is compiled in relation to the procedure of government and law. Documentary evidence, according
to the Canada Evidence Act and Ontario Evidence Act is also specifically banking records and
formal business records kept in accordance with normal business practices. This would include
records such as your evidence notebook or memo book and any other records or reports produced
day to day.
Testimony Evidence
Testimony, as used in this meaning, is the statement or declaration of a witness under oath or under
affirmation. Testimony may include anecdotal stories, particularly in civil cases. Testimony is
subject to the tests of questioning and corroboration (supported by other like evidence).
Testimony may also be substantiated by forensic evidence, circumstantial evidence that meets the
criteria set out by law and video tapes, etc.
Testimony is often weighted by the courts according to the merits of the evidence given as well as
decisions based on the criteria and tests as set out above.
Circumstantial Evidence
Circumstantial evidence is defined as proof of facts as evidence from which other facts are inferred
or derived by reasoning. This type of evidence indirectly proves a fact and requires the court to
deduce the conclusions.

Page 166 of 346 Basic Training Manual Version 10 – 14 March 2017 Paragon Security ©
 Paragon Academy Basic Security Training Manual

Direct Evidence
As opposed to circumstantial evidence, direct evidence supports an assertion of truth such as when
a witness testifies they see a person commit a crime with their own eyes, versus someone such as
an expert testifying they are morally certain a person committed a crime based on forensic evidence
like DNA.
Witnesses – including an expert witness
For the purposes of the Canadian Legal System, a witness is a person who personally sees or
perceives a crime or violation and gives testimony in court or swears an affidavit or other legal
statement. This person has firsthand knowledge of the crime.
Expert witnesses are generally recognized by the court after it is demonstrated they have a level
of expertise in relation to a matter before the courts. This could be educated persons in fields of
study such as science, forensic science, law or use of force, etc.
Continuity of evidence
There is a concept in law known as chain of custody which means that measures are taken to show
that an object, artefact or other piece of physical evidence related to a case, such as a weapon or
counterfeit bank note, etc. have been handled correctly and not been tampered with at every step
of the process from discovery in public to the time it is presented in court.
Special procedures such as handling, storage and marking of the evidence, as well as proper
documentation are required in order for the evidence to be accepted at trial. The way a Security
Guard handles physical evidence or secures a crime scene can have serious repercussions as a
result.
You must take the utmost care to preserve evidence of crimes at all times.

5.3.3 Securing a crime, accident or medical scene

Your first priority is protection of life. If it is safe to enter the scene and others require aid, provide
aid and/or if there is a life threatening condition evacuate them from the scene then follow the
following protocols:
Evidence can often be “tainted” by others entering the area or other factors such as weather,
particularly if it is outdoors. If Security Guards are first on the scene, you must take special
precautions to preserve as much evidence as possible until the authorities arrive and assume
command.

Page 167 of 346 Basic Training Manual Version 10 – 14 March 2017 Paragon Security ©
 Paragon Academy Basic Security Training Manual

This means securing the area and not allowing unauthorized person such as curious bystanders or
those related to the site but not directly involved to indiscriminately enter an area. The use of
caution tape may be required as well as setting up a static post and exercising your authority under
trespass regulations.
Ensure you document the way a piece of evidence is handled, by whom and who enters and leaves
a crime scene, the times, purpose and specific routes used. Try and limit the path used to one or
two, only and communicate this route to the Police when they arrive.
Establish the boundaries of the crime scene. Determine the outer and inner perimeters and record
this information. Clearly mark and document these areas and gather witnesses, if any. Record their
contact information and ask them to remain and wait for the Police.
Record all conditions and any visible evidence, in detail. Record the numbers of people, vehicles,
details and all times. Draw pictures and diagrams in your memo book for later reference and take
photographs if a camera is available. Ensure you photograph close up, wide angle and from all
various angles and directions to get an accurate record. Record any statements and ask witnesses
who make statements to sign your memo book at the time they do so.

Page 168 of 346 Basic Training Manual Version 10 – 14 March 2017 Paragon Security ©
 Paragon Academy Basic Security Training Manual

5.3.4 Case Law - Searches

R v Lerke Court of Queen’s Bench (Appeal), Alberta 1986 01 27, Docket 8403-8045A
An Alberta case from their Court of Queen’s Bench (court of appeal) is used as a guideline for
reasonable decisions by Ontario Courts because the related questions of law have not yet been
decided at the Supreme Court level.
The relevant facts in this decision included the exclusion of evidence following a citizen’s trespass
arrest due to a violation of Charter rights against unreasonable search and seizure. In the judge’s
view, although the arrest was made by a citizen, the function of arrest is a function of government
so the Charter applies.
This conclusion was based on consideration of the powers provided by Criminal and Trespass
(Petty Trespass Act, Alberta) statutes as well as the common law origins. The judge cites an
historical study that states, “The foundation of the whole system of criminal procedure was the
prerogative of keeping the peace, which is as old as the monarchy itself, and which was, as it still
is, embodied in the expression of ‘The King’s Peace’, the legal name of the normal state of
society.”
He said searches must be reasonable and not a fishing expedition. The factors considered for
justification include urgency to the reason for search such as protection of one’s self and to prevent
access to implements of escape whereas the search to secure evidence is not as urgent and becomes
questionable.
There was lack of a nexus or connection between the reasons for arrest (arrest for trespassing by
entering where prohibited) and reasons for search (looking for identification) as the arresting
citizen did not need to confirm the subject’s identity to support the grounds for arrest.

Cloutier v Langlois [1990] S.C.R. 158

In the Supreme Court the writing judge considered the common law power of search incident to
arrest and reviewed British, American and Canadian case studies and concluded:
It seems beyond question that the common law as recognized and developed in Canada holds that
the police have a power to search a lawfully arrested person and to seize anything in his or her
possession or immediate surroundings to guarantee the safety of the police and the accused,
prevent the prisoner’s escape or provide evidence against him.

Page 169 of 346 Basic Training Manual Version 10 – 14 March 2017 Paragon Security ©
 Paragon Academy Basic Security Training Manual

These rulings reassert the common law rights of all citizens to search for reasons of urgency
such as to ensure safety and prevent escape as long as the arrest and search are both legal
and reasonable.

R v Collins [1987] S.C.J. No. 15

In this case Justice Lamer gave guidance to trial judges on when a search is reasonable and when
to exclude the evidence.
A search is reasonable within the meaning of section 8 of the Charter where:
1. It is authorized by law
2. The law itself is reasonable, and
3. The search is conducted in a reasonable manner
All three of these conditions must be met in order for the justifications to pass the tests.
Searches are not reasonable if they are based on mere suspicion.
In addition, any search made without warrant is automatically presumed unreasonable and the onus
is on the Crown to show, on the balance of probabilities that it was reasonable.

In other words you have to be able to say why and justify to the court why you searched a
person in order for evidence to be admitted. If you cannot then any evidence uncovered could
be excluded leaving you vulnerable to counter charges or a law suit.

Page 170 of 346 Basic Training Manual Version 10 – 14 March 2017 Paragon Security ©
 Paragon Academy Basic Security Training Manual

5.4 Criminal Law - Legal Definitions

The official statutes and case law should be consulted for exact wording and proper understanding.
The Criminal Code is a document containing most of the Criminal Offences in Canada and comes
under the jurisdiction of Parliament, the governing body that sets our laws. It descends from other
historical documents setting out laws, particularly the British North America Act, 1867.
Indictable Offence
An indictable offence is a more serious or grave offence under the law. An indictment is a formal
accusation which initiates a criminal case and provides the accused an opportunity to be tried by a
jury in addition to a judge. Indictable offences provide for longer sentences, over two years
duration to be served in penitentiaries in the event of convictions versus a jail facility.
Penitentiaries are operated by the federal government in Canada.
Summary Conviction Offences
In Canada, as elsewhere, summary conviction offences are less serious offences that are punishable
by shorter prison sentences, under two years and sometimes fines or a combination of the two. The
maximum punishment for most of the criminal code summary conviction offences is six months
or a maximum fine of $5000.00 or both unless specified as longer.
Section 786 of the Criminal Code has a statute prohibiting prosecution for summary conviction
offences more than six months after the offence was committed unless the prosecutor and
defendant agree otherwise.
Dual/Hybrid Offence
Dual procedure or Hybrid offences could be tried as more serious (indictable) or less serious
(summary conviction offence) and the prosecutor has the option to elect based on the
circumstances of the case.
The main differences include the sentencing and the persons presiding over the trial and hearing
evidence with a view to selecting the verdict (Judge, Magistrate, Justice, or Judge and Jury).

Page 171 of 346 Basic Training Manual Version 10 – 14 March 2017 Paragon Security ©
 Paragon Academy Basic Security Training Manual

Mens Rea
“A guilty mind” – this is the concept of forming an intent to commit an illegal act. These offences
could include a white collar crime or fraud offence whereby the ability to find committing is made
more difficult by the requirement to prove the intent. These types of offences are normally reserved
for the police to arrest. In some cases a Loss Prevention person may arrest for fraud but for
uniformed security this is an area to avoid.

Actus Reus
“The guilty act”: this is the concept that there is an act in a crime. An act could be a voluntary or
involuntary movement, commission (did something), omission (failed to do something) or
possession.
Legislation specifically criminalizes and omission through statute; or a duty that would normally
be expected was omitted and caused injury, an actus reus has occurred.

Reasonable Grounds Offences

There are a number of offences under the Criminal Code that the authorization for arrest requires
reasonable grounds. Police may arrest for these offences, not Security Guards as, generally we
must find committing and know the person has committed an offence.

There are two common reasonable grounds offences that Security Guards may encounter:
1. Fraud
A fraud is an intentional deception for personal gain or that causes injury to another. Fraud
can include forgery, etc. It is the deception and the mens rea aspect of this crime that makes
it exceptionally difficult for security professionals without specialized training and job
functions such as Loss Prevention Personnel to find a person committing this offence and
even then it is only under very specific circumstances.

In the event you are employed as a Loss Prevention Professional in a retail store where
your primary function is to detect theft, arrest shoplifters and recover property, you may
find that you initiate an arrest for fraud. The specific circumstances for this offence will be
when a person enters the store and switches the price tag on an item for a price tag from a
lower priced item. The intent in this case is certainly easier to prove in a court of law.

Page 172 of 346 Basic Training Manual Version 10 – 14 March 2017 Paragon Security ©
 Paragon Academy Basic Security Training Manual

Drug offences
It is very difficult, if not impossible for persons without formal training in drug identification to
know that a suspicious substance is an illicit substance so that it would meet the test of reasonable
grounds. Even then, Security Guards do not have the authority to arrest for reasonable grounds so
we do not arrest for drug offences.
We can, however discourage this suspicious activity under the authority of the Trespass to Property
Act.

Reasonable Grounds
Reasonable Grounds, also called Reasonable and Probable Grounds (RPG) is defined as a set of
facts or circumstances that would lead an ordinary, prudent and cautious person to have a strong
belief, beyond mere suspicion. In effect, the “Average Canadian” would believe or do the same
thing under the same circumstances.

Arrest
An arrest may be described as legally taking a person into custody and depriving them of their
liberty. This concept includes apprehending and restraining a person. Police have the authority to
conduct an investigative detention whereas a private citizen, including a Security Guard does not.
In other words, if a Security Guard detains a person and the person being detained believes they
do not have a choice to leave due to the words or actions of the Security Guard suggesting that
they have the authority to keep the subject there it would be deemed an arrest under the law.
In order for a citizen’s arrest to be legal, the Security Guard must have legal authority to arrest the
person set out clearly in the law. This may include a criminal code offence or a trespass offence in
Ontario.

Page 173 of 346 Basic Training Manual Version 10 – 14 March 2017 Paragon Security ©
 Paragon Academy Basic Security Training Manual

The Security Guard must also follow the five steps of arrest in order for the arrest to be considered
legal, as noted below.

1. Identify yourself (as a person with authority to arrest by using words such as
“Security” whether in uniform or not)
2. a) Tell the person they are under arrest b) Tell them why they are under arrest
3. Take physical control of the person (by not allowing them to leave)
4. Read the arrested person their rights to counsel
5. Turn the arrested person over to a peace officer (Criminal Code) or Police Officer
(Trespass to Property Act) forthwith

Please note it is also a best practice to ensure the person understands the rights as read. A caution
may also be read to an adult. A young person’s rights to counsel are different and separate. The
young person has the right to have a reasonable adult of their choosing present during an arrest.
The caution is not separate from the rights for a young person but included. The young person’s
rights ask the question, “Do you understand?” several times within the rights.

Page 174 of 346 Basic Training Manual Version 10 – 14 March 2017 Paragon Security ©
 Paragon Academy Basic Security Training Manual

5.5 Criminal Code Organization and Offences – Overview

The following section is intended to provide a quick overview of the layout of the Criminal Code
and some of the offences Security Professionals may experience. This is not an all-encompassing
description and by no means replaces the Criminal Code or professionally published
interpretations.
This simply serves as a quick reference guide, particularly for those that have not studied the
Criminal Code previously. This will familiarize you to properly undertake your duties related to
enforcement of rules, gaining compliance by persuasion and as a last resort using reasonable force
when authorized.
Various common offences that Security Guards may come across are in bold, italic letters for your
awareness.

Part II - Offences against Public Order

Treason & other offences against the Crown (government)
Unlawful Assemblies & Riots, sections 63-69, Duels Section 71
Forcible Entry Section 72, 73
Piracy, Air & Maritime Safety, Dangerous Substances (explosives), Prize Fights

Part II.1 Terrorism

Although not currently a concern in most private security settings and applications in Ontario,
circumstances such as increased threats against organizations or government may increase our
concerns with this part. At facilities with vulnerabilities and those deemed higher risk there may
be some commentary attached to the post orders that you should review.

Part III – Firearms and other weapons

Employees need to review the specific sections of the Criminal Code under this part and be aware
of safety protocols contained in post orders and other Corporate Policy related to safety of persons.
Part IV – Offences against the Administration of Law and Justice
This part is considered unlikely to be relevant to the day to day duties of Security Guards.

Page 175 of 346 Basic Training Manual Version 10 – 14 March 2017 Paragon Security ©
 Paragon Academy Basic Security Training Manual

Part V – Sexual Offences, Public Morals and Disorderly Conduct

175. (1) Everyone who:
(a) not being in a dwelling-house, causes a disturbance in or near a public place,
(i) by fighting, screaming, shouting, swearing, singing or using insulting or
obscene language,
(ii) by being drunk, or
(iii) by impeding or molesting other persons,
(b) openly exposes or exhibits an indecent exhibition in a public place,
(c) loiters in a public place and in any way obstructs persons who are in that place, or
(d) disturbs the peace and quiet of the occupants of a dwelling-house by discharging
firearms or by other disorderly conduct in a public place or who, not being an
occupant of a dwelling-house comprised in a particular building or structure,
disturbs the peace and quiet of the occupants of a dwelling-house comprised in the
building or structure by discharging firearms or by other disorderly conduct in any
part of a building or structure to which, at the time of such conduct, the occupants
of two or more dwelling-houses comprised in the building or structure have access
as of right or by invitation, express or implied, is guilty of an offence punishable
on summary conviction.

Part VI – Invasion of Privacy

Part VII – Disorderly Houses, Gaming & Betting

(Includes Bawdy Houses and some prostitution offences)

Page 176 of 346 Basic Training Manual Version 10 – 14 March 2017 Paragon Security ©
 Paragon Academy Basic Security Training Manual

Part VIII – Offences against the Person and Reputation

• Criminal Negligence
• Homicide (Murder, Manslaughter, Infanticide, Suicide, Neglect in Child Birth)
• Bodily Harm and Acts and Omissions Causing Danger to the Person
(Firearms discharge, Administering noxious thing, Traps)
(Motor Vehicles, Vessels and Aircraft)
• Dangerous Operation of Motor Vehicle Section 249(1)
Every one commits an offence who, operates
(a) a motor vehicle in a manner that is dangerous to the public, having regard to all the
circumstances, including the nature, condition and use of the place at which the motor
vehicle is being operated and the amount of traffic that at the time is or might reasonably
be expected to be at that place;
• Fail to Stop at Scene of an Accident
• Impairment by Alcohol or Drug
• Criminal Harassment
• Assaults (Uttering threats, Application of force or means, Weapons & begging or
impeding, With Weapon or Bodily Harm, Aggravated, Assault Peace Officer, Sexual, Etc.)
• Kidnapping, Trafficking in Persons, Taking Hostages
• Abortion
• Marriages & Conjugal Rights
• Blasphemy & Defamatory Libel, Hate Propaganda (in the form of Graffiti)

Part IX – Offences against Rights of Property

• Theft, Taking Motor Vehicles without consent, Fraud, Forgery, False Pretences, Credit
Card, Computer Use Without Consent, Robbery & Extortion, Criminal Interest Rates
(Loan Sharks), Breaking & Entering, Home Invasion, Possession of Property Obtained by
Crime,
Part X – Fraudulent Transactions Relating to Contracts and Trade
Part XI – Wilful and Forbidden Acts in Respect of Certain Property

Page 177 of 346 Basic Training Manual Version 10 – 14 March 2017 Paragon Security ©
 Paragon Academy Basic Security Training Manual

• Mischief, Planting Explosives, Protected Persons & Property (Diplomats and Consul
staffs), Unauthorized Video Recording (of a movie in a theatre), Arson, False Alarm of
Fire, Killing/maiming/injuring Animals, Cruelty to Animals, Baiting Animals (Arranged
Fights),
Part XII – Offences Related to Currency
Counterfeit, etc.
Part XII.1 – Illicit Drugs
Please note these offences are reasonable grounds offences dealt with by the police. These
concerns are normally addressed under the Trespass to Property Act by Security Guards. .
Part XII.2 – Proceeds of Crime
Part XIII-Attempts-Conspiracies-Accessories
Part XIV, XV - Jurisdiction & Admin, DNA Evidence, Sex Offenders Definitions and
Registration
Part XVI – Compelling Appearance (Includes arrest without warrant)
Security Professionals may need to be familiar with the legal language and descriptions/meanings
of some of these terms to clearly communicate with police officials when required.
• Appearance Notice
• Promise to Appear
• Recognizance
• Fail to Appear
• Summons (Accused)
• Subpoena (Witness)
• (Section 494, Section 495 are contained in Part XVI)
• Information
• Warrant Section 504 – Information – Anyone – Indictable
• Section 515 - Show Cause
• Detaining of Persons and Procuring Attendance in Court
• Warrants & Powers of Entry
Court Proceedings, Jurisdictions & Offences against the courts

Page 178 of 346 Basic Training Manual Version 10 – 14 March 2017 Paragon Security ©
 Paragon Academy Basic Security Training Manual

5.6 Criminal Code – Specific Legal Authorities

As of March 11th, 2013 the Federal Government made an order for Bill C26, the Citizen’s Arrest
and Self Defence Act coming into force. Under the new regulations eight sections (including sub-
sections) of the Criminal Code were simplified under two new sections. The previous sections that
applied and that were removed by law included:

Section 34 - Self defence against unprovoked assault

Section 35 - Self defence in case of aggression
Section 36 - Provocation
Section 37 - Preventing assault
Section 38 - Defence of personal property
Section 39 - Defence with claim of right
Section 40 - Defence of dwelling
Section 41 - Defence of house or real property

In addition amendments were made to Section 494, Arrest without warrant by any person, the
details of which are included, below in the relevant section.

Section 25 Protection for Those Acting Under Authority

This section allows us to use reasonable force for acting in administration or enforcement of the
law.

Section 26 Excessive Force

Everyone who uses force under the law is responsible for specifically what was done according to
all of the relevant circumstances. This means you could be charged if a court finds your actions
excessive.

Section 27 Use of Force to Prevent Commission of Offence

This section allows us to use force to prevent a criminal offence before it is committed. This is
only allowed if, under the circumstances the person about to commit the offence could be arrested
without warrant, if they actually committed the offence and the offence would result in immediate
and serious harm to a person or property.

Page 179 of 346 Basic Training Manual Version 10 – 14 March 2017 Paragon Security ©
 Paragon Academy Basic Security Training Manual

Section 34 Defence of people

34. (1) A person is not guilty of an offence if

(a) They believe on reasonable grounds that force is being used against them or
another person or that a threat of force is being made against them or another
person;

(b) The act that constitutes the offence is committed for the purpose of
defending or protecting themselves or the other person from that use or
threat of force; and

(c) The act committed is reasonable in the circumstances.

Factors

(2) In determining whether the act committed is reasonable in the circumstances,

the court shall consider the relevant circumstances of the person, the other parties
and the act, including, but not limited to, the following factors:

(a) The nature of the force or threat;

(b) The extent to which the use of force was imminent and whether there were
other means available to respond to the potential use of force;

(c) The person’s role in the incident;

(d) Whether any party to the incident used or threatened to use a weapon;

(e) The size, age, gender and physical capabilities of the parties to the incident;

(f) The nature, duration and history of any relationship between the parties to
the incident, including any prior use or threat of force and the nature of
that force or threat;

(f.1) Any history of interaction or communication between the parties to the

incident;

(g) The nature and proportionality of the person’s response to the use or threat
of force; and

Page 180 of 346 Basic Training Manual Version 10 – 14 March 2017 Paragon Security ©
 Paragon Academy Basic Security Training Manual

(h) Whether the act committed was in response to a use or threat of force that
the person knew was lawful.

No defence

(3) Subsection (1) does not apply if the force is used or threatened by another
person for the purpose of doing something that they are required or authorized
by law to do in the administration or enforcement of the law, unless the person
who commits the act that constitutes the offence believes on reasonable
grounds that the other person is acting unlawfully.

Section 35 Defence of property

35. (1) A person is not guilty of an offence if

(a) They either believe on reasonable grounds that they are in peaceable
possession of property or are acting under the authority of, or lawfully
assisting, a person whom they believe on reasonable grounds is in peaceable
possession of property;

(b) They believe on reasonable grounds that another person

(i) Is about to enter, is entering or has entered the property without being
entitled by law to do so,

(ii) Is about to take the property, is doing so or has just done so, or

(iii) Is about to damage or destroy the property, or make it inoperative, or is

doing so;

(c) The act that constitutes the offence is committed for the purpose of

(i) Preventing the other person from entering the property, or removing that
person from the property, or

(ii) Preventing the other person from taking, damaging or destroying the
property or from making it inoperative, or retaking the property from that
person; and

(d) The act committed is reasonable in the circumstances.

Page 181 of 346 Basic Training Manual Version 10 – 14 March 2017 Paragon Security ©
 Paragon Academy Basic Security Training Manual

No defence

(2) Subsection (1) does not apply if the person who believes on reasonable
grounds that they are, or who is believed on reasonable grounds to be, in
peaceable possession of the property does not have a claim of right to it and
the other person is entitled to its possession by law.

No defence

(3) Subsection (1) does not apply if the other person is doing something that
they are required or authorized by law to do in the administration or
enforcement of the law, unless the person who commits the act that constitutes
the offence believes on reasonable grounds that the other person is acting
unlawfully.

Section 494 Arrest without warrant by any person

Section 494 of the Criminal Code of Canada is often called the Citizen’s Powers of Arrest. This is
allowed for very serious offences, only except as noted below.

Section 494(2) specifically allows Security Guards, who by contract are acting as an agent of the
owner of the property to take certain legal actions including making arrests for any criminal
offences they find a person committing (see with their own eyes) as long as it is on or in relation
to the property they are protecting.

It is important to note that there are a few areas of the law that require the exercise of caution such
as “white collar crime” offences or fraud, drug offences and very minor or trivial offences. Fraud
and drug offences are usually considered “reasonable grounds” offences or those that only Police
would have grounds to arrest for.

This section also allows a Security Guard to arrest somebody who is being chased by a person who
can arrest them. The Guard must act reasonably according to all of the circumstances. The person
who has initial grounds to make the arrest continues the arrest.

In all cases, the arrested person must be turned over to a Peace Officer, forthwith.

Page 182 of 346 Basic Training Manual Version 10 – 14 March 2017 Paragon Security ©
 Paragon Academy Basic Security Training Manual

Arrest without warrant by any person

494. (1) Anyone may arrest without warrant

(a) A person whom he finds committing an indictable offence; or
(b) A person who, on reasonable grounds, he believes
(i) Has committed a criminal offence, and
(ii) Is escaping from and freshly pursued by persons who have lawful authority
to arrest that person.

Arrest by owner, etc., of property

(2) The owner or a person in lawful possession of property, or a person

authorized by the owner or by a person in lawful possession of property, may
arrest a person without a warrant if they find them committing a criminal
offence on or in relation to that property and
(a) They make the arrest at that time; or
(b) They make the arrest within a reasonable time after the offence is
committed and they believe on reasonable grounds that it is not feasible in the
circumstances for a peace officer to make the arrest.

Delivery to peace officer

(3) Anyone other than a peace officer who arrests a person without warrant
shallforthwith deliver the person to a peace officer.

For greater certainty

(4) For greater certainty, a person who is authorized to make an arrest under this
section is a person who is authorized by law to do so for the purposes of section
25.
R.S., 1985, c. C-46, s. 494; 2012, c. 9, s. 3.

Page 183 of 346 Basic Training Manual Version 10 – 14 March 2017 Paragon Security ©
 Paragon Academy Basic Security Training Manual

Notes:
Under Section 34 - Defence of yourself and/or someone under your protection when a wrong doer
uses or threatens force this section provides the latitude of reasonable grounds that the person
will use or has used force unlawfully – the level of force permitted under the law will be a question
of law for a judge to decide based on the totality of circumstances.

Under Section 35 - Defence of property for which you have been given authority by the
owner/agent of the owner (property manager) to protect provides the authority and the latitude of
reasonable grounds to prevent a person taking property, entering property, damage, destroy or
make inoperative property. This authority includes the authorization to use force to stop or prevent
the wrong doer from doing the act. The level of force permitted under the law will be a question
of law for a judge to decide based on the totality of circumstances.
Paragon recommends that what is now done under the new law in relation to a citizen’s powers of
arrest, defence of person or defence of property is no different than what was done under previous
practices of private security practitioners.
You must be able to articulate your actions under the standard of reasonable grounds

Page 184 of 346 Basic Training Manual Version 10 – 14 March 2017 Paragon Security ©
 Paragon Academy Basic Security Training Manual

Youth Criminal Justice Act

The Youth Criminal Justice Act applies to young people in respect of a crime or regulatory
contravention (offence against a provincial statute or municipal bylaw). A young person under this
act is described as under eighteen (18) years of age and older than twelve (12) years of age.
Persons under the age of twelve years are children or persons of tender years and cannot be
convicted of a crime. They can, however be arrested by Security Guards and processed according
to law, like any other person. This process will be further detailed under use of force theory in this
program.
This Act has four basic principles as a basis:
1. Address the underlying behaviour, versus the crime and rehabilitate and reintegrate young
people who commit crimes
2. Hold young people accountable for their crimes
3. Reinforce social values for young people committing crimes and recognition of special
rights and guarantees related to young people
Setting out standards related to policies on proceedings outside the traditional criminal justice
system when young people commit less serious crimes
5.7 Use of Force Theory

Arrest Considerations

Minimize embarrassment: remove the subject from public view and escort him or her to the
Security Office.
Call for Police and wait, if a situation cannot be controlled safely.
Disengaging is always an option that should be considered, depending on circumstances and nature
of the offence.
Crowds and the environment can pose additional hazards. Be aware of surroundings such as glass
surfaces, windows and display counters.
Why is an arrest necessary? To prevent an offence or the continuance of an offence, detain a subject
who is a danger to others or is causing serious damage to property or disrupting the ability of the
organization to function.
What is the lowest level of consequence/sanction (penalty) available that is likely to prove
effective and justified under the circumstances?

Page 185 of 346 Basic Training Manual Version 10 – 14 March 2017 Paragon Security ©
 Paragon Academy Basic Security Training Manual

What is the public menace (danger/harm)? Considering the nature/seriousness of the

wrongful/criminal act is the action you take worth the potential positive or negative consequences
for the subject, society and you?

Tests Applied by the Courts

Was there a reasonable belief?

Was there a reasonable apprehension (fear or concern), given all the facts and circumstances?
Would a reasonable person in the same situation have behaved the same?
Reasonable Grounds: A set of facts or circumstances that would lead an ordinary, prudent and
cautious person to have a strong belief, beyond mere suspicion. In effect, the “Average
Canadian” would believe or do the same thing under the same circumstances.

Possible Circumstances Justifying Restraint in Handcuffs

▪ Under the influence of drugs or alcohol

▪ Intoxicated Vs under the influence
▪ Subject’s physical size, strength, skills
▪ Emotional state
▪ Proximity to weapons
▪ Number of subjects
▪ Previous history or reputation of the Subject (Violent, escape risk, etc)
▪ Demonstrated ability of the Subject
▪ Totality of Circumstances

Page 186 of 346 Basic Training Manual Version 10 – 14 March 2017 Paragon Security ©
 Paragon Academy Basic Security Training Manual

Possible Circumstances When You May Consider; Empty Hand Control Vs Handcuffs

▪ Security Guard Male: Subject Female

▪ Youth or Elderly
▪ Security Guard Large & Capable: Subject – Smaller size & less capable
▪ Physically Challenged (Caution – Do you know if they are, indeed physically challenged?)
Application of handcuffs may still be reasonable if the Subject is violent or other circumstances
justify handcuffing.

The Situation

Situation Impact Factors affect everyone involved in the encounter, including Security Guards and
Subjects. (Please also review the National Use of Force Framework on following pages)
▪ Weather conditions: rain, wind, snow, heat, etc
▪ Moment of the day: daylight or darkness
▪ Location: residential, rural, urban, indoors, outdoors
▪ Physical position: rooftop, roadside, stairwell, cell area
▪ Other factors such as cover and concealment

Time & Distance

▪ Seriousness of the situation

▪ Must you act immediately
▪ Can you create more time and distance
▪ Escape routes

Page 187 of 346 Basic Training Manual Version 10 – 14 March 2017 Paragon Security ©
 Paragon Academy Basic Security Training Manual

Security Guard/Subject Factors

These factors are considered in relation to the impact for the Security Guard.
• Size, Gender, Capability, Age and Maturity
• Perceived Subject Abilities (A Kung Fu Stance)
• Time and Distance
• Attack Cues
• Fitness, Health/Injury, Fatigue
• Physical Strength, Training/Experience
• Personal Knowledge, Confidence/Fear/Anxiety
• Tools of the Job Available
• Mental State
Danger Cues
One or more danger cues may be present, justifying decisions made regarding self-defence or
handcuffing.
• Gang Colors
• Tattoos
• Dress/Deportment (Martial arts or Military Culture)
• Specific Choice of Words (Prison Lingo, Threats, etc)
• Target Glancing (Looking at your handcuffs, repetitiously)
• Proximity, positioning and movement
• Fighting Stance (Trained Subject)
• Head Angle (Chin drop may indicate intent to fight, Chin up to run)
• Verbal/Physical Non-Compliance
• Threat Scanning (Checking around)/Head moving/scanning for witnesses or escape routes
• Agreement Gesture (Nodding at an Associate) - Looking to a second party decision maker

Page 188 of 346 Basic Training Manual Version 10 – 14 March 2017 Paragon Security ©
 Paragon Academy Basic Security Training Manual

Specific behaviour, words or answers

• Words indicating intent: “I’m going to….knock you out, mess you up, beat you, take your
radio, do whatever I want, etcetera.”
• Failure to comply with reasonable requests and lawful directions
• Repetitive questioning - stalling
Routine
Success gives positive reinforcement subconsciously. If it worked, even though it may be a faulty
tactic or even though the circumstances are completely different, you may wrongly select the same
tactic as a result.
Listen with your eyes as well as your ears.
Potential Attack Signs
▪ Conspicuous ignoring (Your presence, questions, directives or commands)
▪ Repetitious questioning
▪ Aggressive verbalization
▪ Emotional venting
▪ Refusing to comply with lawful request
▪ Ceasing all movement
▪ Invasion of personal space, Adopting an aggressive stance
▪ Hiding
▪ Clenched Fists or Jaw
▪ Shaking/Trembling, Deteriorating Voice Control
▪ 1000 Yard Stare (Looking through or past you as if you’re not there)
▪ Cautionary Verbal (Stalling or Justifying assault by insinuating the onus to attack was
yours and they had to defend themselves, “You want to hit me, don’t you?”)
▪ The Shoulder Shift (Preliminary to hitting with a hand strike the shoulder generally drops
forward and down, milliseconds before extending the arm).
▪ Subject stroking their hair or rubbing the top of their head
▪ Fighting Stance
▪ Pointing Finger
▪ Sudden closing into reactionary gap/personal zone

Page 189 of 346 Basic Training Manual Version 10 – 14 March 2017 Paragon Security ©
 Paragon Academy Basic Security Training Manual

Other Aggravating Factors

▪ Security Guard is defending their self and knocked to the ground by the assailant
▪ Subject’s custody of a guard dog
▪ Crowds
▪ Events (Protests, etc.)
▪ Limited resources/back up available

Your Sixth Sense (Trust your gut feeling) – A gut feeling or instinct based on intuition, training
and experience in combination with information perceived consciously and sub-consciously
through your other senses
Be wary of weapons disguised as knives, pagers, cell telephones, thrown liquids or “water guns.”

Reporting Use of Force

All Security Guards engaged in use of force encounters should brief their direct Supervisor, as
soon as possible following an encounter (well prior to shift end and allowing time for suitable
follow up depending on the nature and severity of the occurrence).
Each Security Guard involved in an encounter is responsible to complete his or her own report.
A Security Guard may fill out a formal use of force report any time they deem it is appropriate. A
formal use of force report must be completed when a supervisor directs a Security Guard to do so.

A Ministry Use of Force Report (Form 1) is required according to the regulations, when:
• The Security Guard uses handcuffs, a baton, a firearm or any other weapon
• The Security Guard uses any other kind of force
• The Security Guard is accompanied by a Guard Dog that attacks a person

For the purposes of this requirement, “any other kind of force” occurs when a Security
Guard uses force that results in an injury requiring medical attention to any party. It is
recommended that if there is any complaint or indication of injury whether medical
attention is sought, provided or declined, a use of force from be completed for due
diligence.

Page 190 of 346 Basic Training Manual Version 10 – 14 March 2017 Paragon Security ©
 Paragon Academy Basic Security Training Manual

The Report

Formal reports should include the Use of Force Report, any related S.O.R(s), a photocopy of memo
book entries and relevant witness statements. Reports should be submitted prior to the end of the
Security Guard’s shift and escalated through each applicable level of Supervision.
When completing a use of force report, the Guard must consider, and include where appropriate,
the following details of the incident
Initiation of call / Reason for response to scene

How did you come upon the scene? Happened on it during patrol, dispatched, complaint, etc
Were there any weapons or violence reported to you, threatened or used?
Arrival on Scene

Marked versus unmarked vehicle, in uniform or plain clothes, number of guards responding or
present, availability of back up, Police on scene, responding or called, Information given to you
before or after arrival on scene; dispatch, complainant, witnesses
Approach

Initial assessment or impression; what is going on? Subject’s disposition and actions, other factors
observed and heard, first contact with subject, your interactions with subject and other persons at
the scene

Subject’s Actions

Subject’s verbal response, Subject’s body language, Subject’s physical actions

Guard’s Actions

Initial action, calming techniques and level of force, duration of resistance, type of control methods
used, handcuffing procedure, double locking, search “LACT” (Look, Ask, Clear, Touch), weapons
or other items found or not found, five steps of arrest followed – RTC & caution read and time

Page 191 of 346 Basic Training Manual Version 10 – 14 March 2017 Paragon Security ©
 Paragon Academy Basic Security Training Manual

Transport Procedure

Subject’s demeanour and actions, where the subject was taken, length of transport, statements,
behaviour, spontaneous utterances
Injuries

Guards, Subject, Third Party - Nature and degree, medical treatment offered and received or
declined, EMS attending and Hospitals involved
Use of Force Report – Form 1
Each Security Guard involved in a use of force matter must submit a report. The Form 1 should
be consistent with and supported by notes, Occurrence Reports, video evidence if available and
any statements provided.
PART 1: This lists instructions for use of the form and the official business name of the Licensed
Business you work for must be filled in by the Guard submitting the report.
PART 2: This lists the Security Guard’s personal information. Under “E-Mail Address, you may
use a work or personal e-mail address.
PART 3: This concerns contacting the local police service. Most Use of Force Reports will involve
arrests so the local police service will be contacted and advised. Other circumstances may involve
self-defence situations where an arrest was not made. The local police should also be contacted
and advised regarding the assault against you if this is the case.. This information should be
completed.
PART 4: Under “Type of Force Used”
This part provides incident details. The work site name and address should be included. For
example: Mall Walkers Shopping Centre, 123 Any Street, Toronto ON. Under “Type of force
used” if there is more than one person involved, this should list the name of the subject of this
report or “Male Number 1, Male Number 2”, etc. If the generic descriptions are used, there should
be a physical description of Male Number 1 in the occurrence report.
The explanation should be a brief and simple description of the actual force or techniques used by
the Guard, not the reason for using force. Examples include, “applied three knee strikes to the
subject’s left leg, used a straight arm bar take down and handcuffed the subject” or “punched and
kicked the subject numerous times while being attacked by him and numerous other people.”

Page 192 of 346 Basic Training Manual Version 10 – 14 March 2017 Paragon Security ©
 Paragon Academy Basic Security Training Manual

Under “Reason for Use of Force”

This area is where the reason for using force is detailed and justifies the actions taken. For example
“the Subject assaulted me during a trespass arrest” “the subject was fighting with the loss
prevention professional during the arrest for theft” “the subject hit another member of the public
and force was used to stop the assault and arrest him.”
PART 5: Details injuries to any parties.
PART 6: is completed by an official of the company, as stated
Relative Positioning

▪ Use Contact/Cover principles and tactics when working with a partner.

▪ Maintain a Reactionary Gap (personal safety zone) of 4 to 6 feet, minimum distance
from a subject who is not armed.
▪ Use natural obstacles such as food court tables to maintain your tactical distancing
with hostile subjects who want to inter-act at close range.
▪ Use Positioning indicated by the Chart, below as appropriate
Figure 5.7.a

“Ambush” Position (3)

Escort Position (2 ½) Escort Position (2 ½)

Side On Position (2) Side On Position (2)

Subject

Contact/Cover Position (1) Contact/Cover Position (1)

Zero Position (Inside-Do Not Stand Here)

Page 193 of 346 Basic Training Manual Version 10 – 14 March 2017 Paragon Security ©
 Paragon Academy Basic Security Training Manual

Do not lean against cars or allow any part of your person to enter inside a vehicle window
while dealing with subjects in a car. It is best to approach from 45 degrees behind the subject,
allowing them to turn their head and face you. Give consideration for both driver side and
passenger side approaches. Do not try and hold on to moving vehicles under any
circumstances. Never “pursue” fleeing vehicles.

“Interview Stance” or Basic Stance

Body bladed at 45 degrees, hands up at least waist height and free, palms facing in, weight
lowered, centered and balanced lightly on the balls of the feet, shoulder width apart with a
spring in the knees.

“Defensive Stance”

Similar to the Interview Stance with hands chest high, palms of hands facing the subject,
elbows down to protect the rib-cage. Turn palms out with front hand extended and back hand
in front of your solar plexus or under chin, step back, widen stance and issue a verbal
command.

Page 194 of 346 Basic Training Manual Version 10 – 14 March 2017 Paragon Security ©
 Paragon Academy Basic Security Training Manual

Approach

Before entering a situation or subject’s reactionary gap: stop, analyze, assess, plan and then
act. Use angles to your advantage. Once you decide to close enter quickly, decisively and
gain control.
When approaching or disengaging from grounded subjects be aware of a danger zone
referred to as, “The Keyhole.” This phrase represents an area that can be envisioned as a
circle that falls within the area covered by a prone subject circling their arms away from the
body perpendicularly, in “snow angel” fashion. Use extreme caution while bridging this gap
as you are vulnerable to a strike or grab while there. This also includes an awareness of the
subject’s legs that may be used to kick or trip you.
Develop a second nature to continuously re-assess, prioritize and disengage if necessary
throughout an encounter.

Cooper Colour Codes

Situation Awareness Colour Codes are used as an aid to visualize and assess your state of
mind, focus and awareness (Situational Awareness) during visualization exercises or while
at work. See Figure 5.7.b, next page.

Page 195 of 346 Basic Training Manual Version 10 – 14 March 2017 Paragon Security ©
 Paragon Academy Basic Security Training Manual

Figure 5.7.b

Condition white is complete relaxation and lack of

awareness. This state of mind is generally reserved for
CONDITION WHITE relaxation in secure environments, such as in your home
during quiet moments.

You are alert and aware of surroundings. Vigilant yet

controlled and relaxed with a normal heart rate. This is
CONDITION YELLOW usually the optimum awareness condition for a workplace.

This is a heightened state of awareness with a specific

focal point. You sense a threat and your attention has been
drawn to that threat. You have assessed the situation and
CONDITION ORANGE you need to plan your response and act based on that plan.
Your heart rate has increased and your body is readying to
enter the fight or flight state.

This is full alert and action, engaging and controlling a

circumstance or disengaging from danger. The
“confrontation is on” and it is not the time to be using the
CONDITION RED telephone. Your full attention should be focused on the
task at hand while allowing your mind to absorb as much
relevant information as possible (including threat scans, if
appropriate).

The total panic or fight for your life phase occurs in

condition black. This is the condition where training may
take over and you run on “auto-pilot”. You need to be
CONDITION BLACK wary of irrational behaviour or hyper-vigilance during this
phase. Proper training and mental conditioning should
serve to avoid this condition or limit the effects allowing
correct response selection and regaining of control.

Page 196 of 346 Basic Training Manual Version 10 – 14 March 2017 Paragon Security ©
 Paragon Academy Basic Security Training Manual

Complacency or lack of appropriate focus and attention is the state of mind that occurs when a
person becomes too comfortable or relaxed in their surroundings opposed to the appropriate
alertness required. Another common cause of complacency is; a faulty tactic is used and nothing
bad happens so the person using the tactic thinks it is working.
You can avoid both of these complacency pitfalls by using tactical thinking and always looking at
your assignment and work area through different perspectives. You should use “what/if” and
“if/then” thinking on the job to assist you in preparing for various foreseeable emergencies and
minimizing surprises.
When working, it is important you face the subject or agitated person at all times whether this is
a possible intruder, visitor, a contractor or a customer. This will assist you perceiving important
visual cues.
Pay close attention to the subject you are dealing with, particularly if they are in crisis as indicated
by acting out behaviours and so on.

Page 197 of 346 Basic Training Manual Version 10 – 14 March 2017 Paragon Security ©
 Paragon Academy Basic Security Training Manual

National Use of Force Framework

The National Use of Force Framework is a situational model serving as an aid to law enforcement
officers and Security Guards for understanding use of force response selection and articulation of
encounters in reports or in court testimony and for training to ensure personal and public safety.
It is each Security Guard’s responsibility to have an exceptional understanding of all three of the
concentric circles represented in the model, being the Situation (Inner Circle), Subject Behaviour
Categories (Middle circle) and Security Guard Use of Force Options (Outer Circle).
The Assessment Process:
The process of assessing a situation is threefold involving:
1. The Situation,
2. Subject Behaviours, and
3. Officer's Perception & Tactical Considerations
Careful consideration of all possible factors within each of the above categories assists the Guard
in understanding, and responding to situations, and in explaining to others how a particular
situation was perceived, assessed, and responded to.
The examples provided throughout this document are presented for the purpose of illustration, and
are by no means exhaustive.

1. The Situation

▪ Environment
▪ Number of subjects
▪ Perceived subject abilities
▪ Knowledge of subject
▪ Time & distance
▪ Potential attack signs

2. Subject Behaviours

▪ Cooperative
▪ Resistant (passive)
▪ Resistant (active)
▪ Assaultive
▪ Serious bodily harm or death

Page 198 of 346 Basic Training Manual Version 10 – 14 March 2017 Paragon Security ©
 Paragon Academy Basic Security Training Manual

3. Personal factors
▪ Strength/overall fitness
▪ Personal experience
▪ Skill/ability/training
▪ Fears
▪ Gender
▪ Fatigue
▪ Injuries
▪ Critical incident stress symptoms
▪ Cultural background
▪ Sight/vision

4. Tactical Considerations
▪ Disengage (consequences)
▪ Deportment/appearance
▪ Uniform & equipment
▪ Number of Guards/Police Officers
▪ Availability of backup
▪ Geographic considerations
▪ Practicality – containment, distance, communications
▪ Policies & guidelines

5. Use of Force Options

▪ Officer presence – visible signs of authority
▪ Communication – verbal and non-verbal
▪ Physical control – soft (restraints & joint locks) & hard (strikes & impacts)
▪ Intermediate weapons – such as batons & pepper spray
▪ Lethal weapons – any techniques intended or likely to cause bodily harm or death
▪ There are five levels of Use of Force Options listed in the Model.
▪ It is important to note that Communications begins at the start of an encounter and
continues throughout
▪ Clear, concise (simple) and audible commands must continue throughout an encounter

Page 199 of 346 Basic Training Manual Version 10 – 14 March 2017 Paragon Security ©
 Paragon Academy Basic Security Training Manual

Perception & Tactical Considerations:

Careful consideration of all possible factors within each of the above five categories assists the
Guard in understanding, and responding to situations, and in explaining to others how a particular
situation was perceived, assessed, and responded to.
The examples provided throughout this document are presented for the purpose of
illustration, and are by no means exhaustive.

Explanation
An appropriate command for Security Guards, when required may be appropriately expressed,
“Security Stop!”
The Subject, by their actions chooses the level of force that is appropriate for the Security
Guard to use to conduct a Lawful Purpose.
This apparently simple task of matching the subject behaviour with the corresponding Security
Guard use of force option on the model is complicated by the degrees of seriousness that exist
within each subject behaviour, the situation and personal factors. Each segment of the model
interacts with the others, allowing for numerous possible actions.
For example, the Model clearly indicates that an appropriate corresponding Security Guard
response to assaulting subject behaviour is to use empty hand techniques. Even if the situation and
Security Guard/Subject factors indicate this is appropriate, to what degree is the assault?
It may or may not be appropriate for the Security Guard to select and apply a hard physical control
to a subject who is slamming a fist into his open hand and saying, “If you touch me, I’ll mess you
up.” Depending on all other factors such as who is at risk, how serious is the subject’s actions,
what if any back up is available and what other options may exist including disengagement. This
situation poses the question if another technique selection may prove effective.
Comparing the example above to a situation where a subject is actively, aggressively assaulting a
Security Guard by closing space and swinging their arms violently and yelling and the Security
Guard has a reasonable apprehension of being struck, there is little question that a defensive strike
is an appropriate technique selection.
This dilemma is prevalent in all aspects of use of force response selection and it is unfair to judge
or second-guess Security Guards who make decisions in fractions of seconds that may have lasting
consequences. This being said, it is imperative that reports include the reasons another response
was not used (precluded). Did the Security Guard have a moral obligation to act to protect the
public or make an arrest and did the Security Guard reasonably believe they would be violently
struck if they touched the subject?

Page 200 of 346 Basic Training Manual Version 10 – 14 March 2017 Paragon Security ©
 Paragon Academy Basic Security Training Manual

Figure 5.7.c

Page 201 of 346 Basic Training Manual Version 10 – 14 March 2017 Paragon Security ©
 Paragon Academy Basic Security Training Manual

In Custody Protocols

R.T.C.
As a matter of practice Security Guards read the Rights to Counsel or R.T.C. and caution printed
in the memo book to arrested subjects as soon as it is practicable. The police will subsequently
also R.T.C. the subject if they are charged and/or taken into custody. It is mandated the police do
this, so do not be surprised that this is done, even if you have already read the rights.
In the event of a major crime or arrest particularly, ensure the subject is read the caution but do
not interview them. Wait for the police to conduct this.

Y.C.J.A. - R.T.C. (Rights to counsel)

Young Person rights to counsel are somewhat different. If you have any doubt regarding the age
of a subject, despite any statement or identification, read both sets of rights. Be aware that young
people also have the right to have an adult of their choice present at all times when first processed
and in custody, so be prepared to establish sufficient security levels in the security office if this is
a requirement.
In general, the Y.C.J.A. R.T.C. is longer, the young person has more rights and the R.T.C. is
intertwined with the caution.

Telephone Calls
Telephone calls are another contingency that cannot be managed optimally by Security Guards.
This is not to say that we deny a subject their charter right to make a phone call however this
opportunity will be afforded them by the police. We cannot un-handcuff a subject in custody, leave
them unattended or violate their right to confer with a lawyer privately by phone.
Another concern is the possibility the subject may initiate disposal of evidence or escape of wanted
persons if they are allowed to communicate with others prior to police arrival. Ensure cell phones
and pagers are removed from the subject’s possession for concealed weapons concerns and do not
turn these off or erase numbers, messages or answer in-coming calls.

Page 202 of 346 Basic Training Manual Version 10 – 14 March 2017 Paragon Security ©
 Paragon Academy Basic Security Training Manual

Detention in Car
This is only done in extenuating circumstances. Transport is conducted on private property only.
Maintaining safe custody of a subject in a car is problematic. Security patrol cars are not equipped
to safely detain or transport subjects, as there is no security cage separating the back seat from the
front. Seat belts present the possibility of subjects breaking handcuffs using this improvised tool.
In some circumstances such as extremely bad weather we may have no choice but to enter the car
with a subject in custody for health and safety reasons.
If this becomes absolutely necessary Security Guards will ensure that arrested subjects are properly
handcuffed behind their back and checked thoroughly for weapons. Back up must be called and it
is preferable a supervisor attend, if available. The Security Guard will sit in the car in the driver’s
seat and the subject in custody will be placed in the front passenger’s seat with the seat belt engaged
properly.
Call in your start and end mileage from your odometer at the beginning and end of the transport
and document all details meticulously in your notes.
Ensure handcuffs are checked frequently, particularly if the subject is complaining of discomfort
or “squirming” as a potential for escape and assault is evident. Thoroughly document all relevant
information in your notes.

Turning over Arrested Subject to Peace Officer, Forthwith

All arrested subjects will be turned over to a police officer forthwith, as provided by law. This is
accomplished by calling for the appropriate police force in the jurisdiction of arrest, as soon as
practicable following arrest and control. The police are called to attend the site or area of arrest for
this purpose of receiving the subject into custody.
Note the initial call including time, dispatcher name or number and any subsequent calls made to
check the status of the call in the police cue (call back about every half hour, as applicable).
Subsequent police investigation may include verifying the validity of the grounds for arrest,
checking the subject for wants and warrants, determining identity and assessing appropriate
consequences. The subject is considered officially in police custody upon their arrival and they are
in charge.
If the person is taken into police custody as opposed to released at the scene, the police may apply
their handcuffs before yours are removed. In extreme circumstances, such as the inability of police
to attend in a reasonable time, due to priority calls or large civil disturbances, subjects may be
released as authorized by a police Staff Sergeant by telephone.

Page 203 of 346 Basic Training Manual Version 10 – 14 March 2017 Paragon Security ©
 Paragon Academy Basic Security Training Manual

In these circumstances you must call and allow for suitable back up Security Guards to attend.
You must be sure of positive identity of the subject and the police will want to ensure that the
offence is relatively minor in nature.
The local/closest police station is called and a Staff Sergeant must give authorization. The police
will check the subject’s name for wanted records and advise you can release him/her or direct you
to hold them for police. This Staff Sergeant’s name and badge number will be recorded in your
memo book and a full use of force report will be filed.
The subject will be escorted from property when released. Be sure to calmly and politely advise
the subject of your intent to release them and that this is being facilitated for their benefit. Ensure
by using your interview techniques that the subject will cooperate and is unlikely to resist and
assault you. If in doubt for any reason, do not complete a release and advise police immediately.
If an assault occurs, defend yourself as necessary, disengage or re-arrest and detain the subject.

Page 204 of 346 Basic Training Manual Version 10 – 14 March 2017 Paragon Security ©
 Paragon Academy Basic Security Training Manual

Excited Delirium and Positional Asphyxia

People who struggle violently may be suffering from excited delirium. This
condition can sometimes result in the death of the subject. Excited Delirium can be
induced by any of the following conditions; drugs, alcohol, psychiatric illness, or a
combination.
Signs:
• Abnormal Strength
• Abnormal tolerance of pain
• Impaired thinking
• Disorientation
• Hallucinations
• Panic/Shouting
• Violence
• Paranoia
• Profuse sweating/hot to the touch (a person’s warmth)

Sudden tranquility following frenzied activity indicates an exceptional risk.

Certain restraint positions increase the risk of death. Ensure the subject’s head is
properly supported so that they do not slump blocking their airway. Do not place
and hold subjects face down. Do not hog tie subjects. If a subject appears in physical
distress get immediate medical assistance.
Roll handcuffed subjects to the recovery position as soon as it is safe and practicable
to do so following restraint in handcuffs if they are prone.
If a Subject stops breathing, call 911 and advise that a life threatening condition
is apparent and follow directions provided by Police or Paramedics.

Page 205 of 346 Basic Training Manual Version 10 – 14 March 2017 Paragon Security ©
 Paragon Academy Basic Security Training Manual

5.8 Tort Law

Civil Cases
Civil cases deal with law related to contracts or Torts which are wrongful acts that result in injury
or damages to another person or another person’s property. Civil cases are initiated in two ways,
as an action or as an application.
Claims that are valued at $25,000.00 or less are usually heard in small claims court which has a
set of rules and procedures unique to this court system.
This section provides information important to performing your job within lawful authority and
explains some elements of Tort Law in security situations. Generally speaking there are several
categories of torts, including intentional torts such as battery (assault injuring a person),
negligence, gross negligence, etc.
The tort of injuries includes physical injuries, “infliction”, privacy, defamation or injury to one’s
reputation
A Tort is a wilful or negligent wrong done by one person to another and Tort law addresses these
wrongs providing remedies, including penalties and awards to balance the scales of justice.
Some examples of wrongs covered by Tort law that concerns Security Professionals include;
• The concept of “Agency” or one person acting for another
• Duty of Care, a legal term meaning that anyone performing an act or duty that could cause
hurt must exercise a reasonable standard of care
• Vicarious liability which is closely related to the concept of Agency and means that a
superior can be held responsible for the actions of a subordinate
• Negligence, a term meaning a failure to use reasonable care - the opposite of diligence and
beyond someone doing the best they can but referring to the competence of an individual
given the action. Negligence may not depend upon the intent of a person but the resulting
injury sustained and their ability to perform the action, given all of the circumstances
• Wilful misconduct – intentional or conscious disregard for the rights or safety of others
where an individual intends doing what they did.

The doctrine of contribution under Tort law holds that where only one person was found liable, if
others who were not named were also negligent, the injured party is entitled to a proportionate
contribution from the others.

“Within the scope of employment” describes actions taken on behalf of the employer opposed to
taken on behalf of the employee personally. The concept of reasonability is at question in scope of

Page 206 of 346 Basic Training Manual Version 10 – 14 March 2017 Paragon Security ©
 Paragon Academy Basic Security Training Manual

employment. This is particularly relevant to the job description and or post order or work
instructions the Security Guard is provided.
Most Canadian tort law is based on decisions made during previous cases or precedents. This law
of torts is based on the British system with the exception of a few torts such as nuisance
(interference with enjoyment of one’s property), defamation of character and some medical
responsibilities.

Intentional torts include the wrongs of assault, false arrest, false imprisonment, mental distress,
anguish or trespassing.
Not all torts have to be intentional and these would be called non-intentional torts and includes
a class of wrongs including accidentally injuring someone or damaging their property through
negligence as opposed to malicious or wilful conduct. Injury may also include interfering with
another’s rights or interests such as injuring them by causing public embarrassment or humiliation.
Harms that can be imposed on another include the physical person or body, property or legal rights.
Negligence is defined as a failure to use reasonable care or due diligence whereas gross negligence
is defined as negligence that is so flagrant as to be reckless or act with total disregard of the
consequences.

Page 207 of 346 Basic Training Manual Version 10 – 14 March 2017 Paragon Security ©
 Paragon Academy Basic Security Training Manual

Tucker v. Cadillac Fairview Corp. [2005] O.J. No. 2921

Justification in the Criminal Law looks at a broader range of factors including the duty being
performed, the extent to which there is interference with individual liberty, the public good, the
liberty interfered with and the nature and extent of the interference.

Section 495(2) of the Criminal Code is cited in that a police officer shall not make an arrest
without warrant for summary conviction (less serious offences) unless it is necessary to:
1. Establish the identity of the person arrested
2. To secure or preserve evidence of or relating to the offence
3. To prevent the continuance or renewal of the offence or the commission of another offence
4. To secure the attendance in court of the person arrested.
• Could the matter have been effectively dealt with by means other than arrest?
• What level of force was used?
• What duty did you have to interfere with the subject?
• How important was the action for the general good of the public?
• How severe was the interference with the subject’s liberty?

The reasons for Police Officers to search a person and Security Guards to search a person are
different according to the urgency of an issue:
1. To identify the subject committing an offence
2. To secure evidence of the crime or relating to the crime (would this evidence otherwise
disappear?)
3. To prevent a continuance, repetition or renewal of an offence
4. To ensure the offender attends court

You must be diligent to ensure any arrest you undertake meets the minimum standard as set out
by at least one of these tests to minimize the chances of being charged or sued. Of the above noted
points, identifying a subject in relation to a trespass offence and preventing a continuance,
repetition or renewal of an offence are the most relevant to Security Guards.
If you were working as loss prevention personnel or if other circumstances created some urgency
you may need to secure evidence but in most cases that is not necessary. The police will check for
evidence. The last reason, to ensure an offender attends court is also a priority for the authorities,
not Security Guards.
Conclusions

Page 208 of 346 Basic Training Manual Version 10 – 14 March 2017 Paragon Security ©
 Paragon Academy Basic Security Training Manual

It is your duty to articulate (be able to state) and justify (prove reasonable) any arrest or use of
force you undertake. Actions you take within the scope of your employment are going to be
reviewed closely and must be reasonable according to the concept of duty of care. Your employer
will provide training, guidance, policies and procedures serving as a framework within which you
should operate. Ultimately the responsibility for your actions resides with you. You can face
charges in criminal and civil court if those decisions are not beyond reproach.
Enforce rules and regulations on the property within the policies provided while taking a fair and
equal approach to all persons and situations.
Our goal is to calm situations and ensure our presence and actions allow the property to operate as
intended. We are responsible to ensure compliance with the client’s program for providing a
reasonably safe environment for everyone. In other words we are responsible for safety and
security as well as the physical plant of the facilities we protect.
Our first and best opportunity to ensure we meet this goal is by being highly visible on a site and
providing deterrence to criminal or disruptive behaviours and activities. We also observe sub-
standard conditions and report these to the appropriate authority for correction.
If it is practical and effective call the police to deal with violations under the law.
When persons present a danger, disruption or fail to comply with the site policies the best option
is to gain compliance using persuasion. If absolutely necessary and as a last resort we may use
reasonable force as allowed by law and policies.
Use criminal authorities if justified. Use trespass authorities appropriately as a last resort to prevent
disruption of the facility and unreasonable and/or repetitive behaviours of offenders. If it will be
effective, use measures short of arrest to deal with trespass issues. Understand the intent of the
Trespass to Property Act is to gain compliance with rules on private property or get offenders to
leave and not return.
Do:
• Be fair and impartial
• Thoroughly document all occurrences
• Obtain witness statements when able
• Gather all evidence supporting your actions and present these to your supervisor, ASAP
Don’t:
• Allow ego to motivate a bad decision
• Forget to consider all options available to you
Arrest without weighing all circumstances and selecting the best time and place to do so.

Page 209 of 346 Basic Training Manual Version 10 – 14 March 2017 Paragon Security ©
 Paragon Academy Basic Security Training Manual

5.9 Section Summary

This section covered much of the information related to the Canadian Legal System, including
criminal courts, handling of evidence and use of force theory and tort law. This section will assist
you accurately identifying & categorizing offences. The accompanying lessons show how to
perform a citizen’s arrest. Some of the more important legal concepts presented include those of
liability, duty of care & lawful authority.
While section five (5) focuses on the legal aspects of completing your job within legal authorities,
the next section, Effective Communications will allow you to apply sound methods in order to
persuade people to avoid breaking laws or regulations.

Page 210 of 346 Basic Training Manual Version 10 – 14 March 2017 Paragon Security ©
 Paragon Academy Basic Security Training Manual

6.0 – Effective Communications

6.1 Introduction

Security Guards encounter a wide range of situations and are required to act professionally under
all circumstances. This section reviews the interpersonal skills and communications skills
necessary to adapt to various situations and environments. Basic, interpersonal, tactical
communications and conflict management will be discussed in this module.

6.2 Communication skills

Communication skills are one’s abilities in the areas of language, understanding, expressing
oneself appropriately and use of practical language such as correct tense, gender, grammar,
meaning, expression, context and so on according to the situation.
Communication is a process of transferring information from one entity to another, whereby
information is imparted by a sender to a receiver via a medium. All forms of communication
require a sender, a message, and a receiver.
There are many different mediums via which communication process can take place such as;
written communication (memo, letter, directives, standing orders, company policies, etc.), in
person, phone, email, radio, video recording.
Communication is a key skill and an essential tool for today’s Security Guard in their work
environment. A good communicator will always examine the facts in front of them and adopt their
style of communication to fit the situation/audience at hand. A Security Guard must maintain a
courteous and professional style of communication under any and all circumstances.
Rules for basic communication process:
• Communication is a process not an event.
• Communication flows in two different directions Sender to Receiver-Receiver to Sender.
• A message must be sent via a medium.
• That message must be received.
• That message must be understood.
• There must be confirmation of understanding via feedback.

Page 211 of 346 Basic Training Manual Version 10 – 14 March 2017 Paragon Security ©
 Paragon Academy Basic Security Training Manual

6.3 Interpersonal Communications

Interpersonal skills may be defined as one’s mental and communication skills, combined and used
to interact with and deal with others. The goal is to achieve a desired outcome, also using the social
graces required to persuade others without offending or intimidating/coercing them.
A Security Guard is expected to employ interpersonal communication skills on a daily basis
through the course of their duties. A skilled communicator will build good relations with clients,
tenants, residents and members of the public to establish good understanding. Building a business
relationship through strong communication will establish a platform for future communication
allowing a Security Guard to accomplish tasks easily and on a positive note.
Interpersonal communication relies on verbal and non-verbal methods. Verbal communication can
be spoken; in person by telephone or radio. Written; letter, memo, policies, procedures, standing
orders, etc. Non-verbal communication encompasses facial expressions, body movements and
sound (tone, volume, cadence or rhythm, pace or speed and modulation of voice – called
“paraverbal” communication).
Verbal-spoken communication
Listen – a good communicator is always a good listener. Listening will do several things; allow
you to find out what they are thinking-their side of the story. Listening helps them feel that
you care and are there to help them. Listening allows you the time to formulate and organise
your thoughts into an appropriate reply.
Language – be lucid or easily understood. Keep in mind that 500 of the most commonly used
words in the English language have up to 14,000 different meanings depending on how they
are used, where in the sentence they are used, what tone/inflection is put on them, etc. Consider
the fact that for many individuals English is a second language and they may not have a good
command of it. This can further be complicated by background differences (religion, cultural,
upbringing). Use simple language.
Courtesy – Be professional, polite and respectful. No matter the circumstances always start on a
positive note by greeting the individual you are communicating with and introducing yourself.
This sets a positive tone at the beginning of the communication process making it easier. Be
formal use titles such as Sir/Ma’am. Keep the conversation professional and at a business
level; in other words “just doing my job” not personal. It is never right for a Security Guard to
use profanity, demeaning/belittling remarks or sarcasm.

Page 212 of 346 Basic Training Manual Version 10 – 14 March 2017 Paragon Security ©
 Paragon Academy Basic Security Training Manual

Non-Verbal communication:
You want your body to communicate the same message that your words are conveying. Body
language is easy to see not just for the person you are communicating with but anyone who happens
to be looking at you even if they are not close enough to hear what you are saying.
Maintain a calm, pleasant, friendly and professional demeanour.
Your facial expression should be neutral and/or friendly in order to convey a calm and relaxed
manner. Have a relaxed body posture, positioned in a manner that is non-threatening or
confrontational. No sudden gestures or movements. Modulate the tone, pitch and volume of your
voice to convey that calm and friendly demeanour.
Telephone
When receiving calls at a client’s place of business:
• Identify yourself and the company. Speak clearly.
• Be courteous - get to the point - make notes.
• Politely ask the callers business. Pay close attention to their needs
• Ask the person before you place them on hold.
• Check back with a person on hold.
• Always make the caller feel you are pleased to handle his/her call and it is not an intrusion.
• Never smoke, chew gum or eat while on the telephone
Radio Communication
When operating radios
• Listen before you transmit.
• Pause for one second before you transmit.
• Speak directly into the microphone.
• Use assigned call signs at all times.
• Use the standard radio ten code system
• Assume at all times that you are being monitored.
• Short communication only.

When communicating by radio, it is important to keep communications clear and brief. Standard
systems were developed to assist us with both of these goals including the universal 10-codes and
phonetic alphabet. 10-codes communicate commonly used security procedures securely and the
phonetic alphabet may be used when transmitting a person’s name or a license plate number, etc.

Page 213 of 346 Basic Training Manual Version 10 – 14 March 2017 Paragon Security ©
 Paragon Academy Basic Security Training Manual

Phonetic Alphabet
A - Alfa N - November
B - Bravo O - Oscar
C - Charlie P - Papa
D - Delta Q - Quebec
E - Echo R - Romeo
F - Foxtrot S - Sierra
G - Golf T - Tango
H - Hotel U - Uniform
I - India V - Victor
J - Juliet W - Whiskey
K - Kilo X - X-ray
L - Lima Y - Yankee
M - Mike Z - Zulu

Page 214 of 346 Basic Training Manual Version 10 – 14 March 2017 Paragon Security ©
 Paragon Academy Basic Security Training Manual

APCO Canada 10-codes (Association of Public Safety Communications)

10-0 Use Caution 10-34 Riot

10-1 Signal Weak 10-35 Major Crime Alert
10-2 Signal Good 10-36 Correct Time
10-3 Stop Transmitting 10-37 Suspicious Vehicle
10-4 Message Received 10-38 Stop Suspicious Vehicle
10-5 Relay 10-39 Respond With Siren and Flasher
10-6 Station is busy 10-40 Do not use Siren and Flashers
10-7 Out Of Service 10-41 Beginning Shift
10-8 In Service 10-42 End Shift
10-9 Repeat 10-43 Information
10-10 Fight In Progress 10-44 Permission to Leave
10-11 Animal Problem 10-45 Dead Animal
10-12 Stand By 10-46 Assist Motorist
10-13 Report Conditions 10-47 Emergency Road Repair
10-14 Prowler Report 10-48 Traffic Control
10-15 Civil Disturbance 10-49 Traffic Signal Out
10-16 Domestic Problem 10-50 Traffic Accident
10-17 Meet Complainant 10-51 Request Tow Truck
10-18 Urgent 10-52 Request Ambulance
10-19 Go To Station 10-53 Roadway Blocked
10-20 Advise To Location 10-54 Livestock on Roadway
10-21 Phone 10-55 Intoxicated Driver
10-22 Disregard 10-56 Intoxicated Pedestrian
10-23 Arrived At Scene 10-57 Hit and Run Accident
10-24 Assignment Complete 10-58 Direct Traffic
10-25 Report to 10-59 Escort

Page 215 of 346 Basic Training Manual Version 10 – 14 March 2017 Paragon Security ©
 Paragon Academy Basic Security Training Manual

10-26 Detaining Suspect 10-60 Squad In Vicinity

10-27 Driver's License Information 10-61 Personnel In Vicinity
10-28 Vehicle Registration Information 10-62 Reply To Message
10-29 Check Records For Want 10-63 Prepare to Copy
10-30 Unauthorized Use Of Radio 10-64 Local Message
10-31 Crime In Progress 10-65 Net Message
10-32 Person With Gun 10-66 Cancel Message
10-33 Emergency - All Units Stand By 10-67 Clear For Net Message
10-68 Dispatch Information 10-84 Estimated Time of Arrival
10-69 Message Received 10-85 Arrival Delayed
10-70 Fire Alarm 10-86 Operator On Duty
10-71 Advise Nature Of Alarm 10-87 Pick Up
10-72 Report Progress of Alarm 10-88 Advise Telephone Number
10-73 Smoke Report 10-89 Bomb Threat
10-74 Negative 10-90 Bank Alarm
10-75 In contact with 10-91 Pick Up Subject
10-76 En route to 10-92 Illegally Parked Vehicle
10-77 Estimated Time of Arrival 10-93 Blockage
10-78 Request Assistance 10-94 Drag Racing
10-79 Notify Coroner 10-95 Subject In Custody
10-80 Pursuit in Progress 10-96 Detain Subject
10-81 Breathalyser Report 10-97 Test Signal
10-82 Reserved Lodgings 10-98 Prisoner Escape
10-83 School Crossing Assignment 10-99 Wanted Or Stolen
Some employers may have developed proprietary code systems, for examples in Hospitals there
are common radio codes in place. Some of these codes may have other meanings, depending on
the employer you work for. You must be familiar with the practices at your site.

Page 216 of 346 Basic Training Manual Version 10 – 14 March 2017 Paragon Security ©
 Paragon Academy Basic Security Training Manual

Paragon Security 10 Code system

10-0 Radio Check 10-28 Vehicle description/license

10-1 Transmission is poor 10-29 Check for records (Trespass, etc)
10-2 Transmission is good 10-30 Stop transmitting
10-3 Stop Transmitting 10-33 Emergency - All Units Stand By
10-4 Message Received/Acknowledgement 10-35 Major Alert
10-5 Relay 10-36 Correct Time
10-6 Busy – do not call unless urgent 10-45 Fatality
10-7 Out of service 10-52 Request Ambulance
10-8 In service 10-60 Subject is negative
10-9 Repeat transmission 10-61 Subject has record - is not wanted
10-12 Transport 10-63 Positive hit - subject is wanted
10-19 Return to location or channel 10-64 Proceed with caution - dangerous
10-20 Current location 10-78 Request Immediate Assistance
10-21 Telephone 10-92 Subject in Custody
10-100 Bomb Threat
Common Hospital Radio Codes

Code Blue Cardiac Arrest

Code White Violent Patient
Code Red Fire
Code Orange Disaster – mass casualties

Page 217 of 346 Basic Training Manual Version 10 – 14 March 2017 Paragon Security ©
 Paragon Academy Basic Security Training Manual

6.4 Tactical Communications

The importance of communication in the security role cannot be stressed enough. Communication
must be tactical (calculated plan of action, designed to result in an expedient outcome) and tactful
(diplomatic) in order to accomplish desirable objectives. Remember effective communication is
a process not an event that occurs by accident. Diplomacy, negotiation and persuasion are key
components to Tactical Communication.
Diplomacy Be Tactful. Have a keen sense of what to say and to do so as to avoid offending
anyone. Think about what you are going to say before you say it. Be sensitive to situations and/or
your audience. Consider their emotional state (are they angry, frustrated, unhappy, grieving, sad,
in shock, etc.), never trivialize or dismiss people’s feelings. Consider if known their background,
culture and/or any disabilities.

Negotiate Have all the facts, be clear on what is involved. What is it that they want? Are you
able to do what they want? If not what can you offer them in the way of options? Present them
with the options and be clear on the consequence of each action. If possible and appropriate let
them choose an option.

Persuade There is a clear line between persuasion and coercion. Persuasion is the ability to
influence another’s thoughts in a positive and constructive fashion without deception, etc.
Coercion suggests the use of intimidation or force and is generally considered unethical, immoral
and wrong. Do not lie, mislead, threaten or attempt to bully people. Explain and justify your
request. It always helps to explain what you are doing and why in order to get them to cooperate
willingly.

Non-Verbal Communication:
Be mindful and aware of your body language and distance from the person you are communicating
with. Remember body language is easy to see and therefore read.
Distance Consider the diagram in figure 6.4.1. The best distance to be while attempting to
communicate with an individual is at the “Social Space” range. That is 4-6 feet away from them.
In other words not within arm’s reach. When you are closer than 4 feet you enter their “Personal”
or “Intimate” space.
This would cause most individuals a great deal of discomfort and anxiety. It would make them
feel unsafe and threatened. The only people who should be within “Personal” and “Intimate” space

Page 218 of 346 Basic Training Manual Version 10 – 14 March 2017 Paragon Security ©
 Paragon Academy Basic Security Training Manual

are those who they trust (good friends, family, significant other, or children). Being too close
would be very detrimental to your ability to successfully communicate with this individual.
Posture & Positioning Your posture should be unthreatening and not confrontational. It should
convey a relaxed and calm demeanour. Your body language should clearly convey the message
that you are “just talking” to this individual.

This can be achieved by relaxing your body and having your arms out in front of you close to your
body elbows up against your torso hands open, fingers slightly spread, palms facing inward
towards you. Use your hands to gesture and punctuate points this is commonly referred to as
“Talking with your hands”.
Your body should be slightly bladed (approximately 45 degree angle) towards the individual you
are talking with, your strong foot back (if right handed, right foot back, if left then the left foot)
and your weak foot forward shoulder width apart. Positioning yourself in this manner is done for
personal safety as it allows your hands to be up for protection against any possible attack.
Avoid body postures that could be considered threatening, offensive, aggressive or
confrontational. These can be balled fists placed on each hip or standing with your hands behind
your back in a parade rest, at ease or Military Stance. Finger-pointing while talking to a person is
aggressive. Keeping your hands in your pockets conveys the “I don’t care” attitude. Having
crossed arms conveys a “closed” body language.

Page 219 of 346 Basic Training Manual Version 10 – 14 March 2017 Paragon Security ©
 Paragon Academy Basic Security Training Manual

Figure 6.4.a

12 Ft. + Public Space

4- 12 Ft Social Space

1.5 Ft. Intimate Space

Page 220 of 346 Basic Training Manual Version 10 – 14 March 2017 Paragon Security ©
 Paragon Academy Basic Security Training Manual

6.5 Conflict Management

Approaches to resolving conflict

1. Orders given confidently, firmly and directly may be appropriate when urgent action is
required due to the serious nature of an event – for example in a life threatening emergency
2. Compromising – split the differences
3. Accommodating – one side gives in to the other
4. Collaboration – working together toward the best agreeable solution
5. Avoiding – postponing decisions
Communications
Humility (no ego) and using calming techniques are two ways of accomplishing the task of
enforcing rules and regulations while gaining compliance without forcing a subject against their
will. This is consistent with the concept of not being governed by your ego when dealing with
difficult people. If you can persuade someone to comply you will achieve much better results.
There is an old saying, “To subdue the enemy without fighting is the acme (highest level) of skill”
(The Art of War, by Sun Tzu).
Anger may be described as the emotion and behaviour that occurs as the negative expression of
frustration. When someone is experiencing strong emotion they can be considered “Drunk on
Emotion”. Individuals who are drunk on emotions act impulsively, irrationally and may be
difficult or impossible to logic/reason with. This is true for individuals who are angry. Before
you even attempt to engage and try to calm them down gauge their level of anger. Based on how
angry they are, adapt your approach to suit the situation.

Page 221 of 346 Basic Training Manual Version 10 – 14 March 2017 Paragon Security ©
 Paragon Academy Basic Security Training Manual

Four Levels of Anger:

1. Dissatisfaction (mild anger)
2. Indignation (moderate anger) –righteous anger toward what one considers unfair, cruel,
shameful or unjust treatment
3. Wrath (high anger level) – the acting out person may consider what has happened is that
they’ve been ignored, victimized, over-controlled or violated – this reaction may produce
the desire or intent to take revenge
4. Rage (extreme anger level) – loss of rationality and emotions take over. Often property
damage and assault occur when a person is enraged. Some triggers of rage include the
perception family members are being attacked if police or security professionals use force
to control someone under arrest. The perception may be the person arrested has not done
anything wrong or too much force is being used relative to the violation.
Techniques to avoid/calm anger:
Establish a positive platform to opening channels for communication by approaching them with
the “Can I help you” attitude in mind; “Good afternoon, I’m with security in the Mall how can I
help you today?” You want them to feel that you are there to help them. Be sincere.
Listen more than talk. Listening is a key component to calming them down when dealing with an
angry individual. Refer to section 6.3 for more details.
Remember body language is easy to see. If you are too close to them and exuding a threatening,
aggressive or confrontational demeanour you will increase their anxiety and may make them
angry. This will defeat your objective of calming them down. Refer to section 6.4 on Distancing,
Posture and Positioning for details.
Avoid pitfalls such as accusing “you are loitering..”; demanding “you have to tell me your
name...”; commanding “you will do...”; preaching “you know better than that...” when dealing
with an angry individual. Ask open ended questions seeking clarification and information.
Do not engage in arguments. Arguing does not contribute to resolving the situation or achieving
your objective of calming them down. Remember “It takes two to argue.” Instead use a technique
of stating “Options & Consequences”. Present them with the options available to them. Clearly
outline the consequences for each action. If appropriate allow them to choose an option. The
options presented may not include what they want to do however those are the options available
to them based on the circumstances (facts, current situation, circumstances, site/company policies
and procedures, your duties and/or the law).
Constantly monitor them, yourself and the environment for signs of increasing or decreasing
anxiety and danger cues.

Page 222 of 346 Basic Training Manual Version 10 – 14 March 2017 Paragon Security ©
 Paragon Academy Basic Security Training Manual

Am I calm or am I letting myself get caught up in the moment allowing my emotions to get
involved? Is the pitch and volume of my voice increasing or decreasing? Am I bouncing on the
tips of my toes with nervous tension? Am I allowing my emotions to dictate my actions and
responses? If you find yourself getting caught up in the moment step back and stop talking. Let
them talk while you listen, take deep breaths and calm down. If you can’t keep yourself calm
consider just walking away from the situation if able to do so.
Is there danger in the environment? Do they have friends, relatives, family members with them?
Where is help going to come from? Do you have a clear route if you need to retreat? Is there
anything in the area they can use as a weapon? Is there anything you can use as an effective barrier
between them and you for increased safety from physical attack?
Are they calming down? Is their anxiety increasing or decreasing? Is the volume and pitch of
their voice going up or down? Are they making sudden physical gestures, movements which can
indicate signs of tension and nervousness building? What is their body language and personal
demeanour telling you? Is it aggressive, confrontational or preparing to attack? Know the
Aggression Continuum. Verbal aggression precedes verbal hostility and verbal threats, physical
threats and attack (see Figure 6.5.a).

Figure 6.5.1

Physical Violence
Physical Threats
Verbal Threats
Verbal Hostility
Verbal Agitation

One common mistake to avoid while dealing with angry or volatile individuals is cornering.
Cornering is placing that individual into a situation where they have only two choices left to them,
submit or attack.. They can Submit (submit to your command/demand) or Attack (resist your
command/demand). Cornering can be accomplished through four different methods:
Contact Unless you have made a decision to arrest the individual you are dealing with and are
going to use physical force to do so do not touch them. When you touch this person you are asking
them to either submit to your touch or fight it.

Page 223 of 346 Basic Training Manual Version 10 – 14 March 2017 Paragon Security ©
 Paragon Academy Basic Security Training Manual

Angular Avoid getting too close. Keep your distance continue to try to persuade them and solicit
their cooperation. Refer to the diagram on distancing, Figure 6.4.a.If you get too close to the
subject you are requiring them to submit to your presence within their personal/intimate space or
resist.

Psychological “Sit down NOW!” Issuing direct orders/commands to an individual gives them
only two choices they can either follow that command or not.

Exit Avoid backing someone into a corner physically where their only way out is through you.
Once again this presents the individual you are dealing with only two choices. Stay in the corner
or try to escape going through you.

Many members of the public do not understand or recognise a Security Guard’s authority. When
placed in a position where they have to choose to either submit to the Security Guard or resist in
other words attack, the person often chooses to fight or resist. Avoid cornering whenever possible.
Useful phrases

1. “Please moderate your behaviour”

2. “No need to be rude”

3. “I want to help you”

These three phrases are effectively used as a pattern interrupt; the subject suddenly realizes their
own behaviour and mentally checks their rationalization and/or realizes the embarrassment
potential when third parties are present. It’s hard to be mad at somebody who wants to help you –
be genuine

4. “Please just help me do my job”

Statement four takes out the ego and the personal confrontation

5. “If it was up to me”

Statement five assumes you are following an impersonal third party’s instructions

Page 224 of 346 Basic Training Manual Version 10 – 14 March 2017 Paragon Security ©
 Paragon Academy Basic Security Training Manual

6. “Please remain calm”

Statement six assumes the subject is already calm and is easier accepted emotionally and
psychologically than the command, “Calm Down!”

7. “Nobody would like that to happen to them” instead of “I understand”

Statement seven avoids coming across as patronizing and the question “If you understand
me why don’t you agree with me?”

8 Tactical steps (verbal judo – used for persuading agitated people)

1. Greet the person

2. Identify yourself and your company or position

3. Give reasons for contacting them

4. Provide justification for contacting them

5. Request compliance

6. Persuade (Steps 2-4 of the Five Step Hard Style)

7. Make a decision (Act)

8. Close Properly & Document

Page 225 of 346 Basic Training Manual Version 10 – 14 March 2017 Paragon Security ©
 Paragon Academy Basic Security Training Manual

Six step methodology (simplified persuasion method)

1. Listen and don’t interrupt if it is productive venting. Let the subject calm down naturally

2. Acknowledge feelings – when the subject pauses, use a “statement of regret” that shows
you empathize with their position

3. Find agreement – find common ground and articulate this. Get the subject nodding in
agreement

4. Identify the problem – clearly identify and reiterate the issue of concern

5. Provide a solution – a temporary solution if a permanent solution is not within your

authority or ability

6. Close properly – thank the person

Five step hard style (control talk for difficult people)

1. Ask: (Personal & Ethical appeal) people act out of self-interest. This is a powerful
technique – Persuasion. “Sir, please remove your hood while in the mall as it is against our
rules and we would like you to enjoy your visit without the need to approach you again.”
(options & consequences)

2. Set Context: (Practical appeal) A practical appeal is often less persuasive and is used to set
context for the contact, only. “Sir if you do not follow our direction in this regard, you
will no longer be welcome. The rules are very clear in this matter. We will need to ask you
to leave.”

3. Present Options: The rational appeal is the least persuasive during the emotional thinking
phase (upset or in crisis). Rational appeal is more successful once calmed and thinking
rationally. “Sir, remove the hood or leave the mall by the exit on my right or to the left. If
you don’t take off the hood now or immediately leave, the police will attend and you will
be arrested for trespassing. There’s no need to involve the police for such a small thing is
there? The choice is yours.”

Page 226 of 346 Basic Training Manual Version 10 – 14 March 2017 Paragon Security ©
 Paragon Academy Basic Security Training Manual

4. Confirm - “Sir/Madam is there anything I can say or do to get you to comply I’d like to
think that there is.”

5. Act - Act based on what you have stipulated as consequences. When faced with resistance
vary the types of appeals you are using.

Examples

“Sir/Ma’am I understand you need to be here when the store opens; however the store is not
open yet and the public is not authorised to be here at this time, could you please leave this area?
I will be happy to direct you to the store when it opens”
“Sir/ (Ma’am) please leave the area because you are not authorized to be here. It is my job to
ensure compliance with the policies of the building and our instructions in this regard are very
clear” (Clearly, firmly and politely state the rule you are enforcing – if you can’t articulate this
well, check that your level of intervention/action is valid)
“Sir/Ma’am, you can leave by the doors on your left or your right. Please select your exit. If you
do not, we will be contacting the Police. They will arrest you for trespassing and you will be
taken through the mall in handcuffs.”
Confirm – “Sir/Ma’am is there anything I can say or do to get you to….I’d like to think that
there is.” An added benefit of this confirmation is that it can lead to onlooker support as you have
clearly exhausted all other reasonable options.
Act – appropriate actions based on the totality of the circumstances. Put into action what you have
already stated to the subject.
This five step style with roots in the Verbal Judo system is referred to as control talk and is often
used in tandem with calling back up when dealing with difficult people. The subtle show of control
when trained back up staff arrive, position correctly and demonstrate ability and experience often
leads to difficult people complying with direction and avoiding violence.
If the subject fails to comply at this stage, we need to consider who is at risk, how serious is the
crime or infraction/violation and if there is no imminent threat to people, consider disengaging,
monitoring and maintaining surveillance until police arrive and directing them to the offender.
Although this is the last step in the process, if a situation warrants calling the police, you should
consider doing so at the beginning of the contact and this action should be documented first in
reports.

Page 227 of 346 Basic Training Manual Version 10 – 14 March 2017 Paragon Security ©
 Paragon Academy Basic Security Training Manual

Three strike rule (simplest method based on the foregoing techniques)

1. Emotional Plea: Positive Consequences – You like coming to the mall don’t you?
2. Rational Plea: Negative consequences - No one needs to get barred from the site do they?
3. Personal Plea: We can work this out some other way can’t we?

Emotional Plea: Positive consequences – “You like coming to the mall don’t you?” If you
cooperate with my request you will be free to return later.”
Rational Plea: Negative consequences – “If you don’t cooperate, the police will be contacted.
There’s no need to involve the police is there?”
Personal Plea: “We can work this out some other way can’t we?”

At any given time 50% of the population will be thinking rationally and 50% emotionally. Using
both pleas covers 100% of the population. Ethically, we offer a personal plea to try and obtain
compliance.
The advantage of this system is that it is easier to remember the steps when under the stress of a
dynamic, hostile, aggressive and potentially volatile encounter as there are three simple steps that
can be easily associated by practitioners. This system uses concepts consistent with the six step
methodology and the goal is to calm and defuse a situation while gaining compliance from a
difficult subject.
Using these techniques effectively will help calm a situation and achieve better results with
obtaining compliance. Learn to derive some satisfaction by looking at each confrontation as a
challenge or “game” to achieve compliance with rules when dealing with difficult people by
speaking effectively and winning without fighting. Once again, the greatest skill is winning the
battle without fighting. Practice these methods until perfect.

Page 228 of 346 Basic Training Manual Version 10 – 14 March 2017 Paragon Security ©
 Paragon Academy Basic Security Training Manual

6.6 Section Summary

Communication is an essential tool and a valuable skill for a Security Guard. Employing good
communication techniques will allow the Security Guard to build good relationships with their
peers, clients and members of the public they interact with. It will make interacting with
individuals a good experience and help the Security Guard provide good customer service. It will
enable a Security Guard to deal with conflict and difficult individuals successfully and avoid
problems.
To communicate effectively there must be a message. The message must be sent, received and
there must be confirmation that it was received and understood for effective communication to
occur.
When communicating with others ensure you are courteous, polite, professional and pleasant.
Remember the “Golden Rule” of how to treat people “Treat others as they want to be treated.”
When dealing with conflict and difficult/angry individuals try to calm them down and persuade
them to cooperate willingly. Keep your composure. Remain calm. Do not allow your emotions
to get the better of you. NO EGO. It is not personal. I am just doing my job. You can’t control
what they do or say but you have total control of your own actions and if/when scrutinized and
asked “What happened?” you want to be able to say;
“Yes it was upsetting” ... we are human
“I exercised exceptional discipline and restraint, despite the provocation”... we are professional
“I did the right thing” ... we followed our training, policies and procedures, we did our job

Page 229 of 346 Basic Training Manual Version 10 – 14 March 2017 Paragon Security ©
 Paragon Academy Basic Security Training Manual

7.0 – Sensitivity & Diversity Awareness

7.1 Introduction

Security Guards interact with the public on a daily basis. It is important they approach individuals
with respect and avoid any biases that may impact how they interrelate with others.
In this section we will assess and address personal biases and how they affect our behaviour
including how differences impact situational dynamics.

7.2 Assessing Biases

Prejudice and Discrimination are two key components for one’s personal biases.
Prejudice is a conscious or unconscious pre-judgment of others based on their real or assumed
membership in a particular group (e.g., racial or cultural group). Most prejudices are against, rather
than for other groups or individuals.
Discrimination is the behavioral expression of prejudice: it is the act of differential treatment of
an individual or group (intentionally or unintentionally) that usually creates a disadvantage for that
individual or group.
Do you have biases? Biases can take the form of conscious or unconscious prejudice and
discrimination. When treating someone differently based on their background, sex, color, race,
sexual preference, religious background, ethnic background, mental or physical disability you are
engaging in discriminatory behavior.
There are many forms of discrimination:
• Age discrimination is discrimination on the grounds of age.
• Sexism, discrimination based on gender is defined as adverse action against another person
that would not have occurred had the person been of another gender.
• Caste discrimination. A caste is a combined social system of occupation, endogamy
(marriage within a specific social group), culture, social class, and political power such as
the old European feudal system of royalty, nobles and peasants.
• Employment discrimination refers to disabling certain people to apply and receive jobs
based on their race, age, gender, religion, sexual orientation and disability.
• Sexual orientation discrimination. Discrimination against individuals based on sexual
preference.

Page 230 of 346 Basic Training Manual Version 10 – 14 March 2017 Paragon Security ©
 Paragon Academy Basic Security Training Manual

• Language discrimination, people are sometimes subjected to different treatment because

their preferred language is associated with a particular group, class or category.
• Reverse discrimination, minority quotas (e.g. when an organization has policies that take
race, ethnicity, physical disabilities, military career, gender, or a person's parents' social
class into consideration.) discriminate against members of a dominant or majority group.
Please note that in Canada, affirmative action programs designed to offset a previous
imbalance is not reverse discrimination, as written in the Charter of Rights.
• Disability discrimination, discrimination against people with disabilities; mental,
physical or both.
• Religious discrimination, discriminating against somebody because of their religious
beliefs.
• Stereotyping is a form of discrimination. General labeling of a group of individuals such
as wrongly stating all black people are good at basketball, or all Jewish people are wealthy
and so on.

Heightening self-awareness of personal biases and controlling prejudice

Most people are not aware of their own personal biases. There are various ways to become aware
of one's own biases and prejudices. One way is to ask questions such as:
• Are there any groups whose members, in principle, I would not invite into my home, or
include in my circle of friends?
• What groups do I perceive as most different from myself? Why do I perceive them as
different? How might this affect my evaluation of their qualifications if they were
candidates in a selection process?
• Are there any groups that I prefer to associate or work with based solely on such
characteristics as race, religion or culture? (Sometimes subtle prejudice can underlie
preferences based on group membership alone; for example, preferring to work with Asian
women because of the belief that they are less assertive or confrontational than Caucasian
women.)

Page 231 of 346 Basic Training Manual Version 10 – 14 March 2017 Paragon Security ©
 Paragon Academy Basic Security Training Manual

Other insights into personal prejudices may be gained by analyzing personal reactions to culturally
relevant issues such as interracial marriage, Canada's immigration policies, Aboriginal rights
issues, employment equity, etc. Questioning government policy or "conventional wisdom" is not
a sure sign of prejudice. However, if your conclusions lead you to think that you have attitudes
that may influence your behavior toward certain groups/types of individuals, you should ask
yourself about measures you can take to become more objective about members of certain groups.
Various ways to reduce prejudice are available. For example, you can use your emotional reactions
(positive and negative) to alert you to the possibility that personal biases may be at play and that
alternate interpretations may be possible. You can also acknowledge and seek information to
disprove the stereotypes and prejudices you have about others. Voluntary attendance at a workshop
or seminar on diversity, or working on a shared objective with people of other races or cultures
can also provide opportunities to perceive and control biases you may hold about other groups.
7.3 How Differences Impact Situational Dynamics

As stated at the beginning of this section Security Guards interact with individuals on a daily basis.
This interaction will be impacted by the differences between the individuals. These differences
may be cultural, religious, language, gender, sexual preference, ethnic background, age, ethnicity,
or physical/mental disability.
Cultural differences can have a significant impact on interaction between individuals. Culture is
something that all of us learn from birth. It is not something that certain people or groups have
and others do not. Culture can be described as being comprised of learned values and behaviors
shared by a group.
• Values are ideas, attitudes, assumptions and beliefs to which strong feelings are attached.
• Behaviors are outward expressions of values.
Although these shared values and behaviors can be observed among people from the same cultural
group, individual diversity exists even among those who share the same cultural background. In
addition, cultures also change over time and through contact with other cultures.
Both at work and outside of work, people's thoughts, feelings, actions, reactions, and values are
influenced by their personal characteristics and by their culture.

For example, certain cultures place a high value on aspiring to change things, demonstrating linear
thinking, and meeting conflict head on; other cultures place a higher value on prudently accepting
things as they are, demonstrating holistic thinking, and avoiding conflict. As a result, people with

Page 232 of 346 Basic Training Manual Version 10 – 14 March 2017 Paragon Security ©
 Paragon Academy Basic Security Training Manual

different cultural backgrounds may have different understandings of what is appropriate or

desirable.
Religious differences can influence an individual’s behavior towards situations based on their
religion’s beliefs and teachings. Different religions have different sets of beliefs and values that
they teach and promote. As a result people with different religious backgrounds may have
different views/opinions on what is appropriate or desirable influencing their reaction towards a
situation or individual.
In order to overcome and deal with Cultural and Religious differences think “outside of the box”.
Do not assume that the individuals you are dealing with will have the same set of values, principles
and beliefs as you do. Understanding this will help you avoid a common mistake of “logic dictates
that they will do X under these circumstances...” Individuals from different cultural and/or
religious backgrounds can react very differently under the same circumstances based on those
differences.
Language differences can cause significant communication barriers. A Security Guard can
expect to come across individuals who do not have a good command of the English language or
who do not speak it at all. This would create a challenge when attempting to communicate with
this individual. Slow down your speech use simple words/language, be lucid.
One common mistake to avoid is talking “louder” in an attempt to get them to understand better.
They do not understand English. They are not hearing impaired and yelling will not help them
understand. Consider attempting to find someone who speaks the same language as they do if
appropriate or available.
Differences of Gender can have an impact on a situation. Consider this circumstance; an angry
female individual dealing with a female Security Guard or a big burly male Security Guard. Who
would she likely respond to better? Who would she feel more comfortable with? Does she feel
more threatened or less threatened when dealing with the female vs. male Security Guard?
Ask yourself would I treat a female/male differently? What if I was arresting them? What if I had
to use force to do this? Be aware of these potential issues/considerations that may arise when
dealing with the opposite sex and respond appropriately to negate the impact of the difference.
Age differences can sometimes cause difficulties in situations. For example a very young Security
Guard may find it challenging to exert their authority when dealing with a mature/elderly
individual who does not take them seriously due to the age differences.
The reverse is true as well. Personal biases may come into play when a Security Guard would
treat the individual they are interacting with differently based on their age. Young individuals will
react differently when dealing with someone much older than they are vs. someone their age. The
same is true for mature/elderly individuals.

Page 233 of 346 Basic Training Manual Version 10 – 14 March 2017 Paragon Security ©
 Paragon Academy Basic Security Training Manual

One common method for negating and dealing with age differences is keeping your interaction
professional and business like at all times. Address most people formally, using “Sir” or “Ma’am”
regardless of their age. This would keep the communication professional, in other words you are
just doing your job and not passing inappropriate judgments.
Persons with mental and physical disabilities
There are many forms of mental and physical disabilities that a person may have. Listed below
are some common disabilities that a Security Guard may encounter.
General guidelines for dealing with individuals with disabilities is; present a sensitive and helpful
approach, show compassion and empathy. Offer help if they look like they need it but be respectful
of their dignity and if they refuse do not insist.
Different types of disabilities can create different challenges for a Security Guard when interacting
with people.
Individuals with a speech disability may be inappropriately referred to as “dumb" individuals.
Interacting with speech challenged people would require some thought and initiative. Individuals
who are unable to speak may communicate using sign language. Some of them use reading and
writing. One way to overcome communication barriers with deaf individuals is to offer them a
pen and paper and to write down what you want to say to them instead.
Blind individuals would often use a white cane to help them find obstacles in their path or they
may use a “seeing eye dog” or guide dog. Regardless of the type of facility you are protecting, a
Security Guard must never request an individual with a vision disability leave their “seeing eye
dog outside.” A “seeing eye dog” is not considered a pet. Asking a vision impaired person to leave
their dog outside violates their charter rights.
Some individuals who have mental disorders may present a risk to the safety of the Security Guard
or public, if the person is violent. Most people with mental illness function well within society and
do not have any contact with law enforcement or security. Those who have unpredictable and/or
violent behaviors may respond well to low levels of intervention if handled correctly. If a Security
Guard is dealing with a person behaving erratically it may be appropriate to get help and notify
the authorities.

Autism is a developmental disorder that usually manifests in childhood causing the child to relate
differently to their surroundings and stimuli. This disorder often makes it hard to communicate
with and relate to others. With autism the different areas of the brain work differently. Behaviors
for individuals with autism are very widely varied.

Page 234 of 346 Basic Training Manual Version 10 – 14 March 2017 Paragon Security ©
 Paragon Academy Basic Security Training Manual

Due to the wide variance in behaviors it is very difficult to predict how autistic persons will
respond to a situation, interaction or circumstances. One autistic individual can have a response
that will be drastically different from another under the same circumstances. It is important you
are aware of the existence of this disorder when interacting with the public so if you contact a
subject with a suspected autistic condition you can adjust your style and approach.
Many adults with autism have a “guardian” or assistant who may be a social worker or mental
health specialist. If interacting with an individual who has autism look for a “guardian” or a
“caretaker” in the area before attempting to engage and interfere with them. If they do not have a
“guardian” with them and you do interact with them maintain the same social distance you would
with any other individual. Do not yell or speak loudly. Adopt a friendly, pleasant manner and
maintain a non-aggressive approach. Speak slowly and calmly, and show patience.

7.4 Section Summary

Every individual has personal biases, likes and dislikes. We are all a product of our own family,
community, social-economic background and these impact our belief systems. A Security Guard
on duty and in uniform should always make decisions based on their duties, responsibilities,
policies, procedures and/or the Law. Personal likes and dislikes should not factor into the decision
making process of a professional Security Guard. Security Guards are expected to approach people
and situations fairly and be impartial regardless of the background, gender, religion, sexual
orientation, disability, etc of the subject.
During the course of their duties a Security Guard will interact with many individuals and
differences will be encountered. These differences can impact a situation. Awareness of these
differences and the challenges they pose is the key to overcoming personal bias. The ideal Security
Guard treats everyone with courtesy and respect. A Security Guard must maintain a helpful
attitude and conduct their self with the highest degree of professionalism.

Page 235 of 346 Basic Training Manual Version 10 – 14 March 2017 Paragon Security ©
 Paragon Academy Basic Security Training Manual

8.0 – Health & Safety and Emergency Response Preparation

8.1 Introduction

Security Guards need to understand and practice Health and Safety procedures in the work place
as well as be prepared for Emergency Response. This section will cover the Occupational Health
and Safety Act, Workplace Hazardous Materials Information System, Emergency Response
Preparation and Common Hazards.

Security Guards also need to be comfortable when responding to emergency situations and familiar
with various procedures. Response needs to be coordinated with organizational requirements and
personnel. This section will help you understand the need for emergency response procedures and
assist in developing and understanding plans that are vital to the security role.

8.2 Occupational Health and Safety Act

There are certain obligations for both the employee and the employer under the Occupational
Health & Safety Act. Employees must work safely. This is accomplished by wearing any necessary
protective equipment, following safe work practices and work instructions. Security Guards will
find their work instructions set out in the Post Orders.
Security Guards need to be vigilant and aware of their surroundings, identifying hazards to ensure
the site is free of hazards for their own safety as well as the general public or other occupants.
If a Security Guard is on duty and injured, there is an obligation to report the injury immediately
and cooperate with the employer to investigate the accident or incident and complete the forms
required under the law. These will include an employee’s report of injury, an employer’s report of
injury and a functional abilities form that must be completed by your doctor.
You must work with your employer and cooperate with work place safety audits and task analyses
to ensure the workplace remains safe for everyone. You also have the right to refuse unsafe work.
That does not mean that you may quit the job and leave site if there is an unsafe condition unless
critical and immediately life threatening, but you should notify your employer and remain on the
site until the matter can be corrected.

In Ontario, employers with more than 25 employees must have a joint health and safety committee
with representation by employees as well as management. It is also an obligation of the employer

Page 236 of 346 Basic Training Manual Version 10 – 14 March 2017 Paragon Security ©
 Paragon Academy Basic Security Training Manual

to provide the employees with a safe work environment and to establish a positive environment
that values safety and initiate various safety programs.
Most employers in Ontario also have a safe and early return to work program, allowing employees
to return to their jobs in a graduated fashion, providing light or reduced duties for those not ready
to engage in their full role. This allows employees to secure their full income sooner.
Although most Security Guards will be working in a white collar type environment, there is still a
potential for injury due to many factors, not least of which is that thousands of people are injured
in office environments every year. This concept will be elaborated on further under section 8.4.11.

8.3 WHMIS - Workplace Hazardous Materials Information System

What is WHMIS?

WHMIS is a Canadian System which is a part of a federal law package called Bill C-70. It was
implemented by the Ontario Legislature on June 30, 1987 and helps protect workers through
education and prevention. WHMIS provides this protection by giving you the “right to know”
about risks you may face from exposure to workplace hazardous materials.
WHMIS was amended in 2015 to include GHS- the Globally Harmonized System.
WHMIS was set up to protect workers who work with or near hazardous materials.
WHMIS is a legislated system that provides information regarding the dangers and safe handling
of materials used in the workplace. The system was initiated and developed through joint
consultation between representatives from industry, labour, and government. The legislation
requires suppliers of hazardous materials (referred to as controlled products) to provide specific
information on their products through material safety data sheets and labels. Employers who use
products are required by provincial regulations to inform their workers of the risks related to the
materials and to implement safe work practices.
The WHMIS system is an important component of the duties of an employer with respect to all
chemical and biological substances.

WHMIS was set up to protect workers who work with or near hazardous materials.
WHMIS requires employers to:
1. Label containers of hazardous materials;
2. Provide a Safety Data Sheet (SDS) with information about the hazardous material;
3. Provide workers with training about how to work safely with the hazardous materials.

Page 237 of 346 Basic Training Manual Version 10 – 14 March 2017 Paragon Security ©
 Paragon Academy Basic Security Training Manual

This “three prong attack” is sometimes referred to as the WHMIS Triad

WHMIS Is Law

WHMIS is a legislated system that provides information regarding the dangers and
safe handling of materials used in the workplace. The system was initiated and
developed through joint consultation between representatives from industry,
labour, and government. The legislation requires suppliers of hazardous materials
(referred to as controlled products) to provide specific information on their products
through material safety data sheets and labels. Employers who use products are
required by provincial regulations to inform their workers of the risks related to the
materials and to implement safe work practices.
The WHMIS system is an important component of the duties of an employer with respect to all
chemical and biological substances.

WHMIS extends through both Federal and Provincial legislative domains:

1. Federal legislation - because it involves the sale and import of controlled products
(hazardous materials), and
2. Provincial legislation - once a controlled product enters a workplace, jurisdiction shifts
over the products from federal to provincial governments (except for workplaces under
federal jurisdiction, where the provisions of the amended Canada Labour Code apply).

Provincial Legislation

The workplace falls under provincial jurisdiction and is governed by the Occupational Health and
Safety Act (OHSA).
This Act outlines the role of the employer, the supervisor and the employee in the workplace. It
places duties on these groups to ensure that the worksite is made a safe and healthy place to work.
The Act gives the worker the right to refuse unsafe work, the right to know about hazards on the
job and the right to representation on a Joint Health and Safety Committee.
To implement WHMIS in Ontario, the legislature amended the OHSA by means of Bill 79, passed
on June 29, 1987.
A WHMIS regulation was adopted under the amended OHSA; this regulation sets out the employer
duties under WHMIS. Bill 79 also amended the act to cover hazardous physical agents such as

Page 238 of 346 Basic Training Manual Version 10 – 14 March 2017 Paragon Security ©
 Paragon Academy Basic Security Training Manual

noise, vibration and radiation; so that the supplier and employer provide appropriate information
respecting the device which emits hazardous physical agents.
An additional feature of the bill includes the requirement for workplace inventories; the employer
is required to develop and maintain an inventory of hazardous materials and hazardous physical
agents in the workplace.

Who Must Be Trained In WHMIS?

As a Security Guard you should not have to work directly with hazardous materials. However, you
have the right to know about the ones that are used at your site, as you may be exposed to them
while you are on patrol or dealing with issues on the site. Anyone who works with hazardous
materials or could be affected by a leak or a spill of chemical or biological products will require
training.
However not all workers are required to have the same level of training. For example, training for
warehouse staff may only need to include the safe handling of products and what to do if a spill
occurs. Industrial workers will need extensive training on the safe use of all hazardous products in
the workplace.
Office workers and retail cashiers, for example, do not require such an intensive training program.
Security Guards should be well aware of the different products at their job sites. A trained worker
should be contacted immediately should a guard have any concerns about products marked with
any of these labels. When a hazardous material meets the classification criteria of any of the
WHMIS classes it is called a controlled product.

Page 239 of 346 Basic Training Manual Version 10 – 14 March 2017 Paragon Security ©
 Paragon Academy Basic Security Training Manual

Hazardous Materials Pictograms

Pictograms are graphic images that immediately show the user of a hazardous
product what type of hazard is present. With a quick glance, you can see, for
example, that the product is flammable, or if it might be a health hazard.

Most pictograms have a distinctive red border; "a square set on one of its points".
Inside this border is a symbol that represents the potential hazard (e.g., fire, health
hazard, corrosive, etc.). Together, the symbol and the border are referred to as a
pictogram. Pictograms are assigned to specific hazard classes or categories.

The graphic in this table shows hazard pictograms. The bold type is the name given
to the pictogram; the words in the brackets describe the hazard.

Page 240 of 346 Basic Training Manual Version 10 – 14 March 2017 Paragon Security ©
 Paragon Academy Basic Security Training Manual

Supplier Labels

There is no set format for a supplier label. Labels must be in English and French. They may be
bilingual (as one label), or be presented as two labels (one each in English and French).

Labels will require the following:

The pictogram, signal word, and hazard statement are to be grouped together, clearly and
prominently displayed on the container and easy to read (e.g., you can see it easily without using
any item except corrective glasses). It must be in contrast with other information on the product or
container.

An example of a bilingual label is shown

Page 241 of 346 Basic Training Manual Version 10 – 14 March 2017 Paragon Security ©
 Paragon Academy Basic Security Training Manual

8.4 Emergency Response Preparation

8.4.1 Legal Duties

Duty of Care
Duty of care is a legal term denoting that anyone performing an act that could hurt others, adhere
to a reasonable standard of care. This includes the requirement to protect the public with
watchfulness, attention, caution and prudence. The standard is to use the same level of care that a
reasonable person in the circumstances would.
If a person's actions do not meet this standard of care, then the acts are considered negligent, and
any damages resulting may be claimed in a lawsuit for negligence. It is the role of a Security Guard
to protect people, property and information. They are responsible to a variety of people:
The employer
As a Security Guard, you have a responsibility to your employer for the security and protection of
property. This involves:
• The responsibility to make every effort to ensure premises and property are protected in an
appropriate and effective fashion against a variety of natural and man-made threats
• Preventing, detecting and reacting appropriately to the commission of criminal and quasi-
criminal actions on or against the property of the client
• The obligation to perform these duties in a way that enables the client to have confidence
that they will not lose business or have to pay a substantial civil claim because of the
conduct of security services.
The public
Security is normally assigned the duty of protecting the public from loss or injury. This includes a
responsibility to interact with law enforcement officials and the Justice system, where necessary,
such as apprehending and detaining someone who has committed a criminal offence. Security may
be able to supplement the efforts of police, performing preliminary investigations or securing
crime scenes until the police can arrive.
Security personnel may also be a valuable source of information to the police. In emergencies,
people may look to figures of authority for leadership and guidance. A Security Guard is likely to
be seen as an authority figure. Security Guards also possess information that would assist
emergency personnel in times of crisis.
Use your knowledge in an appropriate manner. For example, by directing firefighters to the
easiest/best way to get to the scene of the fire or to the scene of the industrial accident that has

Page 242 of 346 Basic Training Manual Version 10 – 14 March 2017 Paragon Security ©
 Paragon Academy Basic Security Training Manual

occurred on a work site more quickly than they could have found it otherwise. Security may also
be able to warn emergency crews about danger zones within the site.
Where criminal charges have been laid as the result of information a Security Guard gave to the
Police, and the proper procedures were followed in making the arrest, the Security Guard will be
expected to testify that the evidence was legally acquired, produce and/or identify the exhibits,
identify the accused, and present testimony to the court in a professional manner.
A Security Guard should recognize that he or she is a professional and is involved in a position
that involves tremendous responsibility. Often security is responsible for protecting hundreds of
thousands or even millions of dollars of property and equipment. Consequently, the guard must
act in a serious and responsible manner during the performance of his or her duties.

8.4.2 Fire Emergencies

Legal Aspects of Fire Safety

There are many reasons a property owner may choose to hire a contractor to provide security
services, but the motivation for doing so often begins with the need to meet legal and insurance
policy specifications as they relate to fire safety.
A Fire Emergency is defined as the scene of an actual fire and also the scene of a fire alarm.
The Fire Protection & Prevention Act is a legal document containing the laws that allow the
province to create the administration of the Fire Marshall’s office. The Ontario Fire Code is a legal
document containing the provincial laws governing all aspects of fire safety, fire prevention,
response to fire alarms and actual fires, and the investigation of fire scenes.
A Fire Safety Plan is a legal document, which is approved by the local fire department and
specifies the legal responsibilities of the site owner and agents of the owner with respects to fire
safety. The Fire Safety Plan will provide details regarding the specific duties that each department,
including security, is tasked with during a fire alarm or actual fire. It will also include the technical
specifications of the building(s) and fire control systems deployed there, as well as detailed maps
of each floor.
An Owner is defined by the Fire Code as a person or organization in care and control of a property.
The actual owner, whose name appears on the deed for the property, may delegate others to act as
their agent. Security Guards are often conducting their duties at times when all other persons of
authority at a property are absent.
Additionally, during normal business hours, a Security Guard may be the designated first
responder at a site (Example - maintains a continuous presence, has possession of the master keys

Page 243 of 346 Basic Training Manual Version 10 – 14 March 2017 Paragon Security ©
 Paragon Academy Basic Security Training Manual

and has been trained on fire procedures). It is during those times that the Security Guard meets the
legal definition of being an owner (Example – supervisory staff).
Despite advances in technology, there is no substitute for a human presence. All of the automated
systems for detecting, reporting, and suppressing fires are intended to act as aids and back-ups, not
replacements, for emergency personnel. The most important actions that a Security Guard can and
must take in order to preserve life, prevent injuries, and limit property damage during a fire
emergency are:
1. Ensure that the Fire Department has been notified of the emergency and that fire
crews will be coming to the site.
2. Ensure that the building and equipment have been prepared for the arrival of the
Fire Department so that there is no time wasted once they arrive on-site.
Shift Preparation
There are a number of critical items that each Security Guard should verify upon commencing
duty to ensure that the guard is aware of the status of building fire control systems and that vital
equipment is present and operable.
The following points should be checked by a Security Guard at the start of each work shift and
these checks should be recorded in the Guard’s memo book, as well as on the Daily Occurrence
Report.
1. The overall system status as displayed at the Main Fire Panel.
2. The presence of the site Fire Safety Plan document.
3. The presence of the site Firefighter’s Keys.
4. The presence of the list of Persons Requiring Assistance
5. The setting of the Elevator Automatic Recall Device.

The Nature of Fire

No single hazard represents a greater threat to life and property than fire. Fire requires three
components being heat, fuel and oxygen.

Page 244 of 346 Basic Training Manual Version 10 – 14 March 2017 Paragon Security ©
 Paragon Academy Basic Security Training Manual

The four stages of fire are:

1. Incipient - Invisible products or combustion are giving off no flame and smoke is not
visible.
2. Smouldering - Smoke is now visible, no flame or appreciable heat.
3. Flame - The fire is born. Flame and smoke are now visible however, heat is still low
4. Heat - Heat is intense and growing rapidly - air is heated and expanding.

Fire is usually classified into four groups. This system of categorization provides information
regarding the types of equipment most suitable for fighting the fire and hazards:
Figure 8.4.2(1)

The size and type of materials burning will determine the potential intensity, toxicity, duration and
spread of the fire. The potential fuel consists not only of stored materials such as office supplies,
files, raw materials for manufacturing and cleaning supplies, but also includes the fixtures such
as drapes, wall coverings, ceiling tiles, wooden doors, furniture, and similar materials.

A formula, often used by fire fighters to estimate an increase in the size of a fire states that, a fire
will double in size for each minute that passes.
Example: A single waste basket catches fire at 1000 hrs
• At 1001 hrs the fire is 2 waste baskets in size
• At 1002 hrs the fire is 4 waste baskets in size
• At 1003 hrs the fire is 8 waste baskets in size
• This pattern of growth continues and by 1007 hrs the fire is 128 waste baskets in
size

Page 245 of 346 Basic Training Manual Version 10 – 14 March 2017 Paragon Security ©
 Paragon Academy Basic Security Training Manual

The Hazards of Fire

The first and most obvious hazards presented by fire are the effects of heat and burning. There are
also a number of other hazards presented by fire
Smoke is a visible gas that can be both a pre-cursor and a by-product of fire. Smoke generally
rises and will eventually infiltrate any area that is not sealed in a manner that makes it air-tight.
Smoke poses a general respiratory hazard and may also be extremely toxic. Additionally, the
presence of smoke can result in loss of visibility, which can lead to disorientation and inability to
avoid obstacles. Inhaling smoke, even smoke that is not filled with extreme toxins, can lead to
immediate and long-term health hazards. Breathing air contaminated with smoke can lead to
unconsciousness and death.
Areas contaminated with smoke should be avoided. If smoke is already present in an area, one
should stay close to the ground while moving towards the nearest escape route. Filtering breathing
air through a wet cloth will aid in preventing the inhalation of airborne particulates, but will not
be effective in removing the gaseous portions of the smoke.
Vapours are non-visible gases that can be both a pre-cursor and a by-product of fire. Vapours can
often be detected by the odour that is present in the area however some types of vapours will be
odourless. Vapours may be lighter than air causing them to rise, or, heavier than air and sink
towards the ground level. Vapours will eventually infiltrate any area that is not sealed in a manner
that makes it airtight.
Vapours pose a general respiratory hazard and may also be extremely toxic. Vapours can also be
highly volatile and may present an additional fire hazard as they can be ignited by a spark or a
flame. Examples of substances that can produce this type of hazard are gasoline and varsol.
Areas contaminated with vapours should be avoided. If vapours are already present in an area one
should move towards the nearest escape route, and try to minimize breathing until an area with
less contaminated air is reached.
Structural Damage is often found in areas that have been affected by fire. The heat generated by
the fire can weaken load bearing components of a building such as truss beams. Collapsing floors
and ceilings are also often found in areas that have been affected by fire. The weight of water in
use as a suppressant can also contribute to the weakening of those components. Also, cold water
coming into contact with heated glass may result in a shrapnel type of hazard. In addition to those
components, other elements found in buildings such as decorative wall and ceiling coverings or
other fixtures that have been damaged by heat and water can present hazards such as falling debris.

Page 246 of 346 Basic Training Manual Version 10 – 14 March 2017 Paragon Security ©
 Paragon Academy Basic Security Training Manual

Shock Hazards can occur when the insulation on electrical wiring is damaged by heat, causing
the current carrying wires within to become exposed. Additionally, areas where sprinkler systems
have been activated can present shock hazards when the release of water takes place at or near
electrical rooms.
Fire Control Systems
Fire Control Systems consist of several components that operate in conjunction with each other
and provide an automated means of
1. Detecting fire by the use of sensors
2. Reporting fire by emitting audible and visual electronic signals
3. Suppressing fire by releasing extinguishing agents
There are two basic variations of fire control systems. One is referred to as a Single Stage system.
The other is referred to as a Two Stage system.
In a single stage system a fire alarm will cause an audible Evacuation signal to be broadcast
throughout the site. This will typically be in the form of a mechanical bell, or an electronic siren
or tone. An Evacuation signal means that people in the area the signal is sounding in should leave
the area.
In a two stage system a fire alarm will cause an Evacuation signal to be broadcast to an area where
the sensors have detected a fire condition. The remainder of the site will receive an Alert signal.
An Alert signal that is not acknowledged within five minutes will be automatically upgraded to an
Evacuation signal by the system, An Alert signal means that people where the signal is sounding
should remain where they are , but be ready to leave if the signal changes to an Evacuation signal.

Fire Alarm Panels

The brain of a fire control system is the Fire Alarm Panel. It is an electronic device that ties together
all the components of a fire control system. On many sites there are multiple panels which are
connected to the same central processor.
The Main Fire Alarm Panel is often located at a main entranceway or main lobby area. In some
facilities a separate room called the Communications and Control Facility (CACF) or Life Safety
Room is where the main panel can be found. Alternate locations would be in electrical,
mechanical, or other similar service rooms.
This type of panel collects signals from sensors and provides a display that gives detailed
information as to the type of sensor and location of the sensor that is sending a signal. There will
be controls allowing the user to acknowledge, silence and reset the circuits providing such signals.

Page 247 of 346 Basic Training Manual Version 10 – 14 March 2017 Paragon Security ©
 Paragon Academy Basic Security Training Manual

A Sub-Panel is typically found at a building entrance. This type of panel will provide a duplication
of the display appearing at the main panel and will usually have fewer user controls available.
Depending on the site, the sub-panel or main fire panel might be referred to as an Annunciator
Panel.

There are three basic types of signals:

Fire Alarm
A fire alarm signal will cause an audible alert to be broadcast throughout the site. This is in
addition to audible and visual indicators which will appear at the fire panel itself.
Trouble signal
A Trouble signal will cause an audible and visual alert to appear at the fire panel itself. This
generally indicates an electrical or mechanical fault within the system that will require the
attention of a service technician.
Supervisory signal
A Supervisory signal will cause an audible and visual alert to appear at the fire panel itself.
This generally indicates that a key component of the fire control system is not operating within
normal limits. These types of signals are typically more serious than trouble signals and if not
addressed problems could cause a full fire alarm.

Resetting Fire Panels

A fire panel that is reporting a fire alarm must not be reset until a reset has been authorized by
the Fire Department. The resetting of the fire panel after a fire alarm is the responsibility of the
building owner, not the Fire Department. It is always advisable to try and achieve a reset at the fire
panel before the Fire Department has left the site.
A critical point to consider during reset procedures is that the root cause of the alarm such as a
smoke detector or a manual pull station must be reset before the main panel can be fully reset.
Communications
In addition to the functions noted above, most modern systems will provide a voice
communications capability.
An Emergency Voice Communications system provides a means to broadcast voice messages
throughout the facility. These systems may also be referred to as Public Address (PA) systems. In
most modern versions of these systems the operator is able to select specific areas of the site that
messages will be broadcasts to, or, may select a setting that will broadcast to all areas of the site

Page 248 of 346 Basic Training Manual Version 10 – 14 March 2017 Paragon Security ©
 Paragon Academy Basic Security Training Manual

simultaneously, known as an “All Call.” In the most modern systems there may be an option for
using pre-recorded voice messages that inform the building occupants of different emergency
conditions.
One important point to consider is that upon the activation of the PA microphone, there will be a
one minute delay before the microphone can be used to make an announcement. This one minute
inhibit feature is in place to ensure compliance with the laws of the province, which mandate that
the bells must ring for one full minute before any interruption of bells occurs.
Firefighters Telephones, typically located near stairwells in red coloured cabinets, are linked to a
master handset located at the main fire panel. These telephones do not provide a direct line to the
Fire Department, but rather, are in place to be used by firefighters or other persons to talk to the
panel operator during a fire emergency. During a fire emergency there will be a firefighter
stationed at the fire panel.
Alarm Monitoring Stations are contracted services that are located off-site and receive electronic
signals from the client site. Signals from the fire panel are transmitted via telephone lines to a
computerized monitoring system that identifies the site the alarm is originating from and the type
of alarm being received such as a fire alarm or a trouble alarm. These services are not intended to
replace on-site staff and it is your obligation to call 911 in the event of a fire emergency. The true
value of alarm monitoring services is realized at sites that are unattended by a live person or when
on-site personnel are unable to call for assistance.

Initiating Devices
Initiating devices are the electro-mechanical devices that send signals to the fire panel and cause
it to report a fire alarm. Some initiating devices can operate automatically while others are
manually activated by a person.
Smoke Detectors commonly use one of two technologies to detect smoke -- ionization or
photoelectric. Smoke detectors will be found deployed in common areas and routes of egress, but
are not suitable for use in areas that are dusty or unheated.
Heat Detectors are devices that react to changes in temperature. Heat detectors commonly use one
of two technologies to detect heat – fusible link and rate of rise. Heat detectors are found deployed
in areas that are dusty or unheated.
Water Flow Detectors are devices that react to the movement of water in sprinkler pipes. This is
achieved by installing a water paddle into the sprinkler pipe and connecting it to an electronic
circuit.

Page 249 of 346 Basic Training Manual Version 10 – 14 March 2017 Paragon Security ©
 Paragon Academy Basic Security Training Manual

Manual Pull Stations are devices that respond to deliberate activation by a human being. When the
switch is pulled down from the normal position, an electronic signal is sent to the fire panel,
causing a fire alarm to be reported.
A manual pull station that has been activated will cause a fire alarm to register at the fire panel. In
a building with a two stage system the alarm registered will be a second stage (evacuation) alert
in the area the pull station is located in and a first stage (alert) in other areas of the site. In some
buildings, activating the pull station will expose a keyway that can be used to advance the overall
alarm to second stage (evacuation) for all areas of the site. Verifying that you have a key for this
task on the security key ring is an essential part of the shift start routine for all Security Guards.
Some manual pull stations are fitted with a small glass rod that is broken when the pull station has
been activated. Although the device can be reset without doing so, a replacement rod should be
installed. Pull stations that do not feature the glass rod generally require that a small screwdriver
or similar tool be used in order to properly reset the pull station.
Sprinkler Systems
A sprinkler system is a network of pipes and pumps which distribute water throughout a site. The
two most common types of sprinkler systems are a wet system and a dry system. Wet Systems
have water present at all times in the pipes. These systems are generally found in areas of buildings
that are heated. Dry Systems are used in unheated areas where pipes might freeze in cold weather.
Water is held back in dry systems with air pressure. When a fire alarm occurs the system allows
water to flow into the pipes.
Stand Pipes are the vertical pipes that serve water to the Fire Hose Cabinets. This portion of a
system does not release water automatically, but can be used manually to release water to suppress
a fire.
Siamese Connections are water intake connectors and are located on the exterior of buildings.
These connections are for use by fire department personnel exclusively. The use of these
connections allows water from an external source to be pumped into the network of sprinkler pipes
within the building.
Sprinkler Heads are the opening through which water is discharged in order to suppress the fire.
Sprinkler heads have a fuse which will melt when the surrounding temperature exceeds a specific
point. The fuse of a sprinkler head is not user serviceable and the sprinkler head requires
replacement once it has been used. A sprinkler head is not “gang connected” to other sprinkler
heads which means that only the sprinkler head that is activated will discharge water.
The Fire Pump is a mechanical device that moves water at increased pressure throughout the
system and will compensate for the effects of gravity to allow water to flow at an increased rate,
in any direction. The Jockey Pump is a smaller pump that is used to compensate for deficiencies

Page 250 of 346 Basic Training Manual Version 10 – 14 March 2017 Paragon Security ©
 Paragon Academy Basic Security Training Manual

in the required pressure within a system. The purpose of the Jockey Pump is to save wear and tear
on the main Fire Pump.
Alternate Suppression Systems
In addition to sprinkler systems, there are suppression systems that release agents other than water
for the purpose of suppressing fires. The agent released may be a fire retardant chemical powder
or a gas. There are a number of variations of these types of systems and new technology is being
developed and deployed constantly.
These alternate types of systems are most often found in computer or equipment rooms where the
use of water would cause significant permanent damage to the equipment deployed in those rooms.
The agents released by these systems may be a health risk or create an environment hazard and it
is essential that guards become familiar with the technical details of any such systems in use at
their site. Once a fire has been detected by the system the alarm is activated.
There is a built-in delay before release of the suppression agent, which will allow the room
occupants to evacuate before the agent is released. There is generally an Abort control that can be
used by room occupants to cancel the activation of the system. When the exit delay countdown
has expired, the suppression agent is released. One example of this type of system is FM-200
Manually Operated Equipment
In addition to automated suppression systems there will be equipment that is operated manually in
order to suppress an active fire.
Fire Hose Cabinets are found situated near exits and other critical areas. These cabinets contain a
valve that is connected to the stand pipe and a large diameter hose that is stored in a folded or
rolled-up configuration. Additionally, there is generally a portable fire extinguisher stored in the
cabinet. This equipment is in place so that it can be used to clear an escape route when there is no
other option available.
A critical detail when using a hose from one of these cabinets is that the hose must be fully
extended from its stored configuration before the stand pipe valve has been opened
Fire Extinguishers may be filled with a liquid, powder, foam, or gas type of fire suppressing
material.
There is also a gauge that indicates whether or not the extinguisher is functional. The trigger
mechanism will have a safety device which consists of a locking pin that must be removed (pulled)
before the trigger lever can be activated. Fire extinguishers are classified by the type of fire they
effectively fight. Multiple class extinguishers are very common such as ABC extinguishers. Fire
extinguishers should be regularly inspected by Security Guards while on patrol to ensure they are
still available for use and are fully charged.

Page 251 of 346 Basic Training Manual Version 10 – 14 March 2017 Paragon Security ©
 Paragon Academy Basic Security Training Manual

Kitchen Systems are typically located over the cooking area in a restaurant type of environment.
These systems are typically activated by a switch or a pull-type lever. The fire suppressing agents
released by these systems will be similar to those found in a portable extinguisher.
Elevators in a fire emergency
When there is a fire alarm the elevators will return to the ground floor. If the fire alarm is
originating from the ground floor they may return to the second floor level. Once the elevators
have come to rest at one of these levels, the car doors will remain in the open position and normal
user activated controls become inoperative to prevent persons from taking the elevator back to
another level of the site.
In a typical configuration there will be a keyway located at the exterior of the elevators that controls
the automated recall function. In order for the automatic recall function to be available during a
fire alarm, the setting at that keyway should be “Auto”. If for any reason the elevators fail to recall
automatically during a fire alarm this same keyway can be used to manually recall the elevators
by turning the keyway to the “On” position. Elevators must be reset after an all clear.
Firefighter’s Elevators are configured differently from standard passenger elevators. These are the
elevators which will be used by firefighting crews during a fire emergency. The firefighter’s
elevator can be identified by a sign depicting a firefighter’s hat.
Most elevator cars have the capability of being operated in fire service mode, however firefighting
crews will always prefer to use the dedicated cars. There will be a keyway on the car interior with
a separate key that is used to enable fire service mode.
When a car is being operated in fire service mode the door open button must be held down until
the doors are fully open whereas a normal service elevator requires holding the button to close the
door. If the fire service open button is released before fully open, the doors will automatically
close. For this reason a car in fire service mode must have a person acting as the car operator
because if the doors close on an unoccupied car, there will be no way to regain control of the car
from the outside in a timely manner. Security Guards must not take a fire service elevator to an
area in alarm to investigate because when the doors open there may be a fire directly in front of
you.

Page 252 of 346 Basic Training Manual Version 10 – 14 March 2017 Paragon Security ©
 Paragon Academy Basic Security Training Manual

Fire Watch
When a system or a portion of a system becomes inoperative, a fire watch patrol must be conducted
in the areas of the site that are not protected by the system due to the technical fault. A Fire Watch
patrol consists of a human presence, at least once per hour, checking for signs of fire in the affected
areas. There must be a log entry recorded that shows the patrol has been conducted.
In all cases, both property management and the Fire Department must be notified of the disruption
in service.

Fire Fighting
An environment where an active fire is occurring presents both immediate and long-term hazards
to health. In addition to extensive training, firefighters are outfitted with protective equipment.
There is also a North America-wide policy at Fire Departments which stipulates that no single
person shall engage in firefighting or investigating a possible fire scene. The minimum crew size
is set at two persons.
Clearly, Security Guards do not meet the training requirements noted above, nor are they suitably
equipped. The only times a Security Guard should personally engage in fighting a fire are:

• After the general alarm has been activated

• When the guard has been trained in the use of the extinguishing equipment
• When the fire is small and there is no threat to human life
• There is an immediate need to clear an escape route

Fire Extinguisher Use

Ensure you have the right type of extinguisher for the flammable materials to be extinguished. Use
of the PASS acronym is an aid in memorizing fire extinguisher operation
• Pull the safety pin out
• Aim the extinguisher nozzle at the base of the flame
• Squeeze the extinguisher trigger
• Sweep the spray of the extinguisher from side to side
Fire Procedures
Security Guards can expect to encounter variations in fire procedures from site to site. Each site
will have published procedures that are designed to make use of the equipment and personnel
available at that specific site.

Page 253 of 346 Basic Training Manual Version 10 – 14 March 2017 Paragon Security ©
 Paragon Academy Basic Security Training Manual

There are, however, a base set of procedures that can be applied to any site. The base procedures
comprise a minimum number of steps that ensure all the legal responsibilities are discharged and
that the technical needs of the fire department are met. The procedures listed are general and should
not be viewed as being equivalent to procedures that have been custom designed to meet a site
specific situation. Security Guards have an obligation to become familiar with the site Fire Safety
Plan and the Security Standing Orders for the site they are assigned to.
These procedures are designed to fulfill the legal requirements and the technical needs of the
responding Fire Department staff. The basic procedures are listed below:
1. Go to the fire panel; write down the alarm location and the current time. Do not attend
the area of the alarm.
2. Call 911. Identify yourself, state the street address and report the fire alarm.
3. Ensure that elevators have grounded. If not ground them manually using the site keys.
4. Gather the Fire Safety Plan, Firefighter’s Keys the Persons Requiring Assistance List
and provide these to fire crews upon request.
5. Ensure that doors are open for arriving fire crews. Meet them at the doors.
6. Broadcast the first PA Announcement while waiting for the Fire Department to arrive,
7. Report to the Fire Captain and provide assistance as directed by him.
8. Reset the fire panel only when authorized by the Fire Department.
Magnetic Locks “Mag-locks” are electric locks that provide door security by means of an
electromagnet that holds the door closed. The law requires that electronically locked doors be
released (unlocked) upon activation of a fire alarm. This requirement is in place to ensure that all
persons at a site are able to exit the building during a fire emergency.
During the initial response to a fire alarm, one of the tasks a Security Guard should complete is to
check a nearby door that is fitted with a mag-lock, to ensure that mag-locks have released. If it is
found that mag-locks failed to release, they must be released manually. The master control for
releasing or securing building mag-locks can often be found at or near the location of the main fire
panel.
Whether the mag-locks are released automatically by the system or manually by means of the
master control switch, the final result will be that all doors protected by these locks will become
unlocked. A critical post-alarm task for Security Guards is to ensure that mag-locks are re-set once
the fire department has declared the fire emergency to be over. It is essential that the fire panel is
reset and all outstanding fire alarm signals have cleared before attempting a mag-lock reset.
Existing fire alarm signals at the fire panel will prevent the mag-locks from resetting.

Page 254 of 346 Basic Training Manual Version 10 – 14 March 2017 Paragon Security ©
 Paragon Academy Basic Security Training Manual

Prevention is achieved by conducting thorough patrols of the site. Ensuring that fire exits are not
blocked, fire safety equipment is in place and operable, and that fire hazards are removed or
repaired. Problems observed during the Security Guard’s patrol are to be documented in daily and
special occurrence reports, as per the normal practice at that site.

Detection of fire in the early stages can be achieved by remaining alert for excessive heat, strange
odours, and signs of smoke while on patrol. The Security Guard will frequently travel through
areas of a site that are not accessible to general users of the facility or are not visited by other
operations personnel for extended periods of time, such as after-hours and weekends.
Mechanical, electrical, and storage areas generally present a higher risk, because of running
equipment and various combustible materials kept in stock in those areas.
Items to check for while conducting patrols:
Fire Hazards Equipment Miscellaneous

Accumulated paper or rubbish Worn or missing fire hoses Blocked fire exits
Piled oily rags Pressure on sprinkler systems Vehicles parked in fire lanes
Smoking in prohibited areas Inoperative alarms Fire doors propped open
Defective or temporary wiring Missing or defective extinguishers Office equipment left on after ho
Lack of ventilation Improper extinguisher type for fire haz
Unsealed or open containers of
volatile liquids

8.4.3 Bomb Threats

A bomb threat is defined as a verbal or written threat to detonate or explode an explosive or

incendiary device. These messages may come in the form of verbal threats issued in person, printed
messages, email messages, or telephone calls.
It is essential for each Security Guard to understand that:
1. There is no reliable method to determine whether a threatening call or written message is
a hoax or not when it is first received.
2. Although statistically the vast majority of threats are hoaxes, every threat of this type must
be treated seriously in terms of the security response.
3. The decision to search the site and the type of search method to be used must be decided
by Property Management and not by Security Guards.

Page 255 of 346 Basic Training Manual Version 10 – 14 March 2017 Paragon Security ©
 Paragon Academy Basic Security Training Manual

4. The decision to evacuate a site must be made by Property Management or government

emergency services agencies such as the Police or Fire Department, and not by Security
Guards.

Bomb Threat Readiness

It is you responsibility to ensure that you have a Threatening Call Form stored within arm’s
reach of the telephone at your main post. In most cases this will be the Security Office or Reception
or Concierge desk situated in a main lobby area. It is the responsibility of each Security Guard to
become familiar with the location of the Threatening Call Form at each site.

What Kind Of Person Makes A Bomb Threat?

There are many kinds of people who make bomb threats. It is impossible to guess with certainty
what type of person you will have to deal with, but it may help prepare you to think about these
profiles:
• Disgruntled worker – someone who feels that their company or organization has treated
them unfairly and they want to get back at the management. For example, someone who
has been fired, returns with a live grenade and threatens to blow up everyone in the office
or someone who has a problem, usually with one person, and wants to make that person
feel responsible for the suffering of many others.
• Unhappy customer – someone who feels that they have not received the service they
deserve or is not pleased about a product. For example, someone takes a stereo back to a
shop, and they are told that there is a no-return policy. They are treated disrespectfully by
the clerk and the supervisor.
• Protester – someone whose political or religious beliefs are different from the organization
they are threatening. This person may target a government office, a clinic, a newspaper.
• Prankster – someone who is playing a trick or acting on a dare. A student may call a bomb
threat in to a school to see if they can get away with it, or to get some time off.

Why Do People Make Bomb Threats?

There are many reasons why someone may make a bomb threat. The main reason behind most
threats is that making the call gives the person a sense of power. The caller is probably angry about
something, but they lack the courage or the social skills to be public about what they want or need.
If they can create a feeling of fear or cause problems with the running of an organization, they

Page 256 of 346 Basic Training Manual Version 10 – 14 March 2017 Paragon Security ©
 Paragon Academy Basic Security Training Manual

have control over others. They may even hang around watching an evacuation. They like knowing
that they are responsible for inconveniencing so many people.

Another possibility is that the person has information about a dangerous device and does not want
others to get hurt or property to be damaged. For the purposes of this section, an explosive device
is; “Anything that is used, intended to use, or the guard believes is being used as part of a threat or
actual attempt to cause an explosion”.

Follow company policy

The client should have developed a bomb threat plan in consultation with an appropriate expert.
These procedures should be followed.

Receiving a Threat
The most important consideration when receiving a threatening message is to remain calm. The
second most important consideration is to record as many details of the threat as is possible. This
information is to be recorded during, or immediately after, the receipt of a threat.
Never ignore a threat. Always treat a bomb threat seriously. Even if you believe it to be a hoax,
lives may be at stake, and you may be held responsible for your actions if you do not take the
matter seriously.
The Threatening Call Form is used to record details of the threat. It provides spaces for recording
specific types of details regarding the threat and also provides reminders of the types of questions
that should be asked by the person receiving the threat. Although this form is generally designed
to handle bomb threats, the form may be used to document other types of threats received via
telephone as well.
Get a second person involved. It is always more desirable to have another person listen in on the
call. The person initially receiving the call might be able to covertly signal another person to
silently listen in.
Listen carefully. The person receiving the threatening phone call will likely be the only person to
speak to the caller. Listen to the caller’s words, but also to their tone of voice, background noise,
and so on. Not only will these things help police determine if the caller is serious about the threat
but will assist them in tracking the person making the call. Background noise may provide a
particular clue to the location and identity of the caller.

Page 257 of 346 Basic Training Manual Version 10 – 14 March 2017 Paragon Security ©
 Paragon Academy Basic Security Training Manual

Take notes. Write down the caller’s exact words. You do not want to make a mistake about a key
element of the threat. Remember to record the telephone number appearing on the screen, if
available.
Ask questions and keep the caller talking. Follow the bomb threat checklist and make sure that
you understand when the bomb will explode, where it is located, what kind of bomb it is, why it
was placed, and so on.
Get the caller to repeat the key details to make sure that you have the information recorded
accurately. Try not to interrupt the caller and cut off any information. A caller will usually call to
cause panic or make a statement to avoid injuries or deaths.
If told that the building is occupied or may not be evacuated in time, the bomber may be willing
to provide more specific information about the bomb’s location, components, or detonation
process.
You may notice in the bomb threat checklist that it includes questions about the caller’s name,
address, and telephone number. The caller may react automatically to these questions when asked,
without thinking about what you will do with the information.
Never hang up first, let the caller hang up.

Threat Escalation Procedure

Once the threatening call has ended the Security Guard should
1. Inform the designated client representative after the call has ended. Ensure that the
information recorded in the steps above is available for use in answering any questions
raised during this briefing.
2. The Security Guard shall notify Dispatch and follow their directions
3. If contact with the client representative cannot be established within the specified time, the
Security Guard shall notify the Police using 911.
4. Receive instructions from the client representative or Police regarding how to proceed.
This will in most cases involve carrying out the steps listed in a prepared site Bomb Threat
Response Plan.
Bomb Threat Response
1. Follow post orders
2. Gather information
3. Provide decision makers information, If a decision maker is unavailable or it is after hours,
contact your Dispatch Centre for direction

Page 258 of 346 Basic Training Manual Version 10 – 14 March 2017 Paragon Security ©
 Paragon Academy Basic Security Training Manual

4. Follow directions of the Property Manager or designated decision maker

5. Assist with evacuations and secondary bomb searches as required
6. Document the occurrence
Searching
Do not use radios, cell phones or other electronic communications devices while searching or turn
light switches on or off.
Clear escape routes, marshalling areas (sometimes called muster areas) and command posts first.
Search outside to inside, bottom to top, most public to least public. Do not touch anything
suspicious, move ceiling tiles or other items that appear tampered and do not operate light switches,
radios or telephones near anything determined suspicious.
Notify the person in charge by using a land line (hard wired telephone) if anything suspicious is
identified. A Security Guard receiving a bomb threat should personally search the areas in his or
her immediate vicinity, including corridors, washrooms, closets and other commonly accessible
areas.
Suspicious Objects
1. Clear people from the area and prevent others from approaching the object.
2. Assist as directed by property management and police.
Look for objects that do not belong or are unusual in any way, such as unattended luggage or boxes
and packages in areas not normally used for storage. Look for hatches, panels, and closet doors
that are ajar or show evidence of tampering. Check for ceiling tiles that appear to be out of place.
Check behind pillars and in alcoves, inspect any displays that may be in lobby or common areas.
• Searches should be conducted by persons who are familiar with the area being searched.
• Each area should be searched by two persons if possible.
• Begin with the perimeter walking around the area until it has been completely covered.
• Look from floor to waist height, waist to eye level, eye level to the ceiling (bottom to top)
• Work your way to the centre of the room until every possible location has been searched.
• Do not disturb anything in the room during the search.
Anything that looks out of place should be looked upon with suspicion. Examples include:
1. Items that are routinely seen on-site but have been moved from their usual position. This
includes displaced furniture or decorative items. This may indicate an object has been
moved in order to conceal something behind it. This also includes items such as air duct
covering grills or other fixtures that have been tampered

Page 259 of 346 Basic Training Manual Version 10 – 14 March 2017 Paragon Security ©
 Paragon Academy Basic Security Training Manual

2. Items that are routinely seen on site but are found in locations that are unusual, given the
nature of the object. This may include things such as a backpack or briefcase placed behind
a pillar.
3. Items that are not normally seen on the property.

Suspicious Objects Found

If a suspicious object or package is found nobody should handle it
1. Prevent anyone from going near or touching the object. Keep other persons away from the
area.
2. Try to establish who owns the object or package and when it was put there. This may
identify that the package is legitimate and inadvertently left in error.
3. Notify the Police that a suspicious object has been found on-site.
4. Carry out instructions received from the Client representative and/or Police regarding
building evacuation.
8.4.4 Suspicious Packages

Delivered Parcels that appear to have been opened and resealed, have wires protruding from them,
are stained with greasy or oily substances, or are emitting strange odours fall within the realm of
suspicious packages.
Other signs may include incorrect postage and general addressing (not directed to a specific
person). In the event you or another person receive or find a suspicious package, gently put it
down in a safe area and prevent others from touching it. Do not cover it with anything or immerse
the package in water. Notify the proper authority according to your procedures and/or the bomb
threat protocol in this manual.

8.4.5 Explosive Devices

This definition does not make reference to types of explosive devices and nor will this section
describe the various explosive devices that are possible. It is sufficient to state that explosive
devices can range from extremely elaborate high-tech devices to crudely designed incendiary
devices like Molotov cocktails.
Hollywood’s portrayal of tightly wrapped sticks of dynamite rigged to a simple timing device has
been replaced with concoctions made from common household products including fertilizer.

Page 260 of 346 Basic Training Manual Version 10 – 14 March 2017 Paragon Security ©
 Paragon Academy Basic Security Training Manual

Although bomb threats are relatively rare, on occasion a Security Guard may have to deal with a
bomb threat or provide assistance to someone on a site that receives a bomb threat. Although
threats are occasionally received through the mail, bomb threats most commonly arrive by
telephone.
Although bomb threats are generally associated with explosive devices, biological or chemical
substances also fall within the spectrum of potential threats that may be presented. The threat of
bombs or other harmful materials being placed inside of a building is most often brought to the
attention of Security by means of a threatening phone call. In some cases the threat becomes
evident when a suspicious package is found on-site.

Page 261 of 346 Basic Training Manual Version 10 – 14 March 2017 Paragon Security ©
 Paragon Academy Basic Security Training Manual

Figure 8.4.a

Page 262 of 346 Basic Training Manual Version 10 – 14 March 2017 Paragon Security ©
 Paragon Academy Basic Security Training Manual

8.4.6 Weapons Emergencies

What is a weapon?
A weapon can be defined as a tool that can hurt or defend you or someone else. Some examples
of weapons that Security Guards could encounter include guns, knives, pens, pencils, nail files,
razors, broken glass, hammers, chains, bats, steel pipes and so on.
In a weapon emergency safety is paramount. This means everyone’s safety is the most important,
including you as the Security Professional, the client and others under your protection such as
the general public and even the agitated or hostile subject under these circumstances.

Weapon Emergency Response

The following protocol will serve as a general guideline, considering most Security Guards are not
trained or equipped to reactively neutralize a person armed with a weapon:
1. Retreat to an area of safety
2. Contain the emergency area if able
3. Keep innocent persons back
4. Call 911
Do not engage a person with a weapon except as a last resort. If it is safe to do so, render aid to
anyone who has been injured with a weapon, including evacuating them to an area of safety and
giving first aid.
The following information is offered for your awareness and to assist you proactively identifying
a potentially armed person for the purposes of monitoring and reporting the matter to authorities:
Some common characteristics and indicators of armed individuals that Security Guards should
look for are:
As you observe a potential suspect, try first to determine their strong side. Wristwatches typically
are worn on the weak arm and first steps are usually taken with the weak leg, but generally people
will use their strong hand for most actions, such as lighting cigarettes, shoving someone, and
holding or moving objects. Even in the absence of confirmation 85 to 90% of people in the world
are right handed.
The overwhelming majority of offenders who carry a gun tuck it into their front waistband,
between their navel and hip. The weapon must be accessible and it is also “cool.”

Page 263 of 346 Basic Training Manual Version 10 – 14 March 2017 Paragon Security ©
 Paragon Academy Basic Security Training Manual

The second most common hiding place is the small of the back, but it tends to be uncomfortable.
In most cases, hidden guns are un-holstered and can work to your advantage from an observation
standpoint, and a disadvantage to the person(s) carrying the gun because it tends to shift and
usually requires adjustment
As a suspect moves, watch for a “security feel. Because the gun is loose, the suspect is in fear the
weapon will slip and will periodically touch it to make sure it is still in place.
“Protective body movement” is particularly noticeable when an armed subject is running or
moving abruptly; he holds his arm against the concealed weapon, either stiffly or with a very
restrained swing. Even if the suspect is just walking, you may see that he takes a full stride with
his opposite-side foot but the gun-side stride will be shorter, almost like a limp in some cases
because he’s trying to keep the weapon in place and minimize its slipping or its risk of falling out.
The arm may also come in against the weapon as a protective movement when people start getting
close to the suspect. When approached, armed offenders may turn their weapon side away when
you come up to them. Movement helps you to pinpoint hidden weapons.
Look for telltale bulges. A gun, piece of wood, a steel pipe, a large knife for example are not
flexible and doesn’t conform well to the shape of the human body, so it may reveal itself in the
form of a bump. While the entire weapon may not be outlined, tight clothing may reveal bumps
that relate to a hammer, grip or muzzle.
As you study a subject’s clothing, ask yourself: Does it fit the season? In cold weather, is a coat
unzipped or unbuttoned? Is the subject wearing only one glove, leaving his shooting hand bare? Is
he wearing a belt that’s not through his pants loops, thereby capable of cinching tighter against a
hidden gun? Is a coat weighted down lower on one side? When he walks or runs, does his coat or
jacket bounce off his leg as if something heavy is in the pocket?
Based on the article: “How to Spot Armed Suspects”
By Police-One Senior Contributor Chuck Remsberg

Page 264 of 346 Basic Training Manual Version 10 – 14 March 2017 Paragon Security ©
 Paragon Academy Basic Security Training Manual

Six Fundamentals to Remember During a Violent Confrontation

1. Keep your eyes open as people tend to close their eyes during physical altercations. Our
natural reaction is to close our eyes when we think we'll be hit. We have to fight the urge
and keep our eyes open. This is the only way we know what's happening so we can react
effectively.
2. Watch their hands. Hands are the most dangerous part because they can hold guns and
weapons.
3. Do something. You have to do something - scream, kick or run. The worst thing you can
do is to do nothing. Doing something doesn't always involve something physical.
Whether it's talking to the aggressor, calling the police or evacuating innocent bystanders,
we can always do something to affect the situation
4. Have presence of mind. It's easy to panic and get “tunnel-vision,” where you are focused
only on what's in front of you. Fear, pain and exhaustion are just some of the factors that
keep us from thinking clearly. When you have presence of mind, you are able to make
decisions and act.
5. Don't turn your back to the assailant. Unless you have enough room to get a good head
start and run away, do not turn your back. You are completely exposing yourself, and you
can't see what the assailant is doing.
6. Never give up. The mind is capable of defying physical boundaries. We've all heard of
stories of people surviving situations that would have killed a regular person. They're not
superhuman nor do they possess special abilities. They just refuse to give up.

We can't predict when and where violence will occur, but we can prepare ourselves mentally and
physically to respond effectively.
Based on an article by Joone Kim

Page 265 of 346 Basic Training Manual Version 10 – 14 March 2017 Paragon Security ©
 Paragon Academy Basic Security Training Manual

8.4.7 Elevator Entrapments & Escalators

Being trapped in an elevator can be traumatic and disturbing for the trapped persons, especially if
the entrapment goes on for an extended time. Since we are not trained as elevator service
personnel, our role in elevator entrapments is to:

1. Contact the Elevator Service Company at their 24 hour emergency number

2. Attempt to find out when the technician will be on site
3. This information can be passed onto the trapped person(s)
4. Contact your Dispatch and advise them of the situation
5. Ask the trapped person(s) if they have a cell phone and/or inquire if their cell phone is
working; in some cases the signal may not be able to penetrate the metal elevator cab
6. Where/when the trapped person(s) is unable to communicate with the outside world,
volunteer to call a family member and/or business associate for them
7. Ask the occupant(s) if anyone is injured, distressed, unwell or claustrophobic; if so, contact
the local fire department via 911. Also advise the Elevator Service Company, this may
result in them changing the priority of the service call
8. Periodically (every 10-15 minutes) return to the floor where the person(s) is trapped and
update them on the situation; if site coverage permits, a guard should remain “with” the
trapped person(s) to provide them with comfort and reassurance
At some sites, the elevators are equipped with phones or intercoms that allow us to call the trapped
person(s); at these sites, periodic phone calls are an acceptable alternative to personal visits to the
trapped person(s), however if the person(s) is trapped for a long period we should still visit them
at least once an hour.

The name and address of all persons that were trapped are required for your Special Occurrence
Report; include all relevant times. Elevator entrapments normally come to our attention via a
central monitoring station or answering service, elevator telephones, a 24 hour security desk or we
hear people trapped in an elevator yelling for help. Reports from tenants or residents may also alert
you.

Page 266 of 346 Basic Training Manual Version 10 – 14 March 2017 Paragon Security ©
 Paragon Academy Basic Security Training Manual

Unoccupied Elevator Malfunction

1. Place an ‘Out of Service’ sign in front of the doors

2. Turn off the car lights
3. Call the Elevator Service Company in accordance with the most economical time frame
specified in their contract (or in instructions left by Property Management); usually this
means waiting to call the Elevator Service Company during business hours
4. Property Management usually wants to avoid calling the Elevator Service Company on
statutory holidays, weekends and after hours, Monday to Friday.

Escalators
Escalator stoppages are a fairly common occurrence as the emergency stop buttons are accessible
by all users.
In the event of a stoppage inspect the escalator, checking the steps and the handrails to ensure that
these components are not damaged and that there are no visible signs of an unsafe condition. Check
for foreign objects that may be lodged between the steps and the stationary plates at the top and
bottom of the escalator. Remove foreign objects if you are able to and if you are unable to remove
foreign objects, the escalator should be designated as being ‘Out of Service’ and the matter referred
to service personnel.
If there are no unsafe conditions or damage evident, attempt to restart the escalator using the key
provided – ensure that there are no passengers on the escalator when this procedure is carried out.
If possible, obtain the assistance of another person (Guard, Building Operator, Cleaner, etc.) to
stand at the opposite end of the escalator to ensure that no persons board it during the restart
process.
Once the escalator has been restarted, board the escalator and ride it to the opposite end, listen for
any unusual sounds such as grinding or scraping noises that might indicate a mechanical problem.
Observe the unit in operation and ensure that there are no signs of an unsafe condition such as
slippage, excessive vibrations or uneven motion (starting and stopping, lurching motions, etc.)
before the escalator is made accessible to users.
Provided that there are no unsafe conditions noted, the escalator may be returned to regular service.
In the event that there is damage or unsafe conditions noted, place the affected escalator out of
service using the guidelines noted below. Ensure an entry is made on your Report to indicate that
there had been a stoppage, this can be valuable to staff on the following shifts as repeat stoppages
might be indication of a larger maintenance related problem.

Page 267 of 346 Basic Training Manual Version 10 – 14 March 2017 Paragon Security ©
 Paragon Academy Basic Security Training Manual

Check if your location allows the direction of travel reversed on escalators to compensate for
another unit being put into the ‘Out of Service’ mode. In the event of an escalator malfunction shut
the escalator off using the nearest escalator emergency stop button. If the escalator steps and
handrails are undamaged and safe to use in the stopped mode the escalator may be used as a set of
stairs. If the escalator steps or handrail are damaged or do not appear safe to use, then block access
to the escalator at the top and bottom with a safety cone or caution tape

8.4.8 Medical Emergencies Overview

The Good Samaritan Act aims to protect first aid rescuers from litigation. The law is based on
what a “Reasonable Person” would do. Things to remember:
Get Consent from your patient
Always ask a patient “Can I help you,” even if they appear unresponsive. Patients that are
conscious, of the age of majority and of sound mind have the right to refuse your help.
Implied Consent
• If your patient did respond when you called to them move closer, if it is safe to do so, pinch
them on the shoulder and call to them again. If they do not respond you have implied
consent
The patient is under age of majority
• If the patient is a child, identify yourself to them; ask them if they need help and if their
parents are with them. If they are alone, render assistance as needed
Gross Negligence
• In an emergency only do things that you are qualified to do. Do not try a medical procedure
seen on television or administer drugs you are not trained to give
• You may assist a conscious patient to take their own medication, i.e., you can get it for
them, help them steady their hands etc., but you cannot administer it to them if they lose
consciousness

Page 268 of 346 Basic Training Manual Version 10 – 14 March 2017 Paragon Security ©
 Paragon Academy Basic Security Training Manual

Abandonment
You are not legally obliged to perform first aid, but if you do stop to render assistance you cannot
stop treatment unless:
• You are relieved by higher medical authority, i.e. paramedics
• The scene is not safe to remain: back away and await assistance
• You are too physically exhausted to continue

In anticipation of medical emergencies and/or personal injury accidents Security Guards should
be familiar with locations of all first aid kits, oxygen units, defibrillators and any on site resources
(and their hours of work) that could provide assistance. This includes other persons trained in first
aid, a company nurse, a company doctor, or tenants that are doctors. Keep in mind that these
resources could be needed during a multiple casualty situation.

Upon being dispatched, summoned to, or coming across a Medical Emergency the Security Guard
will render First Aid as appropriate (if qualified), call 911, or designate someone to and meet
and/or designate someone to meet Emergency Services.

Assist Emergency Services on their arrival and attempt to obtain the names and addresses of any
witnesses as soon as you can, many witnesses will fade into the background as soon as the victim
is transported offsite; security, police and other investigating agencies such as the Ministry of
Labour need this information.

Consider the possibility that this could be a crime scene (Did the victim collapse for medical
reasons or was it an assault and robbery, such as a purse snatching? Were they cut or stabbed? Did
they slip and fall or were they pushed?), quickly establish how the victim got into this condition,
are the police needed in addition to an Ambulance; if further investigation is required secure the
scene for the police.

Page 269 of 346 Basic Training Manual Version 10 – 14 March 2017 Paragon Security ©
 Paragon Academy Basic Security Training Manual

8.4.9 Role of Security in Emergencies

The role of a Security Guard in an emergency is always to protect life, protect property, protect
confidential information, and minimize liability. Contain emergency areas, keep innocent people
back. Expedite response of authorities. Document the event.
We may provide first aid and fight minor fires when it is safe and appropriate to do so. Enforce
rules and regulations and identify hazards and prevent emergencies proactively. The Security
Guard’s role in a site fire safety program is one of prevention, detection, preserving life safety and
limiting property damage.
The Security Guard contributes to preserving life safety by taking an active role in the site fire
safety program.
Assisting building occupants in conducting orderly evacuations when necessary is one example of
appropriate reaction. The Security Guard is a source of access and information to emergency
services and authorities.
The Guard on duty will have possession of the keys to the site and will have detailed knowledge
of the facility and the locations of critical equipment. The Security Guard will also be able to
provide information regarding the locations of any hazardous materials and environments onsite.
The ability of the Security Guard to provide information to authorities will save valuable time
during emergency situations.
Security Guards are not tasked with single handed reacting to emergencies and must decide quickly
what appropriate actions are and what further resources are required, then expedite (make faster)
the response. There are very specific circumstances during which it becomes reasonable or
necessary for a Security Guard to engage in actions related to emergencies.
8.4.10 Common Hazards

From time to time, various incidents will arise to which you are expected to respond and resolve.
You are given the responsibility to detect potential threats before they happen, and react
professionally as they happen. Not every incident can be foreseen however an observant Security
Guard can minimize damage and resolve problems before they grow into larger ones.

Page 270 of 346 Basic Training Manual Version 10 – 14 March 2017 Paragon Security ©
 Paragon Academy Basic Security Training Manual

The first and most important responsibility of Security Guards is to protect people against various
threats and hazards. Accident prevention should be practiced by Security Guards to help provide
a safe working environment for employees. The Security Guard must act quickly to:
• Identify the threat or hazard.
• Take steps to eliminate or reduce the hazard.
• Follow up with a written report of action.

When injury or death occurs the Security Guard must:

• Call for assistance.
• Provide first aid if qualified.
• Take steps to eliminate the hazards for others.
• Protect the scene for later investigation.
• Obtain the names of witness and gather evidence.
• Follow up with a written report of action.

Common threats and hazards to people are:

• Fire hazards
• Accident hazards
• Failure to follow safety rules
• Poorly maintained safety and firefighting equipment
• Slippery floors
• Poorly stacked material
• Poorly lighted areas
• Electrical shock or other energy fields (magnetic/radiation)

Enforce the safety rules, including no horseplay, intoxication or drinking by client employees and
check safety equipment. Know the location of stretchers and first aid kits.

Page 271 of 346 Basic Training Manual Version 10 – 14 March 2017 Paragon Security ©
 Paragon Academy Basic Security Training Manual

8.5 Section Summary

Security Guards may be personally exposed to the following common hazards of the job, in
addition to those noted previously in this section. Musculoskeletal injuries can result from
awkward postures, contact stress (leaning on something or holding a phone between your ear and
shoulder) or repetitive stress from engaging in the same motions repetitiously. Fatigue can result
from long shifts, weekends and night work.
Stress can cause burn out through exposure to demanding duties, confrontations, agitated persons
or traumatic occurrences.
Coping mechanisms to help you minimize injury and discomfort include work instructions,
policies and training. Use your situation awareness skills and remain vigilant at all times. It is your
responsibility to maintain a safe and pleasant work environment for you, your co-workers and the
people under our protection.

Page 272 of 346 Basic Training Manual Version 10 – 14 March 2017 Paragon Security ©
 Paragon Academy Basic Security Training Manual

9.0 – Basic Security Procedures

9.1 Introduction

Security Guards need to respond to changes in their environment which includes actions such as
traffic movement, ensuring the safety of persons between and within locations, monitoring and
managing the departure of persons and vehicles and observing and monitoring people. You will
need to know the correct way of dealing with these situations. In addition, Security Guards need
to be able to identify signs and symptoms of drug use and the impact of drugs on behaviours in
relation to safety.

9.2 Patrols & Fixed Posts

The purpose of patrols is to monitor a facility or area of a facility in order to observe potential
problem situations. Security Guards on patrol should accomplish the following:
Deterrence: By being visible the Security Guard will deter potential intruders or thieves from
their intentions.
Identify Threats: By patrolling the facility, an alert Security Guard can identify threats and
hazards to the facility, not only security threats and intruders, but also safety and fire hazards.
Prevent or Reduce Loss: Once hazards are identified the Security Guard on patrol can take steps
to prevent loss or reduce damage from water leaks, weather damage, etc. While on patrol a
Security Guard can expect to be approached by various persons with routine questions or
requests. These must be handled in a professional manner. If they can be handled quickly
without interference to the patrol duty they should be handled at once. If they require the
interruption of the patrol the Security Guard must decide if their priority is greater than the
patrol. In some cases such as unlocking doors, the task may be incorporated into the patrol.
Frequency
The frequency and timing of patrols is critical to their effectiveness. There are two ways to reduce
the predictability in patrols:
1. Vary the start times of each patrol.
2. Vary the route of patrol so no one can predict where you will be next.
When a set number of patrols are specified per shift it is important that the Security Guard complete
all the required patrols. Do not patrol the full area of a facility in one sweep, break the patrols
down instead. The interior of buildings as well as the perimeter must be covered. The patrol must

Page 273 of 346 Basic Training Manual Version 10 – 14 March 2017 Paragon Security ©
 Paragon Academy Basic Security Training Manual

bring the Security Guard within visual and hearing range of every area of the facility. In this way
no potential threat or hazard will go undetected.
Patrols should be arranged to cover areas of activity when they will be most needed. For example,
change rooms should be checked between shift changes to detect theft attempts. Work areas during
supervisors break times should be patrolled.

Patrol Preparation - Knowledge of Total Facility

Learn as much as possible about the facility and the loss prevention systems. This knowledge
should include alarms, physical barriers, procedural controls, etc.
The first patrol of a shift is the most important. During the first patrol it is necessary to determine
the normal condition of the facility and to verify problems identified by earlier shifts. From this
base of knowledge, it is possible to identify changes from the normal or first patrol conditions.
Be alert and plan for possibilities. Set goals for each patrol. It is impossible not to find something
of note if careful and meticulous observations are made while on patrol. A thorough knowledge of
the client’s rules and regulations is needed to be able to identify areas of concern.
When on patrol, use and react to all your patrol senses – smell, touch, vision and hearing.
Equipment used for patrols
The necessary equipment needed for patrol to be effective includes a notebook and pen, in order
to make notes of activities and incidents that occur on patrol to be later included in the report. A
flashlight for night patrolling and dark areas of the facility during the daylight hours is essential.
The ideal flashlight will be bright yet small and portable enough to be carried on your belt.
Safety equipment such as hardhats and safety glasses are essential for areas requiring them.
Communications equipment such as portable radios or cell phones need to be carried on patrol in
case you require assistance or need to pass along other critical information which will prove
difficult if it is left sitting at a desk or in a patrol vehicle.

Things to Look For While on Patrol

Conditions to check while on patrol include fire hazards, equipment that is not working properly
or improperly left on, unlawfully parked or suspicious vehicles, safety hazards, missing barriers
and warning signs, disorderly conduct, intoxicated persons, etc. Look for physical security
weaknesses on the property like worn or damaged fencing, inoperable locks, broken windows,
gates and latches and unlocked doors. Check for lights left on, unattended valuables and other
suspicious activity.

Page 274 of 346 Basic Training Manual Version 10 – 14 March 2017 Paragon Security ©
 Paragon Academy Basic Security Training Manual

Report all missing fire hoses or discharged fire extinguishers. Please remember that the actual
weighing and pressure testing of fire extinguishers is normally done under contract by a fire service
company. When a portable fire extinguisher has been discharged notify the appropriate
maintenance contact. Replace it with an equivalent spare, if available. When a fire hose has been
unravelled and subsequently turned on; turn off the water and notify maintenance.

Types of patrols
Mobile Patrols
All mobile patrols are either conducted on foot or utilizing some form of vehicle, usually cars,
trucks or SUVs. Bicycle patrols are another mode of transport for Guards conducting mobile
patrols and are quickly gaining popularity due to the desirable “green” or environmentally friendly
profile presented for the client site when avoiding the use of fossil fuels.
Vehicles
The advantages of using a vehicle may include shelter from inclement weather and you can carry
more equipment than on foot. A vehicle allows you to cover the wider property and quicker
response to far reaching areas.
Disadvantages of vehicles include the limited interaction with the public and the fact you cannot
access some places that can be reached on foot such as stairwells.
Foot patrol
Foot patrol allows greater interaction with people for public relations. You can also get up close
to the buildings on the site and conduct physical checks. Foot patrol creates physical activity to
keep Security Guards active, fit and alert.
The disadvantages of foot patrol include a limited ability to patrol wider areas, less equipment can
be carried and response is slower.
Office Tower Patrols
At most office towers we have two basic security duties, access control at the lobby desk and tower
patrols. Tower patrols are normally conducted by taking the elevator to the top floor and patrolling
the top floor in its entirety and then walking down the stairs to the next floor, and so on. Collect
small pieces of litter and place them in a nearby garbage bin.
Security should monitor the corridors, stairwells and washrooms on each floor for leaks, floods,
high or low air temperature, smoke, fire and the smell of natural gas.

Page 275 of 346 Basic Training Manual Version 10 – 14 March 2017 Paragon Security ©
 Paragon Academy Basic Security Training Manual

Make sure to report on any dangerous or unsafe conditions, such as discarded furniture or
deliveries resulting in blocked fire exits, burnt out, damaged or missing exit lights, burnt out lights
that create a safety hazard, or tripping hazards such as a ripped carpet.
Electrical/Utility Rooms
Manually check that the accessible electrical rooms, communication rooms and riser rooms on
each floor are secure. Contractors sometimes leave these rooms insecure. They should all be
checked during the first patrol conducted after normal business hours.
Stairwells
On the first patrol, check to ensure that stairwell doors are either locked or unlocked as required
by your post orders. Report when a stairwell door that is supposed to be locked is found unlocked
and initiate corrective actions when required.
Look for people smoking, waiting or loitering in the stairwells. Determine if they belong in the
building and if they have a legitimate reason to be in the stairwell. Evict those who don’t belong
if necessary. Some people will break into interior units, first hiding in the stairwell.
On one patrol per night, test the stairwell doors to ensure that they are closing properly and that
they are latching. To test any stairwell door, open it to 45o and let it close. If it does not fully close,
or if it does not latch, complete a report. Do not test stairwell doors that are in restricted tenant
spaces or that have magnetic locks with no card readers. Occasionally, you may find an object
taped or placed between the halves of a magnetic lock. This should be reported to your supervisor,
as this type of activity usually occurs before a break in.
Crossover floors
Crossover floors are vulnerable to intrusions where they are not secured with magnetic locks or
electric strikes. If the crossover floors in your building are not secured after hours, check them
more frequently than during ‘normal’ floors.
Vacant Suite/Space Doors
Check the entrance doors to all vacant offices to ensure that they are secure. If you do not have
keys, interior checks are only required if the door is not locked. Interior checks are also required
if the door has any ‘new’ signs of forced entry. Where you have keys, the interiors of vacant office
spaces should be checked either twice per day (usually on the first and last after hours patrols of
the day) or at a frequency specified by the client. Vacant suite doors are sometimes left open by
general contractors for sub-contractors and tradespersons. Concerns include leaks and floods,
homeless persons living in the suite and criminals hiding there while waiting to commit a ‘break
out’.

Page 276 of 346 Basic Training Manual Version 10 – 14 March 2017 Paragon Security ©
 Paragon Academy Basic Security Training Manual

Washrooms
All washrooms should be checked on each floor patrol. When entering the washroom that is not
of your gender, loudly announce “Security” before entering. Allow any occupants to leave before
you go in. When checking washrooms, look for leaks and floods, persons vandalizing or misusing
the washroom, persons loitering in the washroom.
Criminals may be hiding in washrooms to commit after hours ‘break outs’. This is especially a
concern on the first patrol conducted after the elevators, stairwells and/or building go on access
control/secure mode. Ensure that you check all stalls in all washrooms on this patrol.
Persons loitering near the washrooms may be opportunistic thieves waiting to commit a reach over
or reach under purse or jacket theft. This is particularly a concern where the washrooms are located
close to or in a stairwell.
Untoward sexual activity tends to occur most frequently in the Men’s Washroom. Request
identification from both participants and evict them. Any participants that do not work in the
building should be barred in accordance with building policy.
Trespassers
Be alert for persons who appear not to belong on the floors. During the business day when there
are lots of visitors in the building, it will be difficult to determine who is and is not authorized. If
you are suspicious of a particular person who, due to grooming, dress or signs of intoxication, does
not appear to be a normal user, politely question them and offer to escort them to the tenant that
they claim to be visiting. Watch for their reaction. Be prepared to escort them off the property
and/or to request assistance.
After the access control system has switched over to secure mode, watch for persons wandering
around the floors with no visible pass card. If you are suspicious, ask to see theirs. If they do not
have it with them, ask if you can accompany them back to their office to get it. Many computer
thieves are extremely confident, and will say things like “I left my card in my office”, “I am just
leaving and I cannot be late for my train”.
Be alert for unauthorized solicitors. They are usually either selling merchandise or memberships
or raising funds for charities. All solicitors must be approved by management. They should have
a letter of authorization from management or you should have been advised in advance that they
are authorized. Our normal response is to politely evict them. If unauthorized sales people refuse
to leave bar them from the property. If necessary call the police.

Page 277 of 346 Basic Training Manual Version 10 – 14 March 2017 Paragon Security ©
 Paragon Academy Basic Security Training Manual

Criminal Activity
During regular business hours and after hours look for signs of criminal activity including people
breaking into suites. During the business day pay attention to people carrying more than one laptop,
purses or wallets or handling them in a manner that indicates that they are not familiar with them.
Remain alert for signs of laptop and wallet or purse theft during opening and closing times. These
times present opportunities to criminals because many offices are unlocked and open, the reception
area is not staffed and fewer witnesses are present. Thefts are also common during lunch hour and
while office parties are taking place.
Move Outs
On weekends and at night, be alert for unauthorized move outs. If you have not been previously
notified and encounter a move out during business hours contact your supervisor or the
management office for clarification.
After hours if you encounter a possible unauthorized move out be aware this is considered a civil
matter, and the police will not intervene. While you cannot stop the tenant from moving out, you
can take steps to slow them down, such as locking off the elevators on a floor that the tenant’s staff
do not have access to, or not unlocking shipping/receiving or voiding their employees access cards
if so directed by your client or post orders. You cannot legally use physical force for this matter.
Roof Access
Where a roof door can be accessed from a common area corridor or stairwell, this should be
checked on each patrol. Roof doors are normally kept locked. If you find the roof door insecure,
check the Roof Sign-In Log and/or conduct a roof patrol to determine if contractors, such as
window washers are working on the roof, before you lock the roof door. If you must patrol the
roof use caution as many slip and fall accidents occur on the roof.
After Hours Patrol Functions
After hours, your primary concerns are to ensure that all doors to the suites are secure and that if
a burglary has occurred that you quickly discover it. After a burglary has been discovered, it should
be promptly reported to the police, property management and the tenant contact.
When conducting floor patrols you should look for doors found ajar, unlocked or propped open.
These issues are routinely encountered on the first patrol after closing. Normal response during
this time frame is to quickly check the door and walls for signs of forced entry and, if there are
none, to cautiously enter the suite. If staff is working late, politely ask to see at least one occupant’s
pass card or other ID and record their name in your memo book.
Floor-by-Floor Patrols are generally conducted by taking the elevator to the top floor, patrolling
that floor and then walking down the stairs to the next floor. To avoid establishing a consistent
pattern, alternate start/finish times and start/finish locations.

Page 278 of 346 Basic Training Manual Version 10 – 14 March 2017 Paragon Security ©
 Paragon Academy Basic Security Training Manual

Mall Patrols
Mall patrol is one of the primary tools we use to protect shopping centres. For your mall patrols to
be effective, please remember the following:
The main purpose of mall patrols is to provide a very high profile, security presence in the mall
common areas. Use your presence to reassure shoppers, merchants and other normal users while
patrolling. Older shoppers in particular find the visible presence of Security Guards comforting.
Deter trouble makers by letting them see that the mall has an active security team that vigorously
patrols the mall. This method works as a low level order maintenance duty (maintaining order
through presence as a subtle show of control).
Reporting on and/or taking action in response to violations of the mall rules is one function of
patrolling. While most of this function relates to shoppers and abnormal users of the property
(those not contributing to the enjoyment of the property) some relates to enforcing rules related to
merchants, their employees and mall or merchant contractors.
Make eye contact, smile and use an appropriate social greeting when you observe persons who
routinely shop here (regulars), store employees, merchants and mall staff.
Remember that while on patrol you will be observed by shoppers, tenants and mall staff. Often the
mall will be judged by how you deal with people or situations. Your actions and demeanour must
reflect the mall’s requirement for excellent public relations. Always be courteous and polite.
Remember that in many situations you are a goodwill ambassador for the shopping centre. Do not
patrol in pairs unless there is an ongoing situation that warrants it. A team can cover more of the
site when patrolling individually and joining up only when warranted for support.
Be alert for anything that maintenance should be advised of, this includes Heating, Ventilation,
Air conditioning breakdowns (HVAC), leaks or floods (ensure you take steps to eliminate/mitigate
any slip or fall hazard) or noxious odours. Take children under 10 years of age who are alone and
appear lost into your care and follow your lost person procedures as set out by the site.

Page 279 of 346 Basic Training Manual Version 10 – 14 March 2017 Paragon Security ©
 Paragon Academy Basic Security Training Manual

Mobile Retail Units (MRU)

During open hours, pay special attention to MRUs and Kiosks. Since they are usually only staffed
by one person, shop thieves will often steal items from the ‘blind’ side when the clerk/owner is
occupied with a shopper.
After hours, pay special attention for persons stealing from MRUs and Kiosks. Often MRUs and
Kiosks have no secure area where product can be secured. While some MRUs and Kiosks have
lockable shutters, most do not. In some cases the MRU or Kiosk is secured only by covering it
with a tarp. Often all of the merchandise stored in an MRU or Kiosk is within easy reach of anyone
walking by.
Store Fronts & Service Corridors
Service corridors should be checked at least once per shift during business hours. After closing,
ensure all store fronts and store rear doors are secure by hand checking them. Store back doors
should be checked as soon as the closing store front check has been completed. Also, after closing
the service corridors should be checked once every two to three hours.
Food Courts
Food courts should be patrolled on a regular basis. A highly visible presence is required during the
lunch hour and early to late dinner time.
Make eye contact with persons who appear to be loitering. Ensure that they are aware of your
presence and then continue your patrol. If these persons are still there, after your patrol and are not
purchasing food or drinks, and they have exceeded the time limit, politely ask them to move on so
others can use the tables.
Enforce rules such as; no feet on tables and prohibitions against moving food court furniture.
Twenty, or so, people at one such table can be very intimidating to other food court users and
damaging to the business of vendors. Enforce food court rules equally for all groups, including
youths and seniors.

Page 280 of 346 Basic Training Manual Version 10 – 14 March 2017 Paragon Security ©
 Paragon Academy Basic Security Training Manual

Mechanical Room Patrols

At most properties Security Guards do not patrol mechanical rooms when building operations
personnel are onsite. Patrol the mechanical rooms according to your procedures after hours.

Mechanical Room patrols are a form of preventative maintenance. The main purpose of our patrols
is to observe and report on hazardous or harmful conditions or situations before they become major
problems. From building management’s perspective, it is much better to have security encounter
a leak on Saturday night than to have a building operator arrive on Monday morning to find three
feet of water in the Mechanical room.

When patrolling mechanical areas take your time and observe your surroundings. Familiarize
yourself with the normal sights, sounds and smells of mechanical rooms. This will make it easier
to identify abnormalities. If you are required to take readings, make note of locations of all required
gauges and the reading level thresholds.

When you encounter any problems follow your procedures. Follow the notification procedure
listed in post orders. If you are not sure that a situation or condition warrants an after-hours call to
management, contact Dispatch, Patrol or your Supervisor for clarification. Ensure that mechanical
room doors are closed and locked.

Look for equipment not running when normally it should be, or running at an unusual time. This
could be serious, such as air conditioning not working or a fire pump running when there is no
fire.

Parking Area Patrols

Statistically, the parking area is the most active area of any facility. Homicides and other very
serious crimes are much more likely to occur in parking than inside the building. Most parking
areas have very few witnesses because patrons and employees usually only attend them briefly to
pick up or drop off their vehicles. Many parking areas are not well lit. Due to these and numerous
other factors, parking areas must be patrolled constantly and diligently.
Ensure you become familiar with the parking area so that you can put situations in perspective; for
example, is there a fitness club nearby and what are its hours? This information will make a big
difference if you encounter a person wandering through parking at 0300hrs carrying a large sports
bag.

Page 281 of 346 Basic Training Manual Version 10 – 14 March 2017 Paragon Security ©
 Paragon Academy Basic Security Training Manual

Be a visible deterrent; see and be seen. A highly visible security presence may deter crime.
Remember that your patrols include the parking spaces, elevator lobbies and stairwells. During
every second or third patrol check to ensure that all parking area rooms, including storage are
secure.
Check the lighting to see if it is on when not needed or vice versa.
The preferred patrol technique is the anti-intrusion patrol that is of brief duration. The Security
Guard attends the different areas of parking briefly, looking only for suspicious persons and
activities. During anti-intrusion patrols the guard is not checking fire extinguishers or making notes
about litter and other minor items. If there are no suspicious persons or activities, quickly move
on to the next area however if you encounter or observe anything of note you should follow up as
required by your post orders.
Be alert for seniors, children or pets left in vehicles on very hot or very cold days. If they are
displaying any signs of distress notify site management and call 911.
Investigate any person loitering or not moving purposefully towards a destination such as a
stairwell or elevator. Visually scan the area near these people and keep in mind they may be acting
as a lookout. Some thieves like to accumulate loot in stairwells until they are ready to carry it out
in a large bag or other container.
Approach anyone sitting in a vehicle from the rear diagonal if investigation is required and record
the vehicle description, license plate and a description of occupants. Politely ask “May I help you?”
Look for glass on the pavement as this may indicate that someone has broken into a car. If you
know that this broken glass is fresh notify your supervisor or dispatch. Check for the smell of
leaking gasoline or diesel fuel and attempt to locate the vehicle that it is coming from.
Fixed Posts
Fixed post is another common deployment for Security Guards. Fixed posts may include a static
posting in a food court, the main door of a bar, gatehouse, exit area, lobby, control centre or any
other areas of concern necessitating a strong security presence for a set period of time
Ensure you understand the purpose of your posting and tailor your activities according to the duties
required at your site and post.

Page 282 of 346 Basic Training Manual Version 10 – 14 March 2017 Paragon Security ©
 Paragon Academy Basic Security Training Manual

Control Centre
Guards posted at control centres will typically hold a team coordination role and be a central
conduit of information. These staffs are acting as coaches and resources to the rest of the team
deployed on patrols or fixed posts. They may serve as a proprietary dispatcher and telephone
switchboard for the site.
Duties may include keeping a radio log or shift summary noting all of the calls that the team
responds to. This role usually entails a monitoring function for CCTV systems, intrusion and fire
alarm controls and depending on the facility building critical functions such as elevators and
mechanical systems.
Control room staffs often serve as the resource that issues radios and keys or access cards and logs
any property found and turned in to security.

Page 283 of 346 Basic Training Manual Version 10 – 14 March 2017 Paragon Security ©
 Paragon Academy Basic Security Training Manual

9.3 Surveillance

9.3.1 Closed Circuit Television

Security Guards involved in monitoring C.C.T.V. must develop the habit of checking all cameras
and angles at frequent intervals to ensure the system is used to its full potential. Unless an incident
or threat is seen by the Security Guard it might go undetected.
When not occupied with other desk duties, Security Guards should monitor the C.C.T.V. cameras
for suspicious activity and conduct video patrols by viewing one camera for a few seconds and
then scrolling to the next, viewing it briefly. When viewing C.C.T.V. cameras, be alert for and
take action in relation to any conditions of note.

When you observe any noteworthy occurrence or anything suspicious initiate an investigation by
proceeding to the location of the untoward activity or dispatching patrol, if available.

9.3.2 Alarm Monitoring and Response

Alarm systems
Alarm systems are used for three basic purposes in a loss prevention program. Intrusion Alarms to
signal the entry into a facility or a specific area of the facility. Fire Alarms warn of various stages
of the development of fire or the activation of sprinkler systems. Special purpose alarms for critical
functions, temperature or the presence of fumes are also common.
Your response to alarms will be varied and depend on the type of system. The common methods
of monitoring alarm systems are a Central Station which monitors alarms from an offsite location,
proprietary system which is monitored centrally at the facility and local alarm systems which have
lights and/or audible signals such as a siren in the immediate vicinity of the alarmed point, only.

Alarm systems have various types of sensors which trigger the alarm including contact switches
for doors and windows, pressure devices such as mats on the floor, taut wire detectors or wire
tension in fences, photoelectric devices using a beam of light for large perimeter walls, motion
detection using passive infrared, microwave or ultrasonic for open spaces, sonic or noise detection
or various forms of vibration detectors, etc.

Page 284 of 346 Basic Training Manual Version 10 – 14 March 2017 Paragon Security ©
 Paragon Academy Basic Security Training Manual

Security response to alarms

Note that the alarm only indicates the possibility of an intrusion. The facts must be verified in
order to determine the appropriate response. Respond without delay. Different types of alarms
indicate different types of threats. By knowing the type of alarm and the location you are more
likely to identify the threat or cause. There are no false alarms as each one has a cause, even if it
is faulty sensors, control units or an environmental condition change.

Always work from the perimeter to the inner spaces of a zone in alarm. After verifying the visible
perimeter appears secure, attend at the control unit to check and verify the history of alarms and
the points that have been activated, if you are able to.
Check the specific area of the alarm to determine the apparent cause. If the alarm or area seems
normal you must investigate the remaining area and avoid tunnel vision as other conditions may
be found that require attention.
All alarm systems must be either reset after an alarm or have the zone that remains in alarm due
to a system fault by-passed to provide protection. Best practices indicate we should only bypass
interior points of protection, not the perimeter and the alarmed premises client should be notified.
If there is an immediate danger of an intruder you should call the police for assistance and await
their arrival. Keep the apparent point of intrusion under surveillance and direct the police to the
area when they arrive.
Thoroughly report all relevant information regarding your alarm investigation including all
emergency services attending, names and badge numbers.
Reporting Alarms
All alarms are incidents that must be reported as such. Even in the case of a “false alarm” a written
report is necessary on an Incident Report form. Your report should list the time the alarm was
activated, your dispatch time, arrival at the alarmed premises or zone and departure time. Note all
findings on arrival, actions taken, the cause of the alarm and the final status or disposition
concluding with your departure time.
Alarm Response Procedures

Responding to Intrusion or duress alarms (panic buttons) has a higher level of risk than many day-
to-day security activities. For this reason guards responding to intrusion alarms should always
consider their safety their highest priority. We strongly recommend that for your own personal
safety you closely adhere to the following when responding to alarms.

Before responding to any alarm scene, ensure that you have a working cell phone and/or radio.

Page 285 of 346 Basic Training Manual Version 10 – 14 March 2017 Paragon Security ©
 Paragon Academy Basic Security Training Manual

Always make sure that a responsible person is aware that you are responding to an alarm and the
location. At sites with multiple Security Guards this will typically be a co-worker, such as the
control centre guard who dispatched you.

At sites with single guard coverage, notify your dispatch when you detect an alarm or before
starting investigation. If the alarm seems particularly suspicious, consider advising your point of
contact to follow up with you shortly after you expect to be on scene.

Shortly after you arrive at the alarm scene, advise your point of contact of your status and what
your initial findings are. Remember that our primary functions at alarm scenes are to verify that
the premises are “all in order” and to determine the cause of the alarm.

When we find signs of forced entry or other untoward activity at an alarm, move to a safe location
to maintain surveillance of the apparent entry point and request police or security back up. Remain
very visible in the most obvious escape route, without blocking it. If you block the only escape
route you may be inviting violent retaliation from escaping burglars. Meet the police and direct
them to any damaged point of entry or suspicious vehicle near a ground entry point and other
concerns.

When investigating an upper floor alarm use the elevator and stop one floor above the alarm and
walk cautiously down the stairs to the floor of the alarm, if possible. For the top floor walk-up one
floor from the floor below.

Pay attention to your intuition at all alarm scenes. If a situation appears or feels dangerous it
probably is. Approach with caution and be alert.

Intrusion Detection Alarm Systems Technology

Large facilities and secure structures such as Military or transportation terminals (airports) use
layers of alarm detection equipment that could include various types of detectors starting at the far
reaches of a property such as alarming fence lines, setting balanced pressure sensors (liquid filled
hoses) or seismic detectors in the grounds, coupled with intelligent closed circuit television.
As an intruder moves closer to a facility, the sensors may include outdoor motion detection
technology such as microwave detectors or dual technology devices, infrared filtered light sensors
or photo beams.
Once the intruder reaches the buildings or structures of the facility, the building itself will be
alarmed with a number of different technologies, as well as “hardened” against attack to defeat
penetrating the physical barriers.

Page 286 of 346 Basic Training Manual Version 10 – 14 March 2017 Paragon Security ©
 Paragon Academy Basic Security Training Manual

You can well imagine that when these systems are coupled with a physical Security Guard
presence, monitoring and a systematic response, the potential intruder may be discouraged from
pursuing their goal.
Basic Design
Intrusion Detection (or Burglar) Alarm systems are operated using electricity. There are two basic
circuits that may be utilized:
1. Closed circuit – electricity continuously flows through the wiring until an event interrupts
it. The lack of electrical flow causes the alarm
2. Open circuit – electricity does not flow through the circuit until an event, then the presence
of electrical current causes an alarm
Most modern systems operate in the closed circuit format otherwise cutting the wires (or otherwise
disrupting the circuit) to a device would defeat it.

Alarm systems are connected two main ways. The various detectors communicate with the Central
Processing Unit or Control Unit.
1. Wireless – Narrow band radio frequency
2. Wired – low voltage
Three basic classes
Alarm systems include layers of protection, starting at the outer most range or perimeter, then
providing protection within a room, facility or structure and may be applied to individual objects
within the facility such as a valuable painting, hanging on a wall. These classes may be called:
1. Perimeter or point of entry
2. Space or general area
3. Object
Where the alert sounds
Alarm systems sound an alert and are monitored in three basic ways. Keep in mind that these levels
can be combined for a more effective response to an alarm. When an alarm device is activated it
can sound at various levels or in three basic areas.
1. Local
Local alarms include buzzers, bells, horns, sirens and/or lights at the point in alarm. These
are designed to startle and disperse the potential intruder as well as alert those nearby.
2. Proprietary

Page 287 of 346 Basic Training Manual Version 10 – 14 March 2017 Paragon Security ©
 Paragon Academy Basic Security Training Manual

Proprietary systems cause a warning and are monitored at a central point, usually within
the same property, facility or organization and result in a series of responses according to
the work instructions or procedures set out by the persons in charge. This is the type of
system that could be monitored by an onsite control room, staffed by a Dispatcher or
Control who contacts their own Guard staffs to respond and investigate.
3. Central monitoring
Central monitoring stations are generally off site facilities whose function and purpose is
to monitor alarms, usually by contract and providing service to more than one client, for a
fee and when an alarm is monitored this results in a series of responses according to the
work instructions or procedures set out by the persons in charge and the clients. This may
include contacting police or security professionals to respond and investigate
Two - way voice communication is another modern way of monitoring an area from a distance,
then providing direction and investigating before people are dispatched.
Types of Detectors
Photo beams or photo electric detectors
Modified light level or interruption of the beam activates these detectors. Usually infrared filters
are used to make the beams invisible to the naked eye. These may be referred to as stacking beams
and may be found outside, however are more commonly used inside warehouses and other large
structures. Many overhead loading dock doors could be covered with a few devices and points to
be connected utilizing this method.
When the light beam is disrupted an alarm is caused. This usually involves a sending unit and
receiving unit, one at each end.

Foil, Screens, Wire

Foil is the older of these technologies which operate on the same basic principles; a material that
electricity is passed through is applied to a surface such as a window. When the glass is broken or
surface altered, the circuit is broken causing the alarm.

Wire strain gauge/Fibre Optic

This technology also utilizes electricity or light. When the tension is increased on a structure such
as a fence being climbed, the change in either the tension or bend of light sends the alarm signal

Page 288 of 346 Basic Training Manual Version 10 – 14 March 2017 Paragon Security ©
 Paragon Academy Basic Security Training Manual

Modern glass window protection

Vibration Detectors have a simple mechanical construction that allows sensing of vibration when
glass is broken. One such example is a small metal ball nested between two or three wires in a V-
shape. When at rest, the ball maintains the electrical contact. When vibrated to a certain threshold,
the ball shakes causing loss of contact with one or more wires so there is a broken circuit and
subsequent alarm.
Glass Break Detectors (Acoustic) sense the frequency of breaking glass utilizing a microphone
and amplifier.
Sensitivity of the devices can be adjusted to allow for various environments such as being near a
freeway or airport and reducing false positives accounted to the surrounding activity. This
adjustability obviously has some limitations.

Pressure Mats
Pressure mats are an all but redundant technology that are placed under flooring or carpet and
sense the weight of a potential intruder. You may run into these but modern space detectors have
taken their place.

Fences
Fences are often alarmed by using wire tension detectors. A wire is stretched between chain links,
for example and the detector it is connected to registers a change in tension when a person climbs
the fence sending an alarm signal.

Seismic Detectors
Seismic detectors are special in-ground vibration detectors that pick up the vibrations of people
walking. These are more often applied in high security applications or used as portable devices by
investigators and military.

Door & Window Contacts

Door and window contacts come in two basic types:
1. Surface mounted
2. Recessed (hidden)

Page 289 of 346 Basic Training Manual Version 10 – 14 March 2017 Paragon Security ©
 Paragon Academy Basic Security Training Manual

Both types use two contacts, one with the switching mechanism, the other an inert magnet. When
the contacts are close together the magnet holds the switch in place. They are mounted to a door
or window and the adjacent frame so that when the door or window is opened the contacts separate,
sending a signal.

Space Detectors
PIR – Passive Infrared
PIRs sense the heat of persons or objects in an area. Most are designed to recognize movement of
heat patterns triggering an alarm when there is a potential intruder. Some more advanced units are
designed to recognize the heat pattern specific to people so they will not initiate alarms if a pet or
wildlife is present and reduce false positives,

Microwave
Microwave space detectors emanate a super high frequency electromagnetic energy that fills the
area it is tuned for and receives a signal coming back using an antenna. These versatile detectors
can be used indoors or out and sense changes in the energy sent out when it strikes an object that
is not normally present in the space.

Ultrasound detectors
Ultrasound detectors use the Doppler Effect similar to radar systems for weather detection or
detecting speeding cars. The frequency is higher than the human ear can hear.

Duo tech
Duo tech systems may use a combination of technologies such as ultrasound and microwave,
coupled with PIR to reduce false positives from ambient heat sources within the protected site.

Capacitance
Capacitance is an antiquated technology. This type of detector sends an electrical signal through
an object and when touched, the person touching it absorbs some of the energy, causing a change
and triggering the alarm. Used for safes, etc., you may come across it.

Page 290 of 346 Basic Training Manual Version 10 – 14 March 2017 Paragon Security ©
 Paragon Academy Basic Security Training Manual

Audio sensors
Audio sensors use microphones and amplifiers to pick up sound and trigger an alarm. These
systems are tuned and the technology is based on an audible event such as a window or door frame
breaking, tools scratching and intruders moving about inside the premises.

9.4 Lost and Found Property

Lost Property

If an occurrence of lost property is reported by the owner, the Security Guard will take a Report
from the Party, including the Person’s name, address and telephone number and a full description
of the Lost Property. If Credit Cards have been lost the Party should be advised to contact the
Issuer of the Card without delay and have it cancelled.
Details of the loss should be recorded in the lost and found log in the security office.

Found Property

Property that is found by or brought to Security Guards should be immediately (except during
emergencies) taken to a secure found property area, usually at the security office. Do not continue
to patrol while carrying around found property, especially small items with high value such as
watches, jewellery, etc.

It is preferable to have another person present to act as a witness when examining and listing the
found items or, at least, that the procedure be carried out in an area monitored by a CCTV camera.

It is also important to be mindful of the privacy aspects involved in looking through another
person’s property. Maintain the confidentiality of information obtained while conducting the
investigation and handle the items only as much as is necessary to get the job done.

All Found Property must be recorded in a lost and found log and tagged or bagged accordingly.
The tag/bag numbers should be consecutive and the number placed on the Property must
correspond with the entry in the log. The lost property section of the log should be checked to see
if a found article has been previously reported as lost. If so, the owner should be contacted and
arrangements made for its return.

Page 291 of 346 Basic Training Manual Version 10 – 14 March 2017 Paragon Security ©
 Paragon Academy Basic Security Training Manual

Found Property is stored according to your site’s policies and it is recommended an item be stored
for a period of at least 30 days and is then turned over to Property Management for disposal. Items
of value and cash should be stored in a separate secure area such as the Administration Office, as
soon as possible, for safe keeping.

When purses and wallets are turned in the contents should be examined in the presence of the
Finder or another Witness. Details of the contents and amount of cash found must be recorded
exactly in the Security Guard’s memo book and in the lost and found log. Items of clothing also
need to be tagged and entered in the lost and found log. Soiled items of clothing will not be retained
but disposed of in an appropriate manner.

Reconciliation

Some items that are received by Security as found property may contain information that can be
used to assist in the process of notifying the owner. As part of a good customer service program,
Security staff should take an active role in attempting to identify and contact the owner of found
property. This is best done as soon as is possible once an item is received by Security.

As in all cases, it is preferable to have another person present to act as a witness when examining
property to identify the owner. Some examples of information that can lead to identifying a
property owner are as follows.

Wallets may contain detailed identification that includes names, addresses, or telephone numbers
which can be used in attempts to contact the owner. A debit or credit card will generally have a
customer service hotline telephone number on the back of the card. Security can contact the hotline
and identify themselves and the site, as well as stating the card number. The bank can then
deactivate the card for security reasons and should also be able to contact the cardholder to inform
them that their card has been found and where it can be retrieved.

A cell phone or blackberry may contain phone listings that can be useful. Look for contacts titled
“work, home, mom etc.” In the case of a retail environment, there may be a merchant that
represents the phone service provider. If this is so, the merchant should be able to access the
customer profile via the telephone company’s service hotline and notify them.

Page 292 of 346 Basic Training Manual Version 10 – 14 March 2017 Paragon Security ©
 Paragon Academy Basic Security Training Manual

Use of Evidence Bags

It is recommended that tamper resistant, single use bags with imprinted serial numbers are used
for the storage of items of high value. These items should be sealed in the evidence bag to protect
the contents. Once the item is placed inside such a bag and the bag is sealed, the bag cannot be
reused because opening it will destroy the bag. In such an event, a new bag (with its own unique
serial number) must be used if the item needs to be returned to storage. These bags are commonly
referred to as Evidence Bags and should be transparent so that visual identification of the contents
is possible without having to break the seal on the bag.

Have the claimant sign for found property and record any items such as the bag used in the ”chain
of custody section” as well as any other related log that is in use. Also list the contents being
returned in your memo book and have the claimant sign the memo book at the end of that list.

Claiming Property

Persons claiming Found Property must supply proper identification and be able to describe the
Property prior to it being shown to them. The Guard shall record the details of the identification in
his/her memo book. A phone number should also be recorded. The Claimant must also sign the
Lost and Found Binder as having received the Property. Property will not be released if it cannot
be described or if no identification is provided.

Page 293 of 346 Basic Training Manual Version 10 – 14 March 2017 Paragon Security ©
 Paragon Academy Basic Security Training Manual

9.5 Parcels & Deliveries

Even if there is no established procedure for package control at the facility a Security Guard must
question persons removing company owned material. A polite question may confirm that the
removal is authorized and can be recorded on the guard report for later follow up to confirm the
authorization.
On occasion, a person related to the site such as a resident, client employee or tenant may request
that security take receipt of cash or cheques for the purpose of providing payment for a delivery
expected to arrive while they are absent.
Security Guards should not receive or store cash on behalf of anyone unless this is specified as a
duty in your work instructions. Security may accept cheques or money orders for the purpose of
providing payment for deliveries if they ensure that any cheques or money orders are stored in a
secure manner, such as drawers or cabinets that are equipped with locks.
In the event that the Security Guard must refuse receipt of valuables, politely refuse and explain
to the person that you are not permitted to accept such items. Inform the person that clarification
of this policy can be obtained by contacting the Property Management Office during business
hours.
Package control usually involves the use of a material pass for authorization. The pass identifies
the item to be removed and is signed by a supervisor or manager of the client company. When
checking package and material passes make sure the item described is exactly the item being
removed.
Ensure the person named on the pass is the person taking the item and the person who signed the
authorization is approved to do so. Check the signature appears genuine. If in doubt, check further
with the person who authorized the pass or the appropriate client representative.
Package control may require that Security Guards randomly inspect or check all packages that
leave a site. When checking packages request the person open the package for inspection. Never
use force or touch any person to conduct a search. Never reach into purses, backpacks packages
or lunch boxes. Ask the person to remove any items you wish to inspect. If questionable items are
found ask if it was authorized. If authorization has not been given ask the person to wait and
contact the client representative to come to the post and decide what action is to be taken.
As with any incident complete a full report.

Page 294 of 346 Basic Training Manual Version 10 – 14 March 2017 Paragon Security ©
 Paragon Academy Basic Security Training Manual

9.6 Basic Elements of Security

9.6.1 Access Control

Access control procedures are designed to allow the flow of authorized persons, vehicles and
property in or out of a facility. Access control ensures that only those people with a legitimate
reason gain entrance to a facility. A total access control program is also concerned with the control
of movement within a facility. Only those persons with authorization should be able to gain
entrance to a specified area within a facility, particularly if there are high security areas such as
“airside” at an airport, computer control rooms, high value areas or bonded warehouses, etc.

Visitors
Whenever greeting visitors at a facility greet all visitors immediately and make eye contact. If you
are engaged in another priority duty, take a moment to explain to the visitor you will attend to their
needs as soon as possible. Be polite and courteous and ask the visitor if you can help them. Find
out the name of the person they are meeting and if they are expected. Ask the visitor to wait a
moment while you call the person they came to see. If that person isn’t available ask them if there
is anyone else that could help them.
Exercise diplomacy and if the person they came to see is too busy or won’t see them without an
appointment, explain this in a diplomatic way. Never lose your temper with a persistent visitor.
Follow your site procedures for greeting visitors. Have the person sign in or issue an
identification card according to your instructions.
Explain any required policies such as safety equipment that must be worn like protective glasses
or hard hats and issue them to the visitor. Watch for the visitor leaving and remind them to sign
out or return their pass. Remember you represent the client’s company to the visitor. Ensure the
visitor’s impression of the client and security is positive.
Client Employees
Treat all employees in a fair but firm manner. Identify the employee either by personal recognition
or by badge according to your instructions. Make eye contact and verify the employee’s right to
enter. Is it a regular shift or overtime? Employees are not usually permitted on the premises other
than during their regular shifts or for approved overtime.
Follow security procedures when interacting with employees. If passes or company identification
are required, insist on inspecting identification in a polite but firm manner if it is not visible in the
required areas. If an employee refuses to comply, contact their supervisor or the client
representative specified by your post orders and advise them of the circumstances. Do not use

Page 295 of 346 Basic Training Manual Version 10 – 14 March 2017 Paragon Security ©
 Paragon Academy Basic Security Training Manual

force to prevent entrance. Maintain a professional approach at all times and if an employee refuses
to follow procedures, advise client management so that they can follow up. Avoid confrontations
with a client employee.

9.6.2 Key control

Keys and access cards are an important element in the overall protection of the site. The Security
Guard must know the proper use of keys and the safeguards used to control keys. You are
responsible for the careful handling and carrying of keys during any work assignment. This
responsibility is of the utmost importance to the safety and security of the Client’s premises.

The following procedures apply to all keys and access cards that are controlled by Security. Ensure
that the keys required are on a specified ring, and access cards are audited at the beginning of each
shift. Count and check the keys for damage and indicate any problems on your report. Make sure
you escalate any critical concerns such as broken keys required to access any areas that would
prevent you completing critical duties.

The Security Guard must document any occurrences that arise during their prescribed shift related
to damage or loss of keys, cards, or lock mechanisms. This includes keys that do not operate
properly or do not access a previously accessible area for patrol and any other similar situations.
If a key is broken, goes missing or does not operate properly the Security Guard should follow
their procedures or contact their supervisor or dispatch immediately, failing any standing order
related to these concerns and inform them of the situation. A detailed report must be completed.

Note: You must notify your company of any lost or missing keys immediately for your
protection, the client and the contract security company’s protection.

Do not lend, loan or give your keys to other people. The keys in your possession are your
responsibility and having them out of your possession will result in problems. If someone requests
access to an area and you are authorized to give access always take the person to the locked area,
never give out your keys.

It is critical that continuity of possession exists in respect to the keys that Security Guards use,
carry, transfer or place in storage. Continuity of Possession means that it is possible to trace who
had the keys on a certain date and at a certain time or exactly where they were.

No Security Guard should go off duty until the relieving Guard is in possession of the security
keys. A full key audit should be conducted immediately at shift change or hand off. After the

Page 296 of 346 Basic Training Manual Version 10 – 14 March 2017 Paragon Security ©
 Paragon Academy Basic Security Training Manual

security keys are audited the Security Guard coming on duty should sign for them in the memo
book of the off-going Security Guard, with a note as to the count and condition.

The keys issued to Security Guards for their shift must be protected from loss and unauthorized
use. The loss of keys is a serious breach of security. It is an important responsibility that must not
be taken lightly.
Often Security Guards control keys that will be issued to cleaners or other persons during the
course of their shift. Careful control in the issue of these keys will reduce the possibility of loss
or theft. Always be sure the person to whom you issue the keys is authorized to have them.
9.6.3 Vehicle Control

Vehicle access to a facility must be carefully controlled for both safety reasons and to prevent
theft. Only authorized vehicles should be allowed entry. Security Guards do not have the authority
to enforce the Highway Traffic Act in Ontario so your authority to intervene with use of vehicles
in contravention of a client’s policies would be under the Trespass to Property Act, Criminal Code
in the event of dangerous operation that is likely to endanger life, or as a Certified Contract Officer
if sworn under Municipal By Laws for enforcement.
Security Guards protecting private property have the same authority as the owner of the property.
It is your responsibility to see that traffic moves safely on your site. You do not have the authority
to direct traffic in public areas, including roadways. However, your uniform and training may
result in police directing you to help during an emergency. By law, you must assist the police when
asked.
Delivery vehicles may be required to produce a bill of lading to demonstrate authorization. Private
vehicles may have or need to be issued special passes. Check the procedures at your site and
enforce the policies accordingly.
Vehicles leaving the premises may be subject to inspection on exit. The purpose of the inspection
will be to make sure only authorized material is being removed. Comparison of the vehicle
contents with the bill of lading will verify the contents are authorized for removal.
After hours deliveries should not be accepted unless they have been pre-authorized. Deliveries
that arrive without pre authorization must be verified by a telephone call.
Another function you may be asked to fulfill is ensuring the smooth and safe flow of traffic in busy
areas on private property, whether in delivery areas, special standing zones, parking lots or
facilities or at entrance points. Good examples of this duty include a passenger drop off where
temporary standing is allowed for this purpose, taxi stands or shopping centres during holiday
shopping seasons.

Page 297 of 346 Basic Training Manual Version 10 – 14 March 2017 Paragon Security ©
 Paragon Academy Basic Security Training Manual

Congested traffic conditions can cause impatient drivers who may handle their vehicle unsafely
out of frustration. It is important to empathize with people behaving this way and use influence
and compassion to persuade them to obey the rules. You must also ensure people are safe.
Proactive security measures conducting traffic control proactively prevents problems such as
potential property damage and injuries or deaths resulting from conflicting flows of vehicle and
pedestrian traffic and unacceptable behaviours.
This duty requires patience, tenacity, your full attention and a clear understanding of safe traffic
practices, the law, your site policies and strong presence not to mention problem solving skills. A
solid understanding of the rules of the road as set out in documents such as the Ontario Drivers
Handbook will help you accomplishing this daunting task.
Do not take unnecessary risks such as standing in front of moving vehicles, thinking you will serve
as a barricade. You should use proper equipment and dress appropriately for the weather
conditions, including reflective uniform. Use of devices such as whistles, flashlights, reflective
signs, barricades, and traffic flares help to get a driver’s attention and help protect you from being
inadvertently run down. High visibility measures are required both day and night.
Remember that a driver may not be paying attention or see you. Emergency lights, flares a car
wreck and emergency crews all draw attention, potentially distracting the driver. Use flares in
advance of the accident or area you are working. Pick up any debris and left over flares when you
are done.
Position yourself so you can see and be seen by pedestrians and drivers. Ensure your deportment
says you are in command of traffic in the area. One of the easiest, most effective and most
dangerous ways to meet these needs is by taking a place in the centre of the intersection.
If you are going to position yourself in the middle of the intersection walk to the edge of the road,
then stop pause and evaluate. Get the attention of drivers with eye contact and use a signal to stop.
Once the traffic is stopped walk cautiously toward your destination, ensuring all drivers see you.
When in position, you are ready to assume traffic control.
Hand Signals
Proper hand signals are essential to effective traffic control. A Security Guard must know universal
hand signals. Standard gestures for traffic control have been developed in North America. Do not
attempt to amuse the crowds like the New York City traffic cop at Christmas time, using animated
motions.
Most people will respond to standard signals predictably. If you use practices consistent with the
standards you will gain better control and avoid confusion. You will also be able to coordinate
your signals with anyone you are assisting. Practice these important hand signals so that they
become automatic.

Page 298 of 346 Basic Training Manual Version 10 – 14 March 2017 Paragon Security ©
 Paragon Academy Basic Security Training Manual

Stopping Traffic
1. Choose the vehicle you want to stop.
2. Look directly at the driver and point at them with your arm fully extended.
3. Make sure the driver has noticed your gesture, and then raise your hand so that your palm is
facing the driver. Bend your arm slightly at the elbow.
4. Hold your position until the vehicle has stopped.
5. Keep your arm in position and turn your head to the opposite direction.
6. Repeat steps 1 to 4.
7. Do not lower your arms until all traffic has completely stopped.

Figure 9.6.3.a

Page 299 of 346 Basic Training Manual Version 10 – 14 March 2017 Paragon Security ©
 Paragon Academy Basic Security Training Manual

Starting Traffic

1. Make sure the intersection is clear and safe.

2. Place yourself with your side toward to the vehicles you want to move.
3. Look directly at the lead driver and point at them with your arm fully extended.
4. Make sure the driver has noticed your gesture. Turn your palm up, bend your arm at the elbow,
and swing your hand up from the elbow and past your chin making a semi-circle. This looks
like the common signal used for “Come here.”
5. Repeat the gesture until the traffic begins to move.
6. When the traffic begins to move, drop your hand to the side.
7. Repeat steps 3 to 5 with your other arm for traffic coming from the opposite direction.
Some drivers may need extra help to start moving. Repeat the gesture, but don’t overuse it to avoid
intimidating a driver. If traffic is to be started from both directions, repeat the procedure for traffic
coming from the other direction.
Figure 9.6.3.b

Page 300 of 346 Basic Training Manual Version 10 – 14 March 2017 Paragon Security ©
 Paragon Academy Basic Security Training Manual

Left Turns (See Figure 9.6.3.c)

These turns are very dangerous, as vehicles will be turning into oncoming traffic. You must make
a decision about when to allow left turns depending on how heavy the traffic is and how many
people need to make the turn. Use caution:
1. Stop the traffic coming from the opposite direction. Hold the stop signal.
2. Make sure the intersection is clear of vehicles and pedestrians.
3. With your opposite arm fully extended, point at the driver who wants to turn.
4. Make sure the driver has noticed you. Make a downward swinging motion in the direction you
want the driver to go.

Figure 9.6.3.c

Page 301 of 346 Basic Training Manual Version 10 – 14 March 2017 Paragon Security ©
 Paragon Academy Basic Security Training Manual

Right Turns
Drivers will need little direction when making right turns, as they will not be turning directly into
oncoming traffic. If traffic is heavy, you may need to stop drivers turning right to let traffic pass
from the other direction. Also if there are many vehicles turning right, you may need to hold back
pedestrians, so that the traffic can flow smoothly. If you need to signal a right turn, make sure the
driver has noticed you and then make a downward swinging motion to the driver’s right.
Drivers may get frustrated if they are subjected to long waits or no movement. A driver who is at
the end of a long line-up that has not moved in quite some time may feel that there is something
wrong. People in this situation may wrongly conclude that there is a stalled car and may try to get
around by driving in the wrong lane, over curbs, and so on. This type of activity leads to accidents.
Emergency vehicles have the right of way. Stop all vehicles and pedestrians when an emergency
vehicle is approaching. Give the driver a “Go” signal when the intersection is clear. If the driver
of the emergency vehicle signals for a turn, motion in the proper direction, showing that the way
is clear. Be alert for more emergency vehicles following.
Some Security Guards will issue Municipal Parking Infraction Notices in restricted areas such as
accessible parking (disabled parking spaces), loading zones and fire routes. If you will be engaging
in this duty, special training is required by the Municipality and is beyond the scope of this course.

9.6.4 Crowd Control

Crowds often form as a result of normal activities at a site such as line ups at a food court or bar,
movies and other events including celebrity visits and holiday shopping and so on. It is imperative
that Guards have a good understanding of techniques to proactively control crowds so that a
peaceful gathering does not become an angry mob. You need to be able to properly read and judge
people, as well as reviewing some of the techniques noted in this section.
Proactive measures to keep long lines orderly include using stanchions, ropes and barricades. If
these items are not available at your site, caution tape can be used to some effect. In addition to
physical measures, Security Guards must be present and monitor the crowd, keeping a firm but
subtle show of control to prevent problems.
It is important to understand that Security Professionals are not trained and equipped to act as
Public Order (Service) Units, or riot squads. The Police are officially tasked with public order so
the role of security will involve calming situations according to their ability and training and if
necessary, calling for assistance and facilitating quick response for the authorities in situations
where there is a high risk.

Page 302 of 346 Basic Training Manual Version 10 – 14 March 2017 Paragon Security ©
 Paragon Academy Basic Security Training Manual

That being said, Security Professionals are often on the scene when a spontaneous public
disturbance occurs and have an important role to play before the authorities arrive. In other
situations, Security Guards are hired for short term assignments where there is a higher risk of
crowds and disorder, for example during planned protests or labour disputes. In addition, some
facilities have a higher risk due to the presence of government offices, consulates or embassies.
Any problematic occurrence such as a planned disruption, arrest or dispute between third parties,
not to mention crowds gathered for entertainment can present a potentially volatile situation either
sparked by mishandling or even due to factors beyond our control.
In order to prevent or minimize disturbances, early threat recognition is the key. Security Guards
must recognize the danger signs and react appropriately given all of the circumstances. There are
recognized tactics that are legal, reasonable and safe when undertaken cautiously and properly
selected and trained personnel are utilized.
Security Guards must have a demeanour with an outward appearance of calm despite any level of
provocation. A disciplined and professional approach is required and Security Guards must not be
seen as over-bearing, biased, weak, afraid or easily angered under any circumstances. You must
remain strong, stoic, with a military style presence and bearing in these settings, yet with the
customer service and friendly approach of a non-partisan protector for all parties.

Definition
A Crowd is a group of three or more persons assembled for a common purpose and/or in
association in one place. Please note that under the Charter citizens, have the right to freedom of
association, freedom of (lawful) peaceful assembly and freedom of speech.
Crowd
• Peaceful assembly – no criminal behaviour
• Individual control, not group control
• Limited organization and leadership
• Law abiding
• Limited group cohesion
Unlawful Assembly
Unlawful assemblies are defined under Section 63 in the criminal code. An unlawful assembly
consists of 3 or more persons. Unlawful assemblies are behaving in such a fashion that they are
committing a crime; assault, property damage, looting, disturbing the peace.
(R v Patterson 1931 lawful meeting & unlawful assembly)

Page 303 of 346 Basic Training Manual Version 10 – 14 March 2017 Paragon Security ©
 Paragon Academy Basic Security Training Manual

Riot
A riot is twelve or more persons who are unlawfully or riotously assembled – an unlawful assembly
that has begun to disturb the peace tumultuously – disorderly, noisy, turbulent, marked by
disorderly commotion.
1. At least three persons
2. Common purpose
3. Execution of common purpose
4. Intent to help one another, by force
5. Force used to alarm at least one person (a reasonably firm & courageous person)
(R v Lockhart [1976])

Recommended actions in crowd situations

• Early deployment
• Delegate someone to police liaison
• Obtain names and responsibilities of officers
• Protect members of lawful and peaceful assemblies
• Protect lives and property of citizens
• Perform tasks using minimal amount of force
• Set reasonable limits
• Work inside a lawfully assembled crowd

Page 304 of 346 Basic Training Manual Version 10 – 14 March 2017 Paragon Security ©
 Paragon Academy Basic Security Training Manual

Recommended actions in unlawful assembly/mob situations

• Face the crowd
• Use requests
• Friendly/polite
• Impartiality
• Identify leader
• Don’t argue
• Show respect
• Inform the crowd
• Cooperate with leaders
• Don’t bluff
• Ignore baiting/taunting – intense noise, spitting, minor pushing
• Contain an unlawfully assembled crowd from the perimeter and obtain assistance
Prediction
When does a lawfully assembled crowd become an unlawful assembly? Look for these danger
cues:
• The Threshold Concept - an unlawful act moving the crowd past the threshold of lawful to
unlawful assembly
• The nature and demeanour of the crowd changes
• This could be throwing of a rock or bottle
• An assault
• At celebrations such as Mardi Gras or Spring Break type events, forced disrobing
• Pushing Security Guards

A threshold event indicates a change of tactics is required and escalation to authorities if they are
not already present.
Prevention
What steps can be taken that will have a high likelihood of preventing a mob or riot?
• Pre-event briefings
• Surveillance, police liaison, assign a Guard to document
• Meet & greet early (subtle show of control), use small unit deployment tactics and call for
other resources, video documentation (burn a copy)

Page 305 of 346 Basic Training Manual Version 10 – 14 March 2017 Paragon Security ©
 Paragon Academy Basic Security Training Manual

Early Intervention & Dispersal

Work inside a crowd – move about, calmly using appropriate greetings with persons up close.
Make eye contact and do not respond to taunts or baiting tactics but make note of these persons
for later identification, if required.
Maintain tactical positioning and stance during your contacts. Use contact-cover principles. Ensure
you do not allow yourself to be cornered and maintain escape routes to positions of safety.
Preferably work in teams of four Guards, three as an alternative and two at the very least.
Avoid arrests in crowd situations.
Use tactical communications and calming techniques. When individuals make provocative
statements ask individuals what the reason/purpose for their attendance at the event is. You may
ask if their purpose is to be arrested. If they respond, “Yes,” address the next person nearby and
ask them if they are with the person and if their intent is also to be arrested.
Containment
• Contain a mob from the outside and keep innocent parties back
• Immediately call for assistance from the authorities
• Identify instigators & controllers for the authorities
Have a plan – extract innocent parties under your protection, if it is safe to do so and know where
you can retreat to a safe area. Pre-plan escape routes and safe areas and communicate these to the
team while keeping the information confidential and on a need to know basis.

Page 306 of 346 Basic Training Manual Version 10 – 14 March 2017 Paragon Security ©
 Paragon Academy Basic Security Training Manual

9.7 Drug effects

Common Drugs

Drug name Class Effects

Alcohol Depressant • Low blood pressure, Slow breathing
Liquor, beer, wine • Muscle relaxation Addiction
• Disturbed sleep
Shoe Polish • Fetal alcohol syndrome Alcohol poisoning
Cleaning Sprays • Death
Isopropyl or rubbing alcohol • Lower inhibitions, Impaired motor skills Slurred speech
• Nausea
Cough syrups
• Vomiting
• Headaches
• Hangovers
• Dehydration

Amphetamines Stimulant • Psychosis

• Hallucinations
• Delusions
• High blood pressure
• Depression, Sleeplessness
Cocaine (Crack) Stimulant • Highly addictive. Dominant drug on the streets of the GTA is Crack
– it’s cheap & creates euphoria.
• Short highs, instant addiction, craving creates a ready supply of
addicts for dealers.
• Causes paranoia, hallucinations, aggression, insomnia, depression.

Page 307 of 346 Basic Training Manual Version 10 – 14 March 2017 Paragon Security ©
 Paragon Academy Basic Security Training Manual

Drug name Class Effects

Designer Drugs Synthetic (Heroin) • Respiratory paralysis
Ecstasy Stimulant • Psychiatric disturbance; panic, anxiety, depression, paranoia
• Muscle tension, nausea, blurred vision, increased heart rate
• Nausea, sweating, tremors (shaking), hallucinations
• Temporary loss of consciousness, chills
• Sleep problems, loss of appetite.

Ephedrine “Herbal Ecstasy” Stimulant • High blood pressure

Coffee combined • Increased heart rate
with Ephedrine • Seizures, heart attack, stroke & death
Gamma Hydroxybutyric Acid Depressant - • Intoxicant
(GHB) Inhalant • Date Rape Drug
• Dizziness
• Agitation
• Drowsiness
Heroin Opiates • Addiction & high tolerance developed
Note – used medically • Users need more & more
• Slurred speech, slow gait
Other opiates include; opium, • constricted (small) pupils
morphine, codeine • Droopy eyelids, loss of night vision, fall asleep
• Respiratory depression & failure
• Dry/itchy skin, skin infections
• HIV, hepatitis due to injection

Page 308 of 346 Basic Training Manual Version 10 – 14 March 2017 Paragon Security ©
 Paragon Academy Basic Security Training Manual

Drug name Class Effects

Household sprays Inhalants • Euphoria
Gasoline • Headache, muscle weakness
Toluene – solvent made from coal tar • Abdominal pain, nausea, loss of appetite
& petroleum • Nose bleed
• Loss of coordination, fatigue
• Liver, lung & kidney damage
• Mood swings & violence
• Internal chemical imbalances
• Decreased heart & respiratory rates
• Causes neuropathy – nervous system disease, characterized by weakness and
twitching, or “tizzing.”
LSD Hallucinogen • Hallucinations
Lysergic Acid Diethyl Amide • High body temperature, increased blood pressure
Acid, microdot, tabs, doses, trips • Loss of appetite, sleeplessness,
• Tremors
• Chronic recurring hallucinations (“bad trips”).
Marijuana – Cannabis Depressant – • Bloodshot eyes
hallucinogen • Dry mouth
• Lack of comprehension, altered perception of time
• Loss of comprehension & coordination
• Impaired driving
• Paranoia, anxiety attacks, altered cognitive state (mental/knowledge), Impaired
learning, judgment, loss of speaking & listening skills.

Methadone Synthetic (opiate) • Fatigue, sweating, heart arrhythmia

• Hallucination, mood swings, agitation
• Skin rash, itchy dry skin
• Low blood pressure, headache, vomiting

Page 309 of 346 Basic Training Manual Version 10 – 14 March 2017 Paragon Security ©
 Paragon Academy Basic Security Training Manual

Drug name Class Effects

Speed, Meth, Crank, Ice Methamphetamine • Addiction
• Irritability, aggression, hallucinations, paranoia
• Hypothermia (cold)
• Stroke, heart arrhythmia
• Formication - an hallucination that bugs are crawling under the skin. Causes
toxicity in the cardio-vascular system.
Mushrooms Hallucinogen • Hallucinations
“Magic Mushrooms” • High blood pressure
“Shrooms” • Sweating, nausea
PCP Hallucinogen • Hallucinations
Angel Dust • Out of body experiences
• Impaired motor function, loss of coordination
• Impervious to pain
• Disorientation
• Fear, panic, aggression
• Respiratory attack.
Ritalin Stimulant • Severe headaches
Used medically • Loss of appetite
ADD & Hyperactivity
Often prescribed to children
• Fever, convulsions
Tablets crushed & snorted or • Paranoia, hallucination, tremors, muscle twitch
injected • Behaviours: repeated movements & useless tasks

Page 310 of 346 Basic Training Manual Version 10 – 14 March 2017 Paragon Security ©
 Paragon Academy Basic Security Training Manual

Drug name Class Effects

Steroids (Anabolic) • Aggression, depression, mood swings
• Liver cancer
• Sterility, creates cross gender traits, severe acne
Bath Salts (PABS) Stimulant • High heart rate, high blood pressure, hyperthermia (over heating)
Psycho Active Bath Salts • Paranoia, insomnia, violence
• Agitation, delusions, hallucination

Krokodil - Desomorphine Synthetic heroin • Life expectancy is one to two years

equivalent • Rotting green, bumpy, scaly, peeling skin and flesh
• Exposure of bare bone
• Speech impediment, vacant gaze, erratic body movements
• “Savage” withdrawal symptoms – worse than heroin

Page 311 of 346 Basic Training Manual Version 10 – 14 March 2017 Paragon Security ©
 Paragon Academy Basic Security Training Manual

Responses to Drug Induced Behaviours

In all cases when dealing with a substance abuser, there is an increased risk due to unpredictability.
This is particularly true of a substance abuser who is suffering an altered cognitive state, psychosis,
hallucinations, formication or any of the other signs or symptoms including aggression, panic,
anxiety or hostility.
Some substance abusers are impervious to pain or exhibit abnormal physical strength. Some drug
users have been known to continue hitting a person with a broken hand or arm. Others have leapt
from one balcony to another, high up in a building that most people would not attempt.
Do not corner or threaten a substance abuser. Use calming language and a normal, relaxed tone.
Do not humour someone who is hallucinating, pretending that you see what they are seeing. You
should calmly tell them that you believe that they see whatever it is and that you cannot.
If there is a protection of life issue as a result of the abuser suffering life threatening physiological
changes, assist them with first aid if it is safe to do so. Keep in mind that the unpredictable nature
of their condition can cause an apparent tranquil person to become suddenly aggressive. First Aid
includes calling 911 for other resources in these circumstances. Request both Police and
Ambulance and advise the operator specifically what the situation is.
You may need to consider requesting other Security and police resources and may need to consider
physical intervention if you or someone under your protection is at risk and there is no other choice.
In all other circumstances you are better to calm the individual, contain the area, retreat to a
position of safety, call for the authorities to assist and monitor the situation.
Smart Serve
The Smart Serve Responsible Training Program is mandatory training for owners, managers,
security staffs and servers in establishments licensed to sell alcohol to the general public. This
program was developed by Smart Serve Ontario, a division of the Hospitality Industry Training
Organization of Ontario.
Smart serve sets standards for the hours during which alcoholic beverages may be sold and clearly
spells out the regulations related to age restrictions, acceptable identification, and standards related
to best practices, do’s and don’ts. Further best practices training includes how to safely plan and
deliver an event that will serve alcoholic beverages.
The program elaborates information regarding your responsibilities and liabilities and how to
reduce risks.

Page 312 of 346 Basic Training Manual Version 10 – 14 March 2017 Paragon Security ©
 Paragon Academy Basic Security Training Manual

Handling intoxicated persons is problematic. Smart serve teaches people and reinforces the Liquor
License Act regulations in regards to not serving intoxicated persons and if early signs of
intoxication present such as arguments, recommendations to try and defuse the problem using a
friendly approach.
Signs and symptoms of alcoholic intoxication include:
• Fumbling, stumbling or weaving
• Change in speech volume or pace, slurred speech
• Sleepiness
• Red eyes, excessive sweating
• Decreased alertness
• Noticeably shallow breathing
Planning should include event policies and procedures, developing floor plans, safe serving
practices, providing food as well as beverages and managing risks.
9.8 Section Summary

Security Guards fulfill many different functions as part of their day to day work activities. Paying
close attention to and developing skill using basic security procedures to guide you will accomplish
the objectives of protecting life, property and confidential information while minimizing liability
and keeping you safe.
Patrol (including fixed posts) and observation are the two single most important skills you will use
and yet these are the skills often overlooked. They are paramount for your development as a
security professional.
The procedures allow us to avoid making costly mistakes. The basic procedures are based on best
practices. You must adhere to any specific work instructions (procedures) provided by your post
orders at your site and any standing orders of your employer. This is consistent with the old saying
“house rules supersede the general orders.”

Page 313 of 346 Basic Training Manual Version 10 – 14 March 2017 Paragon Security ©
 Paragon Academy Basic Security Training Manual

10.0 – Medical Emergencies

10.1 Introduction

Certification in a WSIB certified training program to a minimum standard of Emergency First Aid,
CPR – Level B is required to obtain and hold a valid Security Guard License in Ontario. First Aid
certification at this level expires every two years and must be maintained. It is recommended
Cardio Pulmonary Resuscitation (CPR) training be refreshed annually, particularly if your
worksite is equipped with an AED (Automated External Defibrillator.
Detailed First Aids skills will be practiced in the EFA-C (Emergency First Aid and CPR) program
offered on day 5 of your Paragon training program. Paragon has partnered with Respond Solutions
Inc. Operating under the authorization of the Ottawa Paramedic Service and the Medical Director,
Doctor Kristian Davis. The training is provided by Paragon’s certified First Aid Instructors and
meets the Ministry standard of being WSIB Ontario approved (Workplace Safety and Insurance
Board).
Security Guards may be required to provide assistance to those who are injured, ill or involved in
accidents at the site as an emergency First Aid responder. This section will provide a brief
overview of Emergency Scene Management and follow up.
Security Guards must be competent according to their training and have the consent of a patient;
either absolute consent or implied consent before providing any first aid treatment for a patient.
10.2 Emergency Scene Management

In anticipation of medical emergencies and/or personal injury accidents Security Guards should
be familiar with the locations of all first aid kits, oxygen units and AED or Automated External
Defibrillators, if the site is equipped with this.

Identify any on site resources, such as Doctors or Dentists that could provide assistance and
determine their hours of business. Resources may include other persons trained in first aid, a
company nurse, a company doctor, or tenants that are doctors. Keep in mind that these resources
could be needed during a multiple casualty situation.

Upon being dispatched, summoned to, or coming across a Medical Emergency the Security Guard
will need to respond according to the following priorities:

Stop, pause and evaluate by assessing any potential dangers to their self such as fire, broken glass,
fluids including gasoline or hazardous materials, live electrical wires, moving vehicles and
potentially hostile people.

Page 314 of 346 Basic Training Manual Version 10 – 14 March 2017 Paragon Security ©
 Paragon Academy Basic Security Training Manual

Take personal protective measures (“P.P.E. – Personal Protective Equipment”) by using proper
gloves as a barrier and making use of other equipment such as CPR pocket masks or face shields,
if required. Conduct an initial assessment including checking for levels of consciousness and
responsiveness as well as the mechanism of injury.

If it is appropriate and safe to do so, render first aid, including calling Emergency 911 or sending
someone to do so on your behalf. Meet or designate someone to meet Emergency services at a pre-
determined point on the perimeter to guide them to the patient.

If first aid treatment was started, continue providing first aid until a more qualified responder such
as Police, Fire or Paramedic professionals relieve you and take over care of the patient.

Attempt to obtain the names and addresses of any witnesses as soon as you can, as many witnesses
will fade into the background as soon as the victim is transported offsite; security, police and other
investigating agencies such as the Ministry of Labour need this information.
Consider the possibility that this could be a crime scene (Did the victim collapse for medical
reasons or was it an assault and robbery, such as a purse snatching? Were they cut or stabbed? Did
they slip and fall or were they pushed?), quickly establish how the victim got into this condition.
Are the police needed in addition to an Ambulance? If further investigation is required secure the
scene for the police.

At sites equipped with recorded C.C.T.V. cameras, ensure that the relevant video is preserved for
evidence. Make detailed notes in your memo book, especially with regard to conditions at the
scene and anything the victim said.

Submit a detailed Special Occurrence Report fully describing the incident, including the person’s
name and address, the suspected nature of the medical emergency, phone numbers, identification
numbers of emergency vehicles, whether treatment was accepted or declined, name of the hospital
where the victim was taken and your actions.

Under no circumstances should you assume liability by making inappropriate statements such as,
“We do reports on that all the time and management never fixes it” or “You are the fourth person
this has happened to this year.”

Page 315 of 346 Basic Training Manual Version 10 – 14 March 2017 Paragon Security ©
 Paragon Academy Basic Security Training Manual

Slip, Trip and Fall Incidents are the leading cause of litigation against property owners. To protect
our clients, Security Guards must conduct very thorough investigations of all slip, trip and fall
incidents. The following information is required in your report:

• The condition of the victim and whether or not they require First Aid or Medical Attention
• If they refuse Medical Assistance, please document it in your memo book and in your
Special Occurrence Report
• If medical treatment is declined, please request the victim sign off an entry in your memo
book stating “Medical assistance declined”
• The condition of the floor; wet or dry, clean or dirty, the last time it was cleaned, wet floor
signs in place, mats in the area to wipe feet, poorly aligned sidewalk edges or holes or
cracks in the floor
• The victim’s description of the accident and how it occurred, ask them why they were at
the property today and record their response; at retail properties note whether or not they
had any purchases with them
• Make note of all cuts or bruises or other medical problems that the victim states initially
developed because of the fall

Record a full description of the victim, including their age and the clothes they were wearing.
Please make special note of their footwear such as if it is suitable for the weather conditions
outside, particularly for snowy or rainy conditions, or are they wearing leather soled footwear
unsuited to the outside weather, or if the person is wearing shoes for outside weather not suitable
to the flooring, were they wearing eye glasses, what were the carrying, how many items were they
carrying, did they appear to be overloaded?

Were they using a cane or walker? Did the victim appear/smell intoxicated, did the victim appear
to be medicated or mention a medication, stating words such as, “I must take my blood pressure
medication by 2:00 p.m.” Did the victim mention any previous accident?

Did anyone with the victim appear to be gathering evidence, for example was anyone taking
pictures? Did the victim or anyone with the victim mention lawsuits or litigation? For all incidents,
but especially outdoor incidents note the weather conditions including temperature, humidity,
precipitation and wind direction and speed.

Page 316 of 346 Basic Training Manual Version 10 – 14 March 2017 Paragon Security ©
 Paragon Academy Basic Security Training Manual

Witnesses can easily “drift off.” As quickly as your duties allow obtain the names, addresses and
phone numbers of all witnesses, including a brief statement describing what they saw and heard.
Include the names of on duty cleaners or maintenance if relevant.

If the victim is a tenant, record the business name, phone number, the person’s name and position.
Photograph the scene thoroughly, if equipped with a camera. Preserve and retain any evidence
using an appropriate container and storage method. Write your name, the date, time and victim’s
name on a label and attach it to the evidence in the correct manner.
At sites with recorded CCTV cameras, ensure that all relevant video records are preserved and/or
duplicated and properly stored. Complete a detailed report and bring it to the attention of Property
Management.

10.3 Shock, Unconsciousness, Fainting

Shock is a condition caused by partial or complete lack of oxygen in the body due to insufficient
blood volume. This can be caused by severe bleeding, allergic reactions or severe/traumatic
injuries such as major broken bones.
There are varying levels of consciousness. Unconsciousness means a patient who is completely
unresponsive on several levels, including sound and a painful stimulus.
Fainting is a temporary loss of consciousness that can be caused by fear, stress or poor diet, pain,
illness, etc. Treat patients who faint for shock.

10.4 Choking adults

Choking is a complete or partial obstruction of the airway interfering with breathing. If an adult is
moving air but conscious, the correct treatment is to encourage them to dislodge the obstruction.
If they lose consciousness or become partially unresponsive, after you have absolute or implied
consent you may assist them clearing their airway and if necessary perform CPR.

10.5 Severe bleeding

Sever bleeding represents a threat to life in many different ways. The patient could go into deep
medical shock if left untreated or die from a lack of blood sufficient to move oxygen through the
body. The correct treatment for severe bleeding is to apply direct pressure, elevate the area of the
body affected and provide the patient with rest.

Page 317 of 346 Basic Training Manual Version 10 – 14 March 2017 Paragon Security ©
 Paragon Academy Basic Security Training Manual

10.6 One rescuer CPR for adults

Heart compressions are only performed for a patient who is not breathing and does not have a
pulse or heart rate. If the person has a heart rate but is not breathing, rescue breathing may be
required to assist them.
If a patient is unconscious but breathing and they have a heart rate, they are placed in the recovery
position and monitored if there is a threat to the airway and no risk of spinal injury. If there is not
an immediate risk to the airway and there is a risk of spinal injury do not move the patient unless
some other factor is present or develops that presents an immediate and serious risk to life such as
fire, etc.
CPR may be applied using a variety of methods. For a patient who is not breathing and who does
not have a pulse, heart compressions and rescue breathing may be used if it is safe to do so. This
generally means that there is a barrier such as a CPR pocket mask available to you and that you do
not have a personal safety concern.
If you are unable or unwilling to perform full CPR you may provide compressions only CPR to
move oxygen sufficient to sustain life or prevent further harm for a brief period due to a patient’s
natural oxygen reserves.

10.7 Summary

This section provided the reader a brief overview of the Security role and some concerns that may
occur in the workplace. Security Guards are responsible for health and safety of persons on a
protected property as well as Security and the physical plant. A Security Guard’s actions must not
be negligent and undertaken in good faith if they are to provide emergency first aid assistance to
anyone.
The Emergency First Aid, CPR Level – B or C certification program will provide you with more
in depth information as well as hands on practice to develop the psychomotor skills at the required
competency level.

Page 318 of 346 Basic Training Manual Version 10 – 14 March 2017 Paragon Security ©
 Paragon Academy Basic Security Training Manual

Practice Quiz Questions

The following pages have several sample examination questions, including content set out in the
curriculum and that you may find on the Ministry required examination. The recommended study
methodology is to answer as many of the questions as possible, without reviewing the material and
sections presented in this manual.

Once you have answered all the questions you are able to, without looking, go back and review
the sections for the questions you cannot answer. Answer the remainder of the questions, to the
best of your ability then check your results against the answers provided at the end of this exercise.

1 Which of the following are basic Security Guard duties?

A Enforcing traffic rules on city streets
B Patrolling public places and enforcing laws
C Enforcing rules and regulations on private property
D Finding and capturing wanted criminals

2 The Criminal Code of Canada allows:

A Special authorities for police officers and Security Guards
B Security Guards the same authorities as other private citizens
C Security Guards to use reasonable force arresting people named on a warrant
D Prevents Security Guards using force to remove trespassers

3 What is the best description of a site patrol duty?

A Assigned to a specific site, patrolling the property
B Assigned to a specific static post
C Assigned to patrol between many sites
D Assigned to patrol a specific area for the purpose of detecting fire

Page 319 of 346 Basic Training Manual Version 10 – 14 March 2017 Paragon Security ©
 Paragon Academy Basic Security Training Manual

4 Which of the following regulates the security industry in Ontario?

A The Criminal Code and Charter of Rights
B The Private Security Investigative Services Act, 2005
C The Police Services Act
D The Private Investigators Security Guards Act, 1990

5 What is the maximum penalty for an individual’s violation of the code of conduct?
A $1000.00 fine
B Community service
C $25,000.00 fine and/or a year in jail
D Suspension or revocation of the Security Guard license

6 Licensees are prohibited from the following acts:

A Following someone without their consent for the purpose of gathering information
B Forcibly removing an unwanted patron from a night club
C Assisting an owner of an apartment by reporting a tenant’s activities
D Providing information about a person in a witness protection program
7 Which of the following are valid surveillance techniques?
A Observing the physical environment and using situation awareness
B Using parabolic microphones to listen in on private conversations
C Using telescopes to peek into windows of residences
D Purposely following a vehicle closely to intimidate the subject who is a criminal

8 Which of the following is a benefit of mobile patrol compared to foot patrol?

A Greater ability to carry equipment
B Greater ability to chase and catch fleeing criminals
C Greater ability to closely assess the protected building
D Greater ability to enforce parking laws

Page 320 of 346 Basic Training Manual Version 10 – 14 March 2017 Paragon Security ©
 Paragon Academy Basic Security Training Manual

9 Access control is considered for which types of people?

A Employees
B Customers
C Everyone entering the premises
D The general public

10 Which of the following is true about alarms?

A Security Guards can easily obtain prompt back up when needed
B Security Guards always work with partners so they can investigate alarms
C Security Guards often respond alone and do not have immediate back up
D Security Guards only respond to false alarms
11 Which of the following are possible indicators of a person intoxicated by drugs?
A Signs of nervousness, body twitching and sweating
B A limp right arm
C Speaking in a high pitched and loud voice
D Increased abilities to reason and think rapidly

12 What patterns should be avoided by Security Guards?

A Regularly scheduled rotating shifts
B Knowing where you are at all times and how to summon help
C Regular people and their activities on the site
D Completing patrols routinely at the same time each day

13 What are the following types of reports a Security Guard may normally complete?
A Shift logs, incident reports, briefing reports and use of force reports
B Crown briefs and private information
C Timetables, needs assessments and recommendations
D Executive summary and progress reports

Page 321 of 346 Basic Training Manual Version 10 – 14 March 2017 Paragon Security ©
 Paragon Academy Basic Security Training Manual

14 What word best describes what is required regarding statements?

A Recorded
B Verbatim
C Paraphrased
D Hand written

15 What is required of employers according to the Occupational Health & Safety Act?
A Provide body armour to employees
B Provide a reasonably safe and healthy work environment
C Provide higher pay rates in riskier work environments
D Ensure that two guards are assigned to a site at night time

16 When responding to an alarm and detecting a lot of smoke a Guard should:

A Call the fire Department and start a search for people inside
B Call the Fire Department and put the fire out
C Enter the building to check for trapped people
D Call the Fire Department, stay a safe distance and keep people back

17 What is the first priority when responding to an emergency?

A Preserve the evidence and ensure the scene does not get contaminated
B Gather witnesses and take statements
C Assess hazards and ensure the area is safe to approach
D Triage injuries and treat life threatening injuries
18 What of the following is a failure to provide duty of care?
A Fail to report a normal looking car in the parking lot, later found to be a crime scene
B Fail to confiscate a barbeque from a balcony at an apartment that later starts a fire
C Fail to report a broken window noticed that turns out to be the entry for a theft
D Fail to assess the root causes of a fire

Page 322 of 346 Basic Training Manual Version 10 – 14 March 2017 Paragon Security ©
 Paragon Academy Basic Security Training Manual

19 What should you do when preserving a crime scene?

A Remove broken glass, knives, blood and other safety hazards
B Secure the perimeter and investigate the scene, personally
C Determine the centre of the scene and work your way out
D Secure the scene and ensure no one enters, touches or moves anything until police arrive

20 What should you do when receiving a bomb threat?

A Remove suspicious looking packages from the area
B Notify people working in the building there could be a bomb
C Immediately call 911
D Contact property management, report the matter and follow their instructions

21 What is statute law?

A Written law
B Family law
C Provincial Law
D Case Law

22 Which of the following is true in most criminal law?

A Assumed guilty until proven innocent
B The onus is on the accused to prove innocence
C The onus is on the complainant to prove guilt
D The burden of proof is on both parties to the offence
23 Which of the following related to the court system is true?
A Ontario Court decisions supersede those of the Supreme Court of Canada
B Municipalities have the authority to make laws contradicting provincial laws
C Lower courts are bound by the decisions of higher courts
D Provincial Appeals Courts are the highest courts in the land

Page 323 of 346 Basic Training Manual Version 10 – 14 March 2017 Paragon Security ©
 Paragon Academy Basic Security Training Manual

24 When attending court, what should you bring?

A Your notebook and original reports you made
B Evidence such as the weapon seized at the time of the offence
C A photograph of the subject on the day they were arrested
D A co-worker for moral support

25 What are two acts governing admissibility of evidence?

A Ontario Civil Law and The Constitution Act
B The Criminal Code of Canada and PIPEDA
C Tort Law and the Employment Standards Act
D Canada Evidence Act and The Ontario Evidence Act

26 Which of the following statements is true for Security Guards on duty?

A You can arrest a person you find committing a criminal offence on/in relation to the site
B You can arrest a person found committing a summary offence while off duty
C You can arrest a person for which there is a warrant
D You can arrest a person who on reasonable grounds you believe has illegal drugs

27 Which of the following is an example of an intentional tort?

A Theft
B False Arrest
C Fraudulently taking a sick day
D Failure to provide a reasonably safe environment by not reporting a spill on the floor

Page 324 of 346 Basic Training Manual Version 10 – 14 March 2017 Paragon Security ©
 Paragon Academy Basic Security Training Manual

28 What is the definition of negligence?

A An act one does intentionally to another resulting in injury or loss
B An act causing personal injury to a person
C Failure to provides a reasonably safe and healthy work environment
D Failure to use reasonable care and attention

29 What is duty of care?

A Anyone performing a duty must adhere to a reasonable standard of care
B Duty of an individual to do their best while working
C Duty to ensure everything is done to prevent injuries
D Duty to provide a 100% secure environment under Occupier’s Liability

30 Which of the following is a closed question?

A Who attacked you?
B Describe to me what you saw?
C How did the accident happen?
D Is it true the car hit the truck after running the red light?

31 A Security Guard is working as a doorperson at a licensed establishment when an

obviously intoxicated person tries to enter. What should the Security Guard do?
A Arrest the person for drunk and disorderly in a public place
B Physically restrain the person and call for the police
C Refuse entry to the person
D Allow them to enter and closely monitor their behaviour

Page 325 of 346 Basic Training Manual Version 10 – 14 March 2017 Paragon Security ©
 Paragon Academy Basic Security Training Manual

32 A Security Guard is working as a doorperson at a licensed establishment. An

obviously intoxicated person is leaving the bar. What should the Security Guard
do?
A Arrest the person for drunk and disorderly in a public place
B Follow them to their car and call the police
C Ensure they have a safe way to get home
D Nothing, as you have no authority under the Liquor License Act

33 You are working as a Security Guard and your duty is to escort a large group of
people through a high security area. Where should you position yourself in relation
to the group to best accomplish your job?
A The front of the group
B The back of the group
C Beside the group on either side
D Access the group, then monitor their movements by closed circuit television

34 While working as a Security Guard you are patrolling the perimeter of the
property. You come across an apparent crime scene. What is the first thing you
should do?
A Cordon off the area, contain the scene, keep bystanders away and call for the police
B Call 911
C Identify witnesses, interview them and prevent them from leaving
D Put up caution tape, photograph the scene, draw diagrams and collect physical evidence

35 While working as a Security Guard you are responding to an emergency scene on

the property. What is your best course of action?
A Identify witnesses and ask them what they saw
B Call your supervisor and enter the scene to offer assistance
C Take notes and return to the office to submit a report
D Stop and evaluate the scene is safe before approaching

Page 326 of 346 Basic Training Manual Version 10 – 14 March 2017 Paragon Security ©
 Paragon Academy Basic Security Training Manual

36 What is the best type of extinguisher to use dousing an electrical fire?

A Class A
B Class B
C Class C
D Class D

37 You are on bicycle patrol when you witness a person smash a car window. What do
you do?
A Call 911 and ask for immediate assistance as there is a break and enter in progress
B Call for back up and wait but do not approach the person
C Immediately arrest the person for mischief to private property
D Observe and monitor the situation, take notes and submit an incident report at the end of
your shift

38 You are on patrol in the mechanical penthouse of a building when you notice a
puddle forming from liquid leaking out of a drum. What do you do?
A Call 911 and ask for the fire department to attend
B Place barricades down, contain the spill and use a squeegee to push it down a drain
C Make a note of the concern and submit an incident report at the end of your shift
D Keep people away from the area and check WHMIS and MSDS information on site

39 What radio 10 code is used when you don’t understand what the dispatcher has said
and you need them to repeat their transmission?
A 10-78
B 10-99
C 10-9
D 10-4

Page 327 of 346 Basic Training Manual Version 10 – 14 March 2017 Paragon Security ©
 Paragon Academy Basic Security Training Manual

40 What is the best course of action to take when you find people stuck in an elevator,
after hours late in the evening?
A Locate the elevator, reassure the occupants and call the elevator service company
B Call 911
C Attempt to force the doors open and rescue the trapped occupants
D Call the site property manager and ask for instructions

41 You are working as a Security Guard at a large night club when you receive a radio
call asking you to respond to the ground level and provide assistance at the door.
What do you do?
A Run immediately to the area to determine how you can help
B Ask for more information and respond as quickly as possible in a safe manner
C Respond as quickly as possible in a safe manner and call 911 on your way
D Ask your supervisor to respond as you are engaged in other critical duties

42 Your supervisor asks you to write a detailed summary report briefing the client
regarding an occurrence. You have never written a report of this nature before.
What do you do?
A Write the report and seek the assistance and advice of your supervisor
B Advise your supervisor this is not in your job description
C Ask your co-workers to assist you with the report and detail all concerns the team may
have regarding the incident
D Do the best you can and submit the report as is

43 You are working as a Security Guard in a factory when you come across a small,
contained fire in an outside trash bin on the property. What do you do?
A Use a fire house to douse the flames before it gets out of hand
B Call 911 and request the assistance of the Fire Department immediately
C Throw a floor mat over the fire to smother it
D Use a portable extinguisher of the correct type to put it out

Page 328 of 346 Basic Training Manual Version 10 – 14 March 2017 Paragon Security ©
 Paragon Academy Basic Security Training Manual

44 You come across a contractor on the roof that cannot provide the request for work
order and you have no record of him needing to be there, what do you do?
A Arrest them for trespassing
B Properly identify them and contact your supervisor by radio to report the matter and
follow instructions
C Make them immediately leave the area with their tools and lock the roof access to
prevent further intrusion
D Take notes and submit an incident report at the end of your shift

45 A worker returns to the worksite after hours and advises he has forgotten his tools
in a secure area of the facility that he says he needs the next morning for work at
another worksite. What should you do?
A Let the worker get his tools and submit a report
B Properly identify the worker, escort him to the area and note all property he removes in
detail
C Refuse him access to the area and advise him to return during business hours the next day
D Call the property manager at home to get authorization before giving the worker his tools

46 You are working alone on a site after hours at a fixed post in the lobby of the
building and you have been given strict instructions to not leave the desk unless
properly relived. You receive a mechanical alarm. What do you do?
A Stay at your post and submit an incident report at the end of your shift
B Immediately attend the mechanical area to determine the cause
C Contact mechanical personnel for the site and advise them of the alarm
D Continue to monitor the alarm condition to see if it gets worse

Page 329 of 346 Basic Training Manual Version 10 – 14 March 2017 Paragon Security ©
 Paragon Academy Basic Security Training Manual

47 Which of the following items best describes paraverbal communication?

A Tone, pitch, cadence and pacing
B Volume of the voice
C Body language
D Firmness in direct proportion to the level of resistance received

48 You are on site after an emergency. A man suffered a heart attack and has been
taken away by ambulance to the hospital. What is your next step?
A Contact the hospital to determine the patient’s condition
B Return to the security office, notify your supervisor or dispatcher and write a detailed
incident report
C Call the client at home to verbally notify her what occurred
D Make detailed notes and submit an occurrence report the next business day

49 You are working as a Security Guard when you become the victim of a criminal act
while on duty. What do you do next?
A Complete a detailed report and notify your supervisor
B Call the police and make a report
C Attempt to identify the suspect, conduct an investigation and arrest the offender once
identified
D Take notes and notify your supervisor on the next business day

50 You need to respond to an unusual situation on your site. What is the first authority
you should consider before formulating your plan?
A Federal and provincial statutes
B Post orders, daily briefs and your supervisor’s instructions
C The client’s policy
D Your security company’s policy

Page 330 of 346 Basic Training Manual Version 10 – 14 March 2017 Paragon Security ©
 Paragon Academy Basic Security Training Manual

51 You are working as a Security Guard and approached by a female reporting a

sexual assault committed by someone known to you, what do you do?
A Locate the suspect and arrest him
B Advise the complainant that she can notify police and write a detailed report
C Advise the complainant she can arrest the subject and assist her with the arrest
D Immediately call the police and report the matter to them

52 What does section 10 of the charter apply to?

A Freedom of religion
B The right to vote
C Security Guard’s authority to search a person
D A person’s rights on arrest or detention

53 An employee has been fired and you are under direction to retrieve company
property they keep in their locker. What do you do?

A Immediately open the locker with bolt cutters and seize the company property
B Ask management for a second key and have the foreman witness what you remove and
turn over the fired employee’s property at a later date
C Let the employee empty their locker and bring the items to you at your post
D Escort them, get them to open the locker, document everything belonging to the company
and have them sign that you have obtained these items from them.

54 What is the definition of statute law?

A Law written in official documents
B Decisions of the courts recorded and used as guidance for other court decisions
C Law from the British Common Law and Napoleonic Code
D Laws used to right the wrongs by providing civil remedies

Page 331 of 346 Basic Training Manual Version 10 – 14 March 2017 Paragon Security ©
 Paragon Academy Basic Security Training Manual

55 You come upon a car parked in an unauthorized area on your property. What is the
best thing to do?

A Open the car and see if you can find the ownership, identify the owner and have them
move it
B Call 911 and immediately report the matter to the police
C Record the vehicle’s information and call parking enforcement to attend, then submit a
report
D Call the towing company authorized on your site and have it removed

56 You have a statement from a person hand written on blue lined paper in pencil,
what do you do?

A Dispose of it and submit a proper report

B Ask the person who wrote it to re-write the statement in black ink and the proper format
C Ask your supervisor to speak to the person who made the statement
D Append the statement to your report

57 At what age is a personal legally an adult in Canada?

A 16 years of age
B 12 years of age
C 18 years of age
D 21 years of age

58 A noisy group forms a protest at the entrance to your store/mall, what do you do?
A Direct them to leave and advise them if they fail to comply they will be arrested for
trespassing
B Monitor the group and call the authorities if necessary to protect people or property
C Arrest the leader for engaging in prohibited activity
D Call 911 and ask the police to attend and arrest trouble makers

Page 332 of 346 Basic Training Manual Version 10 – 14 March 2017 Paragon Security ©
 Paragon Academy Basic Security Training Manual

59 What is the one piece of ID that a Security Guard on duty is required to carry by
law?
A Driver’s license issued in the province or country of origin
B A Canadian Social Insurance Card or permit to work
C A current passport issued in Canada or the country of the worker’s origin
D The Security Guard License issued to the Guard in the province of Ontario

60 Who must a Security Guard present identification to when asked?

A A peace office or justice of the peace
B The client, supervisor or official from the contract company employing the Guard
C Any member of the public who asks the Guard to present it
D Appointed inspectors or investigators working for the Private security and Investigative
Services Branch

61 What statute provides for the use of force by Security Guards when justified?
A The Criminal Code of Canada
B Post orders and company policy
C The Trespass to Property Act
D The Duty of Care Act

62 According to the regulations, who is the owner of the memo book you complete
while on duty?

A The Security Guard completing the notes

B The security company you work for
C The client for the property contracting security services
D The Ministry of Community Safety and Correctional Services

Page 333 of 346 Basic Training Manual Version 10 – 14 March 2017 Paragon Security ©
 Paragon Academy Basic Security Training Manual

63 What does WHMIS stand for?

A Workplace Heavy Materials Industrial Standards
B Workplace Hazmat Materials Information Synopsis
C Workplace Hazardous Materials Information System
D Workplace History Mandated Information Stories

64 You would likely be justified handcuffing someone when?

A They are younger and giving you a hard time
B They use words indicating they may be violent
C They fail to leave the property as directed
D You know they are wanted for questioning

65 You should report your use of force when?

A When I have to escort someone off property
B Only when I use hard physical control techniques
C The arrested person submits a complaint about being arrested
D The force used results in an injury to a subject that requires medical attention

66 The assessment process from the National Use of Force Framework is what?
A Profiled Subject Behaviours
B Assess, Plan ,Act
C Act, Assess, Plan
D Plan Officer Response Options

Page 334 of 346 Basic Training Manual Version 10 – 14 March 2017 Paragon Security ©
 Paragon Academy Basic Security Training Manual

67 An actively resistant, arrested Subject pulls away from you when arrested, you
should do what?
A Punch him at least three times
B Ground the Subject and handcuff him immediately
C Kick his shin and use strong commands to stop his resistance
D Use soft physical control techniques and tactical communications to control him

68 An aggressive subject raises his fist and yells a threat, closing aggressively. This
action is considered what level of profiled subject behaviour?

A Cooperative
B Actively Resistant
C Assaultive
D Passively Resistant

69 The best way to describe a Fire Safety Plan is which of the following?
A A legal document, which is approved by the local fire department and specifies the legal
responsibilities of the site owner and agents of the owner with respects to fire safety.
B A legal document containing the laws governing all aspects of fire
C Laws that are approved by the city for the site
D A legal document listing all of the emergency equipment and first aid cabinets on a site

70 When conducting a bomb search after a threatening call is received and a suspicious
object is found. What you should do next?
A Prevent anyone from going near or touching the object, notify the property manager and
follow instructions
B Immediately evacuate the building by pulling a fire alarm
C Call 911 and notify the dispatcher there is a bomb in the building
D Locate a bucket of water to douse the explosive and prevent it going off

Page 335 of 346 Basic Training Manual Version 10 – 14 March 2017 Paragon Security ©
 Paragon Academy Basic Security Training Manual

71 You encouter an irrate individual and another person in a heated conversation.

What should you do?
A Arrest both individuals for causing a disturbance
B Target your efforts to the individual speaking the loudest
C Observe from a safe distance and monitor the situation
D Ask both individuals to leave the property

72 In emergencies the role of Security is what?

A Always to protect life, the property, confidential information, and minimize liability
B Contain spills, keep innocent people inside; expedite response of security and document
who is at fault.
C Leave the site when an emergency occurs
D Assist the authorities by conducting a preliminary assessment and cancelling them if not
needed

73 During a labour dispute, which situation would best describe an Injunction?

A Special rights and authorities for police officers and Security Guards.
B Legal right under the Charter of Rights & Freedoms.
C A juncture point of an intersection where more than two streets meet.
D A court order limiting the number of picketers allowed on the picket line

74 Which of the following are examples of questions that WOULD NOT need to be
answered in an incident report/notebook?

A Was there any damage to people/property?

B Where did the incident occur?
C Who was involved?
D What the appropriate ban length should be for the trespassing infraction committed?

Page 336 of 346 Basic Training Manual Version 10 – 14 March 2017 Paragon Security ©
 Paragon Academy Basic Security Training Manual

75 Which of the following situations best describe an Indictable Offence?

A One person applies force to another person without permission or justification
B A petty crime committed on federal property at an airport
C A Labour Relations Act violation during a labour dispute involving a lockout of the
employees
D A serious crime witnessed by a Security Guard or another person
76 Which of the following is a definition of continuity of evidence?
A Chain of custody controlled by a police service.
B Unbroken chain of custody and control which protects integrity of an object.
C Chain of custody unbroken and controlled by only one individual.
D Evidence presented in proper sequence.

77 What is the legal drinking age for a person in a licensed establishment according to
the Liquor License Act of Ontario?
A 18 years of age or older
B 17 years of age or older
C 19 years of age or older
D 21 years of age or older
78 In what circumstances may an entry be made into a residential premise by a
landlord or an agent of the landlord under the Residential Tenancies Act without
notice?
A In the case where there is suspicion of illegal acts going on in the premise.
B In the case where the tenant is behind on their rent and the landlord wants to confiscate
property to recoup monies owed.
C In the case of an emergency situation where access is required to prevent major damage
and/or injury.
D In the case where a Realty agent wants to show the unit to potential renters.

Page 337 of 346 Basic Training Manual Version 10 – 14 March 2017 Paragon Security ©
 Paragon Academy Basic Security Training Manual

79 While working in a mall as a Security Guard you receive a call from a store clerk
regarding a theft occurrence in their store that they have witnessed. What should
you do next?
A You go to the store in question and make the arrest once the store clerk has identified the
suspect
B You go to the store in question and assist the store clerk in making a lawful arrest.
C You go to the store in question and use physical force to apprehend the suspect.
D You go to the store in question and arrest the suspect once they leave the store.

80 While on duty a Security Guard notices a youth skateboarding on the property

under protection. Upon approaching the youth and requesting that he stop
skateboarding and leave, the youth swears and yells at the Security Guard refusing
to leave. Under the Trespass to Private Property Act RSO 1990 the Security Guard
can do what?
A Swear and yell back at the youth in response to the treatment received.
B Arrest the youth as he has just committed a verbal assault against the Security Guard.
C Immediately contact 911 and have the police arrest the skateboarder for committing a
nuisance criminal offence
D Arrest the youth for failure to leave immediately when directed to do so.

81 Which one of the following would be an example of a “stereotype”?

A Men on average are larger than women.
B People who exercise a lot are in better shape than those who do not exercise at all.
C Older people are poor drivers.
D People of Asian ethnicity tend to have black color hair.

Page 338 of 346 Basic Training Manual Version 10 – 14 March 2017 Paragon Security ©
 Paragon Academy Basic Security Training Manual

82 While working as a Security Guard you notice a person with a disability having
difficulty entering the doors with their wheelchair. What should you do?
A Approach and ask if they would like your assistance.
B Approach quickly before they have an accident and push the wheelchair to correct the
problem.
C Monitor them until they ask for assistance.
D Continue your duties as the situation is personal and none of your business.
83 Which of the following is an example of a Bias that a Security Guard may have?
A People under the influence of illegal drugs may be dangerous.
B People from their own background are friendlier than people from anywhere else.
C Peace Officers are considered experts in the field of law and legal matters.
D Fire Fighters are best suited to fight large fires

84 Section 25 of the Criminal Code allows anyone who is required or authorized under
the law to do anything in administration or enforcement of the law if acting
reasonably to do what?
A Use as much force as reasonably necessary for that purpose.
B Use force to reasonably protect their self against assault.
C Use force to reasonably protect others against assault.
D Use reasonable defensive force to prevent injury to self or others.

85 Which of the following are symptoms of Excited Delirium?

A Hallucinations, paranoia and difficulty breathing.
B Cold skin, bad body odour and very aggressive behaviour.
C Chest pains, nausea and shortness of breath.
D Unexpected physical strength, impaired thinking and abnormal tolerance of pain.

Page 339 of 346 Basic Training Manual Version 10 – 14 March 2017 Paragon Security ©
 Paragon Academy Basic Security Training Manual

86 Working as a Security Guard you arrest an individual for committing a crime.

What is a “best practice” step you should take to ensure the arresting person’s
rights have been met?
A Search them and confiscate any evidence you find.
B Inform them of their right to legal counsel.
C Make sure they are comfortable and their handcuffs are not too tight.
D Provide a translator immediately if they do not speak English.

87 What does Private Information & Protection of Electronic Documents Act govern?
A Use of internet, computers, email and electronic devices.
B The collection, use and disclosure of personal information.
C Protection of private and personal documents against theft.
D The types of documents that can be collected and stored electronically.

88 What is a common physical access control method employed on a building?

A Doors and mechanical locks.
B A gate, barricade or a fence.
C A guard dog.
D An alarm system.

Page 340 of 346 Basic Training Manual Version 10 – 14 March 2017 Paragon Security ©
 Paragon Academy Basic Security Training Manual

89 You are working at a manufacturing facility where employees have signed a

workplace contract agreeing to a search of their person and parcels prior to exiting
the building. An employee is leaving at the end of their shift. You ask to search
them and they refuse to allow you to perform the search. What should you do?
A Search them under the authority of the Trespass to Property Act.
B Do not search them, advise them it is the company policy to search all employees and
request they await a facility manager.
C Arrest them on the reasonable and probable grounds of having stolen something.
D Insist that they submit to a search by reminding them that they have signed a contract to
that effect.

90 Section 494, subsection 1(a) of the Criminal Code of Canada allows what authority
to persons?
A Peace officers to arrest people without warrant who they believe on reasonable grounds
to have committed an offence for which they may be arrested without warrant
B Security Guards to arrest people without warrant who they believe on reasonable grounds
to have committed an offence for which they may be arrested without warrant
C Anyone to arrest a person whom he finds committing an indictable offence
D The authority for anyone who is required or authorized to do anything in the
administration or enforcement of the law to use as much force as is reasonably necessary
for that purpose

Page 341 of 346 Basic Training Manual Version 10 – 14 March 2017 Paragon Security ©
 Paragon Academy Basic Security Training Manual

Answer Key

1 C 24 A 47 A 70 A
2 B 25 D 48 B 71 C
3 A 26 A 49 B 72 A
4 B 27 B 50 A 73 D
5 C 28 D 51 B 74 D
6 D 29 A 52 D 75 D
7 A 30 D 53 D 76 B
8 A 31 C 54 A 77 C
9 C 32 C 55 C 78 C
10 C 33 B 56 D 79 B
11 A 34 A 57 C 80 D
12 D 35 D 58 B 81 C
13 A 36 C 59 D 82 A
14 B 37 B 60 C 83 B
15 B 38 D 61 A 84 A
16 D 39 C 62 B 85 D
17 C 40 A 63 C 86 B
18 C 41 B 64 B 87 B
19 D 42 A 65 D 88 A
20 D 43 D 66 B 89 B
21 A 44 B 67 D 90 C
22 C 45 B 68 C
23 C 46 C 69 A

Page 342 of 346 Basic Training Manual Version 10 – 14 March 2017 Paragon Security ©
 Paragon Academy Basic Security Training Manual

Booking Your Examination

Please book your examination by contacting Ontario Security

Guard and Private Investigator

http://www.ontariosecuritytesting.ca/

1-866-248-2555

Page 343 of 346 Basic Training Manual Version 10 – 14 March 2017 Paragon Security ©
 Paragon Academy Basic Security Training Manual

Acknowledgements
Author and Instructional Design
Paragon Security
Scott Suter
Director, Training and Development
1st revision April 2010
Current version revised January 12th 2016

Original Artwork
Figures 9.6.3.a, 9.6.3.b, 9.6.3.c
Luis Matias
Paragon Security
Instructor, Security Training
MPTC Certified Senior Instructor

Page 344 of 346 Basic Training Manual Version 10 – 14 March 2017 Paragon Security ©
 Paragon Academy Basic Security Training Manual

References

Ministry of Community Safety & Correctional Services, Private Security

Investigative Services Branch
Various advisories and backgrounders as published

Training Curriculum for Security Guards

Revised 2009

Private Investigator and Security Guard Training Manual

Corrections Public Safety and Policing
Government of Saskatchewan, Canada
Published 2007

Manitoba Security Guard Training Program

Participant’s Manual
Manitoba Justice 2002

All Legal Statutes & Law, as cited

CanLii.org
Government of Canada
Government of Ontario

The Law Enforcement Handbook

Methuen Publications, Agincourt
Desmond Rowland and James Bailey
1983

American Society of Industrial Security (ASIS)

Protection of Assets Manual
2010

Explosives Management Group

http://www.explosivesmanagement.com/index.html

Canadian Bomb Data Centre

http://www.rcmp-grc.gc.ca/tops-opst/cbdc-ccdb/index-eng.htm

Page 345 of 346 Basic Training Manual Version 10 – 14 March 2017 Paragon Security ©
 Paragon Academy Basic Security Training Manual

Suspicious Packages – courtesy of United States Postal Service

Figure 8.4.a
https://www.usps.com/

International Law Enforcement Educators and Trainers Association

Numerous articles and presentations researched

How to Spot Armed Suspects

Policeone.com
Charles Remsberg
2007

Non Violent Crisis Physical Intervention

Instructor’s Manual CPI
http://www.crisisprevention.com/

NIOSH National Institute for Occupational Safety and Health

http://www.cdc.gov/niosh/

IAHSS Basic Canadian Manual on case studies numbers on Violence at

Work in a Hospital
http://www.iahss.org/

6 Things to Do During a Violent Confrontation

Workplaceviolence911.com
Joone Kim

Professional Security Training Network

Page 346 of 346 Basic Training Manual Version 10 – 14 March 2017 Paragon Security ©